TEC MA-1595-1 SERIES Owner's Manual

Add to my manuals
236 Pages

advertisement

TEC MA-1595-1 SERIES Owner's Manual | Manualzz

TEC Electronic Cash Register

MA-1595-1 SERIES

Owner's Manual

“This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.”

“Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.”

FCC Notice

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by manufacturer for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

CAUTION!

1. This manual may not be copied in whole or in part without prior written permission of

TOSHIBA TEC.

2. The contents of this manual may be changed without notification.

3. Please refer to your local Authorised Service representative with regard to any queries you may have in this manual.

Copyright © 2003 by TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION

All Rights Reserved

570 Ohito, Izunokuni-shi, Shizuoka-ken, JAPAN

Safety Summary EO1-11152

6DIHW\6XPPDU\

Personal safety in handling or maintaining the equipment is extremely important. Warnings and Cautions necessary for safe handling are included in this manual. All warnings and cautions contained in this manual should be read and understood before handling or maintaining the equipment.

Do not attempt to effect repairs or modifications to this equipment. If a fault occurs that cannot be rectified using the procedures described in this manual, turn off the power, unplug the machine, then contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.

0HDQLQJVRI(DFK6\PERO

This symbol indicates warning items (including cautions).

Specific warning contents are drawn inside the symbol.

(The symbol on the left indicates a general caution.)

This symbol indicates prohibited actions (prohibited items).

Specific prohibited contents are drawn inside or near the symbol.

(The symbol on the left indicates “no disassembling”.)

This symbol indicates actions which must be performed.

Specific instructions are drawn inside or near the ● symbol.

(The symbol on the left indicates “disconnect the power cord plug from the outlet”.)

:$51,1*

3URKLELWHG

This indicates that there is the risk of death or serious injury if the machines are improperly handled contrary to this indication.

Do not plug in or unplug the power cord plug with wet hands as this may cause

electric shock.

$Q\ RWKHU WKDQ WKH

VSHFLILHG $& YROWDJH LV

SURKLELWHG

Do not use voltages other than the voltage (AC) specified on the rating plate, as this may cause fire or electric shock.

3URKLELWHG

3URKLELWHG

If the machines share the same outlet with any other electrical appliances that consume large amounts of power, the voltage will fluctuate widely each time these appliances operate. Be sure to provide an exclusive outlet for the machine as this may cause fire or electric

shock.

Do not insert or drop metal, flammable or other foreign objects into the machines through the ventilation slits, as this may cause fire or electric

shock.

3URKLELWHG

3URKLELWHG

Do not place metal objects or water-filled containers such as flower vases, flower pots or mugs, etc. on top of the machines. If metal objects or spilled liquid enter the machines, this may cause fire or electric shock.

Do not scratch, damage or modify the power cords. Also, do not place heavy objects on, pull on, or excessively bend the cords, as this may cause fire or electric shock.

'LVFRQQHFW

WKH SOXJ

If the machines are dropped or their cabinets damaged, first turn off the power switches and disconnect the power cord plugs from the outlet, and then contact your authorized

TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance. Continued use of the machine in that condition may cause fire or electric

shock.

'LVFRQQHFW

WKH SOXJ

Continued use of the machines in an abnormal condition such as when the machines are producing smoke or strange smells may cause

fire or electric shock. In these cases, immediately turn off the power switches and disconnect the power cord plugs from the outlet.

Then, contact your authorized

TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.

(i)

Safety Summary EO1-11152

'LVFRQQHFW

WKH SOXJ

&RQQHFW D

JURXQGLQJ ZLUH

If foreign objects (metal fragments, water, liquids) enter the machines, first turn off the power switches and disconnect the power cord plugs from the outlet, and then contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.

Continued use of the machine in that condition may cause fire or

electric shock.

Ensure that the equipment is properly grounded. Extension cables should also be grounded.

Fire or electric shock could occur on improperly grounded equipment.

'LVFRQQHFW

WKH SOXJ

1R

GLVDVVHPEOLQJ

When unplugging the power cords, be sure to hold and pull on the plug portion. Pulling on the cord portion may cut or expose the internal wires and cause fire or electric shock.

Do not remove covers, repair or modify the machine by yourself.

You may be injured by high voltage, very hot parts or sharp edges inside the machine.

Unauthorized modification is prohibited.

&$87,21 This indicates that there is the risk of personal Injury or damage to objects if the machines are improperly handled contrary to this indication.

3UHFDXWLRQV

The following precautions will help to ensure that this machine will continue to function correctly.

● Try to avoid locations that have the following adverse conditions:

* Temperatures out of the specification * Direct sunlight * High humidity

* Shared power source * Excessive vibration

● Do not subject the machine to sudden shocks.

* Dust/Gas

● Do not press the keys too hard. Keys will operate correctly if they are touched lightly.

● Clean the cover and keyboard, etc. by wiping with a dry cloth or a cloth soaked with detergent and wrung out thoroughly. Never use thinner or other volatile solvent for cleaning.

● At the end of the day, turn the power OFF, then clean and inspect the exterior of the machine.

● Try to avoid using this equipment on the same power supply as high voltage equipment or equipment likely to cause mains interference.

● USE ONLY TOSHIBA TEC SPECIFIED consumables.

● DO NOT STORE the consumables where they might be exposed to direct sunlight, high temperatures, high humidity, dust, or gas.

● When moving the machine, take hold of the drawer and lift the machine.

● Do not place heavy objects on top of the machines, as these items may become unbalanced and fall causing injury.

● Do not block the ventilation slits of the machines, as this will cause heat to build up inside the machines and may cause fire.

● Do not lean against the machine. It may fall on you and could cause injury.

● Place the machine on a stable and level surface.

5HTXHVW 5HJDUGLQJ 0DLQWHQDQFH

● Utilize our maintenance services.

After purchasing the machine, contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance once a year to have the inside of the machine cleaned. Otherwise, dust will build up inside the machines and may cause a fire or a malfunction. Cleaning is particularly effective before humid rainy seasons.

● Our preventive maintenance service performs the periodic checks and other work required to maintain the quality and performance of the machines, preventing accidents beforehand.

For details, please consult your authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.

● Using insecticides and other chemicals

Do not expose the machines to insecticides or other volatile solvents. This will cause the cabinet or other parts to deteriorate or cause the paint to peel.

(ii)

1. STAND-ALONE LEVEL

OPERATOR’S GUIDE

EO1-11152

MA-1595-1 SERIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

1. TO OUR CUSTOMERS-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1- 1

4. MODE LOCK AND MODE SELECTOR KEYS ------------------------------------------------- 4- 1

4.1 Mode Lock-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4- 1

4.2 Mode Selector Keys-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4- 1

5.1 Upper Row (16-digit dot windows) -------------------------------------------------------------------- 5- 2

5.2 Lower Row (10-digit 7-segment Numeric Display)------------------------------------------------ 5- 4

5.3 Display Indicator ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5- 4

6. OUTLINE OF PREPARATION PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATING THE ECR ---- 6- 1

6.1 Installing/Replacing the Receipt/Journal Roll ------------------------------------------------------ 6- 2

7. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS------------------------------------- 7- 1

7.1 Cashier Code Entry -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7- 1

7.2 Cashier Key Method ([CLK] Keys) ------------------------------------------------------------------- 7- 3

7.3 Training Mode Start and End -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7- 4

8. KEYBOARD LAYOUT --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8- 1

9. FUNCTIONS OF EACH KEY------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9- 1

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT-------------------------------------- 10- 1

10.1 Receipt-Issue/Non-Issue Selection --------------------------------------------------------------- 10- 2

10.2 Store Message Display ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10- 2

10.5 Department Entry ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10- 4

10.6 Gasoline Entry ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10- 4

10.7 PLU Entry (Manual PLU Code Entry) ------------------------------------------------------------ 10- 5

10.8 PLU Entry through Barcode Scanner ------------------------------------------------------------ 10- 5

10.9 Cigarette and Alcoholic Beverage Entry

(Entry of Sales Item Restricted by Age Limit) ------------------------------------------------- 10- 5

10.10 Repeat Entry ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10- 6

10.11 Quantity Extension (Multiplication) for DEPTs/PLUs ----------------------------------------- 10- 7

10.12 Split Package Pricing -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10- 7

10.13 HI-CONE PLUs -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10- 9

10.14 Mix & Match (M & M) Function of Split-Price PLUs ------------------------------------------ 10-11

10.15 Price Shift Entry for Split-Price PLUs------------------------------------------------------------ 10-12

10.17 Single-Item Department or Single-Item PLU Entry------------------------------------------- 10-15

EO1-11152

MA-1595-1 SERIES

Page

10.18 HASH Department Entry, HASH PLU Entry --------------------------------------------------- 10-15

10.19 Sub-Link Department Entry------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-15

10.20 Sub-Link PLU Entry --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-16

10.21 Urgent PLU Maintenance -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-16

10.25 Percent Discount, Percent Charge -------------------------------------------------------------- 10-18

10.31 Non-Add Number Print ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-20

10.33 Listing Capacity Open ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-22

10.34 Selective Itemizer (SI) Status Modification----------------------------------------------------- 10-22

10.35 Tax Status or Food Stamp Status Modification ----------------------------------------------- 10-23

10.36 Manual Tax Entry ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-23

10.37 Subtotal (Sale Total Pre-taxed) Read ----------------------------------------------------------- 10-23

10.38 Taxable Total (Sale Total With Taxes) Read-------------------------------------------------- 10-23

10.39 Taxable Total Read and Subtotal Print --------------------------------------------------------- 10-23

10.40 Selective Itemizer (SI) Total Read --------------------------------------------------------------- 10-24

10.41 PLU Preset Price Read----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-24

10.42 Tax Calculation and Print -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-24

10.44 Food Stampable Total Read, Food Stamp Tendering -------------------------------------- 10-25

10.45 Sale Finalization by Media Keys ----------------------------------------------------------------- 10-26

10.48 Sale Finalization by EFT (Electronic Fund Transfer) ---------------------------------------- 10-28

10.49 Check Cashing (No-sale cashing of a non-cash media)------------------------------------ 10-42

10.50 Sale Paid in Foreign Currencies------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-42

10.51 No-Sale Exchange from Foreign Currency to Domestic Currency ----------------------- 10-43

10.52 No-Sale Exchange from Domestic Currency to Foreign Currency ----------------------- 10-43

10.55 Salesperson Entry (Salesperson Sign-ON)---------------------------------------------------- 10-45

10.56 Hold & Recall ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-45

10.57 Credit Card No. Check------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-46

10.59 Charge Posting: Previous Balance Manual Entry Type------------------------------------- 10-47

10.60 Charge Posting: Customer File Type (Check Track Memory Option) ------------------- 10-49

10.61 Function Key Entry ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-51

10.64 Sale Finalization by EBT (Electronic Benefit Transfer) ------------------------------------- 10-53

10.66 Remote Slip Printer (hardware option) Operation -------------------------------------------- 10-55

10.67 When a Power Failure Occurs… ----------------------------------------------------------------- 10-57

EO1-11152

MA-1595-1 SERIES

Page

11. JOURNAL AND RECEIPT PAPER-END DETECTOR-------------------------------------- 11- 1

12. ECR PRINTER MOTOR LOCK DETECTOR -------------------------------------------------- 11- 1

13. REMOTE SLIP PRINTER MOTOR LOCK DETECTOR ------------------------------------ 13- 1

14. PRINTER HEAD OPEN DETECTOR ------------------------------------------------------------ 13- 1

15. GENERAL MAINTENANCE------------------------------------------------------------------------ 15- 1

15.1 Cleaning the Covers---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15- 1

15.2 Removing Jammed Paper -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15- 1

15.3 Clearing the Cutter Error ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15- 1

15.4 Manual Drawer Release and Lock---------------------------------------------------------------- 15- 2

15.5 Removing the Drawer-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15- 2

15.6 Media Slot ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15- 3

15.7 CDC (Cash Drawer Cover; Option) Lock-------------------------------------------------------- 15- 3

16. SPECIFICATIONS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 16- 1

1. TO OUR CUSTOMERS EO1-11152

1. TO OUR CUSTOMERS

1. TO OUR CUSTOMERS

Thank you for choosing the TEC electronic cash register MA-1595 series. This instruction manual provides a description of the functions and handling of this ECR and should be read carefully to ensure optimum performance. Since every consideration has been given to safety and reliability, there is no danger of damaging the machine by incorrect operation.

Please refer to this manual whenever you have any questions concerning the machine. This machine has been manufactured under strict quality control and should give you full satisfaction. However, if the machine is damaged during transport or there are any unclear points in this manual, please contact your local TOSHIBA

TEC representative.

The specifications described in this manual may be modified by TOSHIBA TEC, if necessary.

Be sure to keep this manual for future reference.

2. ACCESSORIES

Confirm that all the following accessories are contained in the carton. If any accessories are missing or damaged, contact our nearest TOSHIBA TEC service representative.

REG MA S

Owner’s Manual (1 copy) Paper Roll (2 pcs.) Mode Selector Keys

(REG key, MA key, S key: 2 pcs. each)

Journal Take-up Reel (1 pc.) Drawer Key (2 pcs.) Printer Cover Key (2 pcs.)

1- 1

3. APPEARANCE AND NOMENCLATURE EO1-11152

3. APPEARANCE AND NOMENCLATURE

3. APPEARANCE AND NOMENCLATURE

Printer Cover

Journal Window

Operator Display

Receipt Outlet

Drawer

Keyboard

Printer Cover

The cover for the Receipt or Journal paper

Customer Display

Mode Lock

Interface Connectors

Mode Lock

Power Switch

COM3 COM2 COM1

Power Cord

It selects the type of register operations.

(Section 4) holder and the printer.

Receipt Outlet or Journal Window

The receipt for the finalized sale is issued.

Or, the operator can see which items have already been entered through this window.

Keyboard

Used to enter sale items (Section 8)

Interface Connectors (RS-232C, LAN)

RS-232C connectors allow a connection of a

Remote Slip Printer, Bar Code Scanner,

Scale, etc.

LAN connectors allow a connection of a PC

Power Switch

The power switch is provided at the right-hand side of the cabinet. The AC power is turned on when the switch is pushed to ON, and turned off when the switch is pushed to OFF. and building of Master-Satellite system.

Display (Operator and Customer)

Used to confirm the entry contents and the status of the ECR. (Section 5)

3- 1

4. MODE LOCK AND MODE SELECTOR KEYS EO1-11152

4.1 Mode Lock

4. MODE LOCK AND MODE SELECTOR KEYS

4.1 Mode Lock

REG

SET

X MGR

Z

MA

Key

4.2 Mode Selector Keys

REG

Key

(POSITION) (FUNCTION)

SET

REG

X

MGR

Z

In this position, the ECR will allow programming operations.

(LOCK position) The register operations are locked when the Mode Lock is in this position.

Meanwhile, the Display Message and the current time are displayed.

Normal cash register operations are carried out in this mode. However, the operations requiring a

Manager Intervention cannot be performed in this mode.

The sale totals in memory can be read and the programmed data can be verified in this position.

This position allows to register all normal cash register operations to be carried out in the “REG” mode and the operations requiring a Manager

Intervention.

This is the “Negative Mode” which automatically processes all the entries in the reverse way, i.e. positive items into negative, and the negative into positive. It is usually used to return or cancel all the items once purchased in a sale in the “REG” or “MGR” mode.

All the resettable totals and their respective counters in memory will be read and reset in this position.

REG Key: The REG Key is used by the cashier or clerk who operates the ECR.

This key can access the positions of LOCK and REG of the Mode Lock.

MA Key: The MA Key is used by the store manager who will daily supervise the collection of money and the printout of transactions recorded by the

ECR. This key is also used when programming the ECR. This key can access the positions of SET, LOCK, REG, X, MGR, - and Z. representative to access any position. To prevent programmed data and sales data from being changed or cleared by mistake, do not use this key without instructions of our TOSHIBA TEC representative.

The keys may be inserted or pulled out at the “LOCK” or “REG” position.

In the OPERATOR’S GUIDE, functions and operations will be described within the range of the Mode Lock positions of LOCK and REG using the REG key. Since operations requiring other positions and keys are controlled by the store manager, they are described in the MANAGER’S GUIDE.

4- 1

5. DISPLAY EO1-11152

5. DISPLAY

5. DISPLAY

The operator display is located at the top of the ECR just above the keyboard.

OPERATOR DISPLAY (Front Display)

Upper Row

DPT X

Lower Row

(

( )

) TL ST

The customer display can be moved horizontally, and thus is fully adjustable according to the position of the customer.

CUSTOMER DISPLAY (Rear Display)

DPT X

TL ST

Lower Row

5- 1

5. DISPLAY EO1-11152

5.1 Upper Row (16-digit dot windows)

5.1 Upper Row (16-digit dot windows)

Alphanumeric characters are displayed here as messages, sale item descriptors, prompts for the operator, etc. depending on the Mode Lock position and the operation sequence.

(1) Mode Indications

“LOCK” Mode

If the display store message is preprogrammed, the message is displayed. Whether the message scrolls with maximum 64 characters or non-scrolls with maximum 16 characters is a program option. At the same time the current time is displayed in the lowest 5 digits of the Lower Row (example: 14-52 for the time 14:52).

“REG”, “MGR”, or “ - ” Mode Initial Display

The message “LOG” is displayed in the lowest 3 digits of the Upper Row. It means that the cashier has signed OFF or signed OUT and thus the ECR is not operable for sales entries. (This display indication is applicable only when the Cashier Code Entry method is selected.) A Sign-ON or Sign-IN is expected to operate through the [LOG/RECEIPT] (or [LOG]) key in this case.

In the REG or MGR mode, a store message (described as the store message displayed in the LOCK mode above) can be displayed when there is no key-in operation takes place in 30 seconds. Whether it is displayed or not is a program option.

Whether or not a store message is displayed during cashier key ON status or cashier sign-ON is a program option.

Other Mode Initial Display

The mode symbol of 1 character is displayed in the lowest digit:

Digit No.

P

X

Mode: Z

(2) Digit Range for Various Sales Items (“REG”, “MGR”, “ - ”)

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3

Department/PLU Mane (max. 16 characters)

Customer File Name (Check Track) (max. 16 characters)

Transaction Item Name (max. 12)

2 1

5- 2

5. DISPLAY EO1-11152

5.1 Upper Row (16-digit dot windows)

(3) Error Messages (in any mode except “LOCK”)

When an error occurs, an error message (programmable) is displayed, with an error buzzer generated (a long tone).

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Error Message (max. 16)

5 4 3 2 1

Read the Error Message, depress the [C] key to cancel the error status and tone, operate the sequence again after removing the cause of the error.

The following table shows the cause of the error.

If the error status cannot be cancelled or an error message not listed in the table below is displayed, please contact your nearest TOSHIBA TEC representative.

ERROR MESSAGE TABLE

Error Message

(Standard Setting)

OPERATION ERROR

MANAGER REQUIRED

CLOSE DRAWER

COMPULSORY CODE

COMP DEPOSIT

SCALE REQUIRED

SCALE OUT

PC COMM ERROR

CODE ERROR

PROGRAM ERROR

CALL MANAGER

DRAWER LIMIT

LINK PLU ERROR

COMPULSORY SLIP

CDV ERROR

COMP CHECK NO.

X/Z IN PROGRESS

ALREADY RESERVED

UNDER AGE

COMP QUANTITY

PIN ERROR

NO RESPONS

RECEIPT REQUIRED

RESPONS NG

MISC ERROR

PAPER END

HEAD OPEN ERROR

Cause of the Error

Key Sequence or Operation Procedure Error

The operation requires a Manager Intervention.

The drawer must be closed before the operation.

No code has been entered where it is compulsory.

Sub-link Department is compulsory, but not yet entered.

The [SCALE] key has not been depressed where required.

The scale is malfunctioning.

File Receive Error (when a PC is connected).

An undefined code has been entered, or the entered code has already been defined.

An additional entry of new PLU or new customer file is not acceptable, because the memory of each table is full.

The card is not acceptable as a result of Negative Card checking.

A media pick up operation is now required.

PLU linkage error such as when a sub-link PLU is not programmed in the Link-

PLU Table.

The operation requires a endorsement print.

Check Digit Value Error

Performing the negative card check is necessary before finalizing a sale by a media key which has the compulsory status of the negative card check.

Read/Reset operation is unavailable during the consolidation of the communication buffer by PC (or master terminal).

Read/Reset/Reserve operation was attempted when reset data remained in the communication buffer. (in case of the program option to prohibit rewriting reset data in the communication buffer)

Underage person has attempted to buy cigarette or alcoholic beverage.

Quantity Entry Compulsion Error (when this compulsion status is programmed to a PLU item).

EFT Pin Pad Error

Time-out condition on the EFT terminal

Entry of new sale transaction is attempted before issuing the store receipt.

Communication error between the ECR and the EFT terminal.

Other errors

Paper is out.

Print head remains open.

5- 3

5. DISPLAY EO1-11152

5.2 Lower Row (10-digit 7-segment Numeric Display)

ERROR MESSAGE TABLE (continued)

Error Message

(Standard Setting)

Cause of the Error

CUTTER ERROR

SLIP OFF LINE

SLIP PAPER OUT

VALIDATION CMP

Cutter home position is misaligned.

Slip Printer is in off line status.

No slip paper is set.

The operation requires a Validation Print.

RETURN PROHIBIT Return entry with the [EBT CASH] or [EBT F/S] key is prohibited by the system option setting.

It is recommended to prepare a copy of the above table, and place it near the ECR.

5.2 Lower Row (10-digit 7-segment Numeric Display)

(1) Numeric Display

AMOUNT (7 digits) Displays the numeric data, such as amount, quantity, etc.

When the amount is negative, the symbol “ - ” is displayed as well.

NOTE: When the following codes are being entered, the digits for “RPT” and “DPT” may be used as well (all 10 digits). On exceeding the 10 digits, the lowest 10 digits are being displayed.

PLU Code (max. 13 digits as option)

DPT (2 digits)

X (1 digit)

Non-add Number (max. 18 digits)

Customer File No. (max. 12 digits)

Displays the Department Code of the department item just entered. The department name is also displayed in the Upper Row. It stays lit when repeating the same department item entry.

When a PLU is entered, PLU name is displayed in the Upper Row.

Displays the repeat count of the same Department or PLU item. The count is indicated from the second entry on, and only the lowest digit of the repeat count will be displayed even when the count exceeds nine (such as “0” for 10, “1” for 11, etc.)

5.3 Display Indicator

R OFF: Lights up when the Receipt-OFF mode is declared by the [LOG/RECEIPT] (or

[RECEIPT]) key. In this condition, no receipts will be issued for a sale to be entered. It goes out by depressing the [LOG/RECEIPT] (or [RECEIPT]) key again for Receipt-ON mode.

SIGN ON: This lamp turns lit only when the Cashier Code Entry method is selected. It lights up when a cashier has signed ON or signed IN. It goes out when the cashier has signed OFF or signed OUT, and the message “LOG” is displayed in the Upper Row instead.

IN-LINE: It is used when the ECR is used as a terminal in a Master-Satellite system. When the

ECR is used as a stand-alone machine, this lamp is not used.

SLIP: Flickers when the program option “endorsement compulsory” or “slip print compulsory” has been selected. This lamp does not light up even when a slip is set to the slip printer.

ALM: Lights up with the alarm buzzer generated to indicate that the last operation or numeric

( ( ) ) entry was an error. To clear the error status, depress the [C] key.

TL: Lights up on a finalizing operation with the total amount displayed when the sale is finalized

TL without any amount tendered.

ST

ST: Lights up when the [ST] key is depressed, indicating that the displayed amount is subtotal.

The lamp is also illuminated when the [TXBL TL] or [FSTL TEND] key is depressed, indicating that the displayed amount is the taxable total or food-stampable total. It also lights up when the amount tendered is less than the sale total with the shortage amount (balance due) is displayed.

CG: When an amount tendering operation is performed, it lights up with the change due displayed.

5- 4

6. OUTLINE OF PREPARATION PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATING THE ECR EO1-11152

6. OUTLINE OF PREPARATION PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATING THE ECR

6. OUTLINE OF PREPARATION PROCEDURE BEFORE

OPERATING THE ECR

This chapter shows the outline of set-up procedure of the ECR before actually starting the register operation.

WARNING!

Turn the POWER SWITCH to OFF before connecting the power cord.

REG

SET

SET

S

X

MGR

REG

X MGR

Z

Z

1. Remove the ECR from the carton. And take out all the parts and accessories.

2. Place the ECR on a stable and level surface, then remove the tapes and seals for holding parts or protecting surface of the ECR.

3. Plug the power cord of the ECR into a wall outlet.

Make sure that the outlet voltage matches that of the power required for the ECR.

4. Insert the REG key into the Mode Lock.

5. Turn the Mode Lock to the “REG” position with the power ON.

6- 1

6. OUTLINE OF PREPARATION PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATING THE ECR EO1-11152

6.1 Installing/Replacing the Receipt/Journal Roll

6. Install the Receipt and Journal rolls (referring to the following section “Installing the Receipt/Journal

Roll”).

6.1 Installing/Replacing the Receipt/Journal Roll

Turn the Mode Lock to the LOCK position using the Mode Selector Key to perform the paper roll installation in this section.

CAUTION!

Never touch the Cutter Knob. Doing so may cause a CUTTER ERROR.

Installing/Replacing the Receipt Roll

Cutter Knob

Receipt Printer

1. To remove the Printer Cover, insert the Printer

Cover Key to the Printer Cover Lock, and then turn it

90

°

clockwise.

6- 2

6. OUTLINE OF PREPARATION PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATING THE ECR EO1-11152

6.1 Installing/Replacing the Receipt/Journal Roll

2

1

2. Pull up the Printer Release Lever to open the

Receipt Cover Frame Ass’y.

3. Remove the old Receipt Roll, if any. Unstick the end of the Receipt, and then load the Receipt Roll into the printer.

4. Pull the end of receipt roll forward until the area with the glue on the paper is past the Cutter Block.

5. Close the Reciept Cover Frame Ass’y by pusing the shadowed portion until it clicks.

6. Attach the Printer Cover.

6- 3

6. OUTLINE OF PREPARATION PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATING THE ECR EO1-11152

6.1 Installing/Replacing the Receipt/Journal Roll

Installing/Replacing the Journal Roll

2

1

1. When installing the Journal Roll for the first time, skip to Step 3.

When replacing the Journal Roll, cut the paper at the arrow indicating position in the figure.

CAUTION: Never try to pull out the remaining paper end by hand. It may cause a paper jam.

2. Remove the Journal Take-up Reel from the holder, then pull the paper out of the reel.

3. Pull up the Printer Release Lever to open the

Journal Cover Frame Ass’y.

4. Remove the old Journal Roll, if any. Unstick the end of the Journal, and then place the Journal Roll into the right holder as viewed from the front of the machine.

5. Pull the end of the Journal Roll until about 8 inches

(about 20 cm) of paper comes out of the journal outlet.

6- 4

6. OUTLINE OF PREPARATION PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATING THE ECR EO1-11152

6.1 Installing/Replacing the Receipt/Journal Roll

6. Close the Journal Cover Frame Ass’y by pushing the shadowed portion until it clicks.

7. Insert the paper end into the slit of the Take-up Reel and wind it around the reel twice or three times.

8. Set the Journal Take-up Reel into the Reel Holder.

9. Attach the Printer Cover.

6- 5

7. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS EO1-11152

7.1 Cashier Code Entry

7. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS

7.1 Cashier Code Entry

Each cashier will sign-ON, sign-OFF, sign-IN, and sign-OUT through the [LOG/RECEIPT] (or [LOG]) key.

OPERATION: Mode Lock: REG (or, MGR or “ - “ with Manager Intervention)

([LOG/RECEIPT] = [LOG])

(1) For Single-drawer Machines

Sign-ON [LOG/RECEIPT]

A Sign-ON receipt is issued, and sales entries are now possible.

2-digit manager-assign code

(01 to 99)

2-digit cashier’s own secret code

(01 to 99) (NOTE 1)

Sign-OUT 9 [LOG/RECEIPT]

A Sign-OUT receipt is issued, and the cashier must leave the ECR for a while expecting to come back soon.

(same as Sign-ON) Sales entries are now possible. sales entries will be accepted.

Sign-ON..........to be operated to start the job.

Sign-OUT........to be operated to leave the ECR for a while expecting to come back soon.

Sign-IN............to be operated when the cashier comes back from a break declared by Sign-OUT.

Sign-OFF........to be operated to end the job.

NOTES: 1. As cashier’s own secret code, the code used for Sign-ON just after the issuance of cashier reset report is programmed. The secret code will be cleared when the cashier reset report is output.

2. Sign-OUT may automatically be performed without operating “9 [LOG]” on finalizing each transaction, including Check (or other non-cash media) Cashing, No-sale Exchange from/to Foreign

Currencies, No-sale, Received-on-Account, Paid-Out, Loan, Pick Up if so set by a program option.

When this option is selected, Sign-IN is always necessary before starting every transaction.

3. When the finalizing media key is programmed with Endorsement Compulsory status, the automatic

Sign-OUT will be executed after taking the endorsement print of the media data.

7- 1

7. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS EO1-11152

7.1 Cashier Code Entry

(2) For Multi-drawer Machines

Sign-ON [@/FOR] [LOG/RECEIPT]

2-digit manager-assign code (01 to 99)

2-digit cashier’s own secret code (01 to 99)

1 or 2 as Drawer No.

By entering a Drawer No., the designated drawer will open on finalizing each sale by that cashier. It will cause an error if a Drawer No. already used by another cashier is entered.

Sign-OUT

Sign-IN

Same as those for Single-drawer Machines.

Sign-OFF

NOTES: 1. A maximum of 2 different cashiers may sign-ON on a Multi-drawer Machine at the same time. To allow more than one cashier’s Sign-ON, the first cashier(s) must sign-OFF before the next cashier signs ON. Accordingly, only the cashier being signed ON or IN can sign OUT or OFF.

2. When the Drawer No. entry and the [@/FOR] key are skipped in a Sign-ON, the drawers will automatically be assigned to the cashiers from the smaller No. to the larger.

3. Performing Sign-OFF automatically cancels the designation of the drawer. Therefore, at the next opportunity to perform Sign-ON, the designation of another drawer is available. Performing Sign-

OUT cannot cancel the designation of the drawer.

(3) Mode Changes With Signing Operations

When Signed-ON or Signed-IN:

The Mode Lock position changes are allowed within “LOCK”, “REG”, “MGR”, and “ - ”. Changing to any other position will be an error.

When Signed-OUT:

The Mode Lock may be turned to any position. However, cashier reports of the cashier being signed OUT cannot be taken in the “X” or “Z” position.

When Signed-OFF:

The Mode Lock may be turned to any position. Therefore, it is best for the cashier (or all the cashiers on a

Multi-drawer Machine) to sign-OFF before the Mode Lock is turned to the “LOCK”, “X”, “Z”, or “SET” position.

7- 2

7. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS EO1-11152

7.2 Cashier Key Method ([CLK] Keys)

-- SIGNING OPERATION RECEIPT PRINT FORMAT SAMPLES --

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

∗∗ 6,*1 21 ∗∗ 6,*1 287

-21(6 70

)5,

∗∗ 6,*1 2)) ∗∗

-21(6 70

)5,

∗∗ 6,*1 ,1 ∗∗

-21(6 70 -21(6 70

NOTE: A program option provides a selection not to print nor issue receipts on any signing operation.

7.2 Cashier Key Method ([CLK] Keys)

When the [LOG/RECEIPT] (or [LOG]) key is not installed, [CLK] keys ([CLK 1] to [CLK 8]; max. 8 keys) may be provided on the ECR keyboard.

Sale entries will be possible only when one of the [CLK] keys is depressed (in “REG”, “MGR”, or “ - ” mode).

When the same [CLK] key is again depressed, the cashier is in Sign-OFF status.

A program option provides a selection to display or not display the cashier code (1 to 8) of the cashier being

Sign-ON condition at the “DPT” digit on the Lower Row of the Operator Display.

The multi-drawer feature may be taken with the [CLK] keys. In this case, each of the drawers is assigned to the cashier of the following keys.

Drawer 1 to [CLK 1]

Drawer 2 to [CLK 2] to [CLK 8]

-- Cashier ID Print on Sale Receipts --

On every sale receipt (issued in “REG”, “MGR”, or “ - ” mode), the name of the cashier who has operated the entries of the sale is printed. The cashier name is programmable corresponding to each Cashier Key No. (under the CASHIER KEY METHOD) or manager-assign cashier code (under the CASHIER CODE ENTRY METHOD).

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

)5,

'3

'3

&$6+

Cashier’s Name

,7(0

-21(6 70

7- 3

7. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS EO1-11152

7.3 Training Mode Start and End

7.3 Training Mode Start and End

When you have newly employed cashiers, you may provide some time for them to train their skills of operating the ECR. You are to start and end the Training Mode. Once entering the Training Mode, a cashier may operate just as ordinary sale entry operations in “REG” and “MGR” modes except Sign-ON/OFF entry and check track operation. The data in the Training Mode are processed into the training cashier memory but not affect any actual sales data in business.

CONDITION Outside a sale, and in Cashier Signed-OFF condition for CASHIER CODE ENTRY Method

OPERATION FOR TRAINING MODES START

„ Cashier Code Entry Method

[LOG/RECEIPT] (or [LOG]) .................................... A training-ON receipt is issued.

2-digit manager-assign code of a cashier with Training status (01 to 99)

2-digit cashier’s secret code (01 to 99)

„

Cashier Key Method

Case 1: Set the Cashier Key programmed with Training status .... A training-ON receipt is not issued.

Case 2: 99 [LOG/RECEIPT] (or [LOG]) ......................... A training-ON receipt is issued.

(In Cashier Code and Name Setting, cashier code 99 should be programmed as training status ON beforehand.)

Fixed to 99 for training purposes.

ENTRIES IN TRAINING MODE

Registering operations are allowed by the trainees:

„

All sale or transaction entry operations are possible in the Training Mode, except: 1) The drawer will not open.

2) The Consecutive No. on the receipt will not be incremented.

3) When performing an Endorsement print or a Validation print, spaces are printed. (i.e. Printing operation is performed but nothing is printed.)

4) Print occurs on receipt but not journal.

5) The Remote Slip Printer prints a slip.

OPERATION FOR TRAINING MODE END

„

Code Entry Method, and Cashier Key Method Case 2

0 [LOG/RECEIPT] (or [LOG]) .................................... A training-OFF receipt is issued in both cases.

„

Cashier Key Method Case 1

Change from the current Cashier Key to another Cashier Key.

Now the ECR is in a Signed-OFF condition. You may turn the Mode Lock to any position for its corresponding operations. To start sale entries, a Cashier Key to ON status or a cashier’s Sign-ON status is again necessary.

7- 4

7. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS EO1-11152

7.3 Training Mode Start and End

-- Training Mode Receipt Format --

Training Start (Training Sign-ON) Receipt Training End (Training Sign-OFF) Receipt

)5,

∗∗ 75$,1,1*

∗∗ 21

%52:1

∗∗

∗∗

70

Receipt issued in Training Mode

)5,

∗∗ 75$,1,1*

∗∗ 2))

%52:1

∗∗

∗∗

70

)5,

Training Mode Header

∗∗ 75$,1,1*

7RPDWR

9(*(7$%/(

&$6+

∗∗

7)

7

Entry Contents

,7(0

∗∗ 75$,1,1*

%52:1

∗∗

70

7- 5

8. KEYBOARD LAYOUT EO1-11152

8. KEYBOARD LAYOUT

8. KEYBOARD LAYOUT

The following are typical keyboard layouts for the MA-1595 series. Since this series is designed to be capable of programming most of the keys to be placed in the desired place on the keyboard, these are merely examples.

The keyboard of your ECR should have its own layout according to the store’s requirements.

-- Ordinary Keyboard Type (US Standard) --

LOG/

RECEIPT

RECEIPT

ISSUE

CUR

RTN

MDSE

VOID

ITEM

CORR

NS

ALL

VOID

DOLL

DISC

%-

READ

PLU

HOLD/

RECALL

PO

R/A

EX

TX1/M

TX2/M

#

7

4

1

0

C

RF

8

5

2

00

JF

@/FOR

9

6

3

5

4

3

2

1

10

9

8

7

6 11

12

13

14

15

16

17

`8

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

CREDIT

Chg

1

Other keys not placed in the keyboard above:

Additional Department Keys (31 to 60)

[000] (Triple-zero Key) [RPT] [3rd PRICE]

[STR CPN] [TARE] [TARE 3]

[BTL RTN] [CARD No.]

[%+] [FS/M]

[MISC TEND]

[CREDIT 2]

[PRINT]

[PACK]

[TX3/M], [TX4/M] [ID]

[FSTL/TEND] [DISPLAY 1] to [DISPLAY 6] for

[PR OPEN]

[LC OPEN]

[OPEN]

PLU Preset-code Keys

[TXBL TL]

[TAX]

[CUR 2] to [CUR 5]

[LOG]

[SALES PERSON]

[CHK No.]

[CARD CHK] the EBT (Electronic Benefit

Transfer) Spec.

[DEBIT]

[MANUAL CARD#]

[CODE OPEN] (or [PB-])

[TRF]

[RECEIPT]

[VALIDATE]

[SI1/M], [SI2/M] [COMMENT]

[CLK 1] to [CLK 8]

[STORE RECEIPT]

[POST AUTH]

[EBT CASH]

[EBT F/S]

[BALANCE INQUIRY]

(Electronic

Fund Transfer)

Spec.

8- 1

8. KEYBOARD LAYOUT EO1-11152

8. KEYBOARD LAYOUT

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

23

24

21

22

19

20

17

18

14

15

12

13

16

9

10

11

31

32

29

30

27

28

25

26

-- Flat Keyboard Type (US Standard) --

47

48

45

46

43

44

41

42

39

40

37

38

35

36

33

34

63

64

61

62

59

60

57

58

55

56

53

54

51

52

49

50

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

13

14

11

12

15

16

9

LOG/

RECEIPT

10

RECEIPT

ISSUE

ALL

VOID

CUR

RTN

MDSE

VOID

ITEM

CORR

PLU

1

0

7

4

RF

#

JF

DOLL

DISC

PO

R/A

HOLD/

RECALL

C

2

00

8

5

NS

9

6

EX

%-

READ

TX1/M

TX2/M

@/FOR

CREDIT

1

Chg

CHECK

3

ST

AT/TL keys

Other keys not placed in the keyboard above:

Additional Department Keys (17 to 60)

[000] (Triple-zero Key)

[STR CPN]

[BTL RTN]

[CARD No.]

[FS/M]

[MISC TEND]

[CREDIT 2]

[PR OPEN]

[LC OPEN]

[OPEN]

[TXBL TL]

[FSTL/TEND]

[CUR 2] to [CUR 5]

[LOG]

[SALES PERSON]

[CHK No.]

[DP#]

[TAX]

[PICK UP BAL] (or [PB+])

[CODE OPEN] (or [PB-]) [RECEIPT]

[TRF] [COMMENT]

[SI1/M], [SI2/M]

[CARD CHK]

[PLU ADD]

[PRINT]

[PACK]

[DISPLAY 1] to [DISPLAY 6] for the EBT (Electronic Benefit

Transfer) Spec.

[DEBIT]

[MANUAL CARD#]

[OFFLINE AUTH]

[STORE RECEIPT]

[POST AUTH]

[EBT CASH]

[EBT F/S]

[BALANCE INQUIRY] for the EFT

(Electronic

Fund Transfer)

Spec.

[RPT] [3rd PRICE]

8- 2

9. FUNCTIONS OF EACH KEY EO1-11152

9. FUNCTIONS OF EACH KEY

9. FUNCTIONS OF EACH KEY

This section briefly describes functions of each key for your quick reference purposes. See the reference pages in Section 10: REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT for detail operation sequences.

TABLE OF KEY FUNCTIONS

Reference

Key Functions page

7-1

LOG

RECEIPT

LOG

RECEIPT

LOG key

Used in case of Cashier Code Entry Method, to declare start or end of normal operation by cashier. For details, refer to Section 7.1.

Receipt key

Used to change the receipt-ON/OFF mode.

Log/Receipt key

This is a dual-function key that has both [LOG] and [RECEIPT] functions.

10-2

See pages for

[LOG] and

[RECEIPT]

10-38

RECEIPT

ISSUE

RF

4 5 6

1 2 3

0 00 •

1

JF

7 8 9 to

DP#

PLU

C

60

Receipt Post-Issue key

Used to issue the receipt of a sale when the sale has already finalized in the Receipt-OFF mode.

Receipt Feed key

Used to advance the receipt roll and operated by holding it down until the paper has advanced to the required position.

Journal Feed key

Used to advance the journal roll in the same fashion as the [RF] key is used to receipt roll.

Numeric keys

Used to enter numeric values. Depressing the [00] key once is the same as depressing the [0] key twice consecutively. Depressing the [000] key once is the same as depressing the [0] key three times consecutively. The [ . ] key is used to designate the decimal point of a percentage rate or a quantity.

Department keys

Used to enter each item, serving for classifying merchandise by department.

Department No. key

Used to access a department by designating the department code, instead of depressing the specific Department key. With this key installed, a maximum of 99 departments may be controlled.

PLU (Price Look Up) key

Used to enter a PLU that is linked to a department.

Clear key

Used to clear numeric entries or a declaration key entry.

-----

-----

-----

10-4

See pages for

[DEPT]

10-5

-----

#

10-20

NS

Non-add Number Print key

Used to print a non-add number (such as Customer No., Credit

Card No., etc.) on the receipt and journal for future reference.

No-sale key

Used to open the cash drawer without relating a sale, and also used to display the store message.

10-2, 3

9- 1

9. FUNCTIONS OF EACH KEY EO1-11152

9. FUNCTIONS OF EACH KEY

Reference

Key Functions page

10-4, 5

AMT

PR

OPEN

LC

OPEN

OPEN

Amount key

Used to enter a manual amount of PLU item. And also used to enter an amount or price for an open department when the department is accessed by the [DP#] key.

Preset Open key

Used to release a preset-price department or PLU items for a manual price entry.

Listing Capacity Open key

Used to release the high or low amount limit preprogrammed on each department or PLU.

Preset and Listing Capacity Open key

This is a dual-function key that has both [PR OPEN] and [LC

OPEN] functions.

10-4, 5

10-22

See pages for

[PR OPEN] and

[LC OPEN].

10-7

@/FOR

VND

CPN

STR

CPN

READ

COMMENT

RTN

MDSE

BTL

RTN

DOLL

DISC

%+

%

ITEM

CORR

VOID

AT-FOR (Quantity Extension and Split Package Pricing) key

Used to multiply a department, PLU, or Bottle Return item entry by a quantity. Also used to auto-calculate and enter a split-package price, triple multiplication, or HI-CONE.

Vendor Coupon key

Used to enter the amount of vendor coupons received from the customer.

Store Coupon key

Used to subtract a store coupon amount redeemed through a department.

PLU Price-Read key

Used to read the preset price of the designated PLU from the memory. Also used to read the amount and the name of the customer file.

Comment Print key

Used to print the respective programmed comments on the receipt.

Returned Merchandise key

Used to refund money to a customer who has returned items already purchased.

Bottle Return key

Used to enter a bottle return amount.

Dollar Discount key

Used to subtract an amount from the sale such as a discount during a sale.

Percent Charge key

Used to add a percent rate to a sale.

Percent Discount key

Used to subtract a percent rate from a sale.

Item Correct key

Used to remove the last item from the bill, printing a line through the item on the receipt and journal.

Void key

Used to delete an item entered previously (before the last item) in the current transaction.

10-19

10-18

10-24

10-52

10-17

10-17

10-18

10-18

10-18

10-19

10-20

9- 2

9. FUNCTIONS OF EACH KEY EO1-11152

9. FUNCTIONS OF EACH KEY

CHK

TND

ALL

VOID

AT/TL

CREDIT

1

PB+

Reference

Key Functions page

10-20

R/A

PO

ST

TXBL

TL or

Chg

MISC

TEND or

TRF

CHECK

TEND

CREDIT

2

CARD

No.

CHECK

No.

PB-

PICK UP

BAL

All Void key

Used to cancel all the items entered in the current sale.

Received-on-Account key

Used to enter payments received on account, i.e. not relating to a sale. Also used for change reserve amounts loaned from the store.

Paid-Out key

Used to record amounts paid out of the cash drawer not relating to a sale. Also used for Pick Up operations, such as money collections for banking purposes.

Subtotal key

Used to obtain subtotal of the current transaction.

Taxable Total key

Used to obtain the taxable total (the sale total including taxes due) of the current transaction.

Cash Amount Tendered/Cash Total key

Used to record all cash paid transactions, and will be able to finalize a sale operation.

Check key

This is one of non-cash media keys, and used to cash a check when the ECR is outside a sale, or to finalize the transaction as a check payment.

Charge key

This is another non-cash media key, and usually programmed as

“Charge Sale Total” key. This key can also be used for payments in credit cards, if the [CARD No.] key is installed.

Miscellaneous Media key

This is one of additional non-cash media keys that may be installed besides [CHK TND] and [Chg]. This key has the same functions and programmabilities as the [CHK TND] key, and usually used as

Tender-only key.

Credit 1 & 2 keys

These are additional non-cash media keys that may be installed besides those already described, according to the requirements of each store.

Card No. key

Used to enter the code number (1 to 12) which classifies the credit card company followed by the sale finalization with the [Chg] key.

Check No. and Endorsement Print key

Used to print the endorsement data with or without a Check No. print after finalizing a sale with a non-cash media key.

Previous Balance keys

Used to enter a previous balance in a charge posting operation.

Transfer key

Used to transfer the entire balance in a charge posting operation with no payment.

Pick Up Balance key

This key should be installed in place of the [PB+] key if the

“Customer File” (Check Track) memory option is selected instead of the “Manual PB Entry” type.

10-3, 44

10-44,

3-1 (MG)

10-23

10-23

10-26

10-26

See pages for

[CHECK

TEND]

See pages for

[CHECK

TEND]

See pages for

[CHECK

TEND]

10-26

10-51, 55

10-47

10-47

10-49

9- 3

9. FUNCTIONS OF EACH KEY EO1-11152

9. FUNCTIONS OF EACH KEY

Reference

Key Functions page

10-49

CODE

OPEN

SI/TL

or:

SI1/TL SI2/TL

SI/M

or:

SI1/M SI2/M

TX/M

or:

TX4/M

EX

Customer File Code Open key

This key should be installed in place of the [PB-] key if the

“Customer File” memory option is selected.

SI (Selective Itemizer) Total key

Used to display (and print) the selective itemizer contents.

SI (Selective Itemizer) Modifier key

Used to reverse the SI (Selective Itemizer) status programmed on each Department or PLU.

Tax Modifier key(s)

Used to reverse the taxable/non-taxable status on departments,

PLUs, or other tax-status programmable keys. Also used in Tax

Exempt operations.

10-24

10-22

10-23, 25

10-25

CUR

1

SALES

PERSON

RPT to

SCALE

TARE

TARE 2

TARE 3

CUR

5

Tax Exempt key

Used to declare the exemption of the taxes from the sale.

Salesperson key

Used to record sales contribution data of each salesperson for report purpose.

Repeat key

Used to repeat a department or PLU item entry.

Foreign Currency keys

Used in tendering or exchange with foreign currencies.

Scale key

This key is used for various scaled items. To enable to register weight data from the scale, only the Departments programmed with the Scale-Allowed status or the PLUs programmed with the Scale-

Compulsory status may be operated.

Tare key

Used to enter the preset tare weight data prior to a scaled item entry, thus to subtract tare from the gross weight and obtain the net weight.

Tare 2 key

Used to calculate the net weight using the % rate set in the PLU table or the input rate when the scaled item (for Department, PLU) is entered.

Tare 3 key

Used to enter the tare weight manually when the scaled item (for

Department, PLU) is entered.

10-45

10-6

10-43

10-21

10-21

10-21

10-21

9- 4

9. FUNCTIONS OF EACH KEY EO1-11152

9. FUNCTIONS OF EACH KEY

CLK 1

Reference

Key Functions page

10-23

TAX

FS/M

CARD

CHK to

FUNCTION

1 to

FUNCTION

10

HOLD

RECALL

PLU

ADD

3rd

PRICE

PACK

CLK 8

Manual Tax key

Used to enter an irregular tax amount that cannot be calculated on the basis of the programmed tax table, and to add it to the sale total.

Food Stamp Modifier key

Used to reverse the Food Stampable/Non-stampable status of a

Department, PLU, and other function keys programmable with foodstampable status.

Card Check key

Used to enter the Card No. of the credit card to check if the card is acceptable.

Cashier 1 to Cashier 8 keys

Used to declare start or end of normal operation by cashier (instead of using [LOG/RECEIPT] (or [LOG]) key).

Function 1 to Function 10 keys

Used to execute a command of key string preprogrammed on each of these keys. An operation series of maximum 10 keys can be programmed on each key, thus eliminating time in daily operation routines.

HOLD/RECALL key

In case a customer is slow in payment or in endorsement of a check at finalizing the sale, this key is used to “hold” the sale by temporarily finalizing the sale, and after wards to “recall” the sale total of the customer to really finalize it. When the sale is “recalled,” additional sale items may be entered before the real finalization.

PLU Add key

Used to add a PLU item that has not been programmed in the PLU table file, to the PLU Additional Table file.

PLU 3rd Price key

Used to perform the dollar discount or the extra charge for a packed sales item.

Pack key

Used to enter a packed sales item.

10-23

10-46

7-3

10-51

10-45

10-16

10-12

10-12

ID

ID key

Used to enter a sales item of cigarette or alcoholic beverage.

10-5

10-54

VALIDATE

Validation key

Used to print a required item or finalize a required sale on a validation slip. Validation print operation is performed on the slip printer.

10-29

DEBIT

MANUAL

CARD #

OFFLINE

AUTH

This is one of the EFT media keys.

Manual Card No. key

Used to manually enter a card No. and its expiration date on the

ECR.

Off-line Authority key

Used to finalize the EFT sale transaction on the off-line ECR.

10-30

10-31

9- 5

9. FUNCTIONS OF EACH KEY EO1-11152

9. FUNCTIONS OF EACH KEY

Reference

Key Functions page

POST

AUTH

Post Authority key

Used to finalize the EFT sale transaction which was authorized on the off-line ECR.

3-3 (MG)

STORE

RECEIPT

EBT

CASH

Store Receipt key

Used to manually issue a store receipt.

EBT Cash key

This is one of the EFT media keys.

10-32

10-33

EBT

F/S

EBT Food Stamp key

This is one of the EFT media keys.

10-35

Voucher Authority key 3-4 (MG)

VOUCHER

AUTH

Used to finalize the sale transaction on the off-line ECR when the network is down.

Balance Inquiry key

BALANCE

INQUIRY

Used for inquiring the balance to the host.

Each of these keys is programmed with a PLU Code. That is,

3-6 (MG)

PLU Preset-code See pages for

Keys depressing one of those keys is equal to entering a PLU Code then depressing the [PLU] key.

[PLU]

NOTE: To perform the operations regarding the EFT (Electronic Fund Transfer), the hardware devise to connect the EFT terminal and the software setup to realize the EFT function are required. For details, ask your TOSHIBA TEC representative.

9- 6

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT

WARNING!

When opening the cash drawer, be careful not to let the drawer hit any person.

CAUTION!

When taking an issued receipt, be sure to confirm that the cutter operation stops. Failure to do this may cause a paper jam or a printer failure.

Before starting sale entries, read through the following instructions:

TRAINING MODE is available:

If you are a beginner in operating this ECR, ask the store manager for practicing in the TRAINING MODE.

During your operations, the following may occur:

• Errors ...

A tone continuously sounds and an error message appear in the upper row of the Operator Display panel.

The keys on the keyboard are locked. In this case, read the Error Message (refer to the ERROR MESSAGE

TABLE, Section 5.1), and depress the [C] key to cancel the error status. Then remove the cause of the error and perform the operation again.

• Manager Intervention is required ...

When Error Message “MANAGER REQUIRED” (standard setting; programmable) is displayed, it means that the last key or operation requires a Manager Intervention. Depress the [C] key to cancel the error status, and call the manager for intervention.

When the manager comes to intervene with an appropriate key, you may perform the operation again. If you are informed which keys and operations will require Manager Intervention, you can call the manager in advance before the error occurs.

• Other errors requiring Manager Intervention ...

When an error occurs and you cannot think of the cause or the same error occurs again, call your manager.

• Receipt or Journal Paper-End is detected ...

When Error Message “PAPER END” (standard setting; programmable) is displayed, the receipt or journal roll is about to end. In this case, the error cannot be canceled by the [C] key. Replace the paper roll with a new one, referring to the paper installing/removing operations in Chapter 6.

• Printer Motor-Lock Condition is detected ...

If “PRINTER ERROR” is indicated in the lower row of the display panel (“AMOUNT” portion), the Printer Motor is locked due to paper jam, etc. Turn the Power Switch to OFF, and remove the cause of the motor-lock. Refer to Chapters 12 and 13.

CONDITION SETTING TO START SALE ENTRIES

Mode Lock: Insert the “REG” key and set it to the “REG” position.

Cashier Sign-ON or Cashier Key to ON status:

If the [LOG/RECEIPT] (or [LOG]) key is installed, you must sign-ON or sign-IN. (See Section 7.1.)

If Cashier Keys are installed, you must set your cashier key to the ON status. (See Section 7.2.)

Now you are ready for sale entries.

On the following pages are patterns of entering operations, and receipt or journal print format samples due to the operations. In the operation sequence patterns, “| |” indicates an input through the numeric keys, “[ ]” indicates a depression of the function key, and “---” indicates other registering and/or finalizing operations.

Please note that these are merely sample operations. Especially, the receipt or journal print indications merely show the standard print format. The actual print format and contents may vary on your machine in accordance with the differences in specifications, program selections, etc.

10- 1

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.1 Receipt-Issue/Non-Issue Selection

Receipts are issued or not issued according to the “R OFF” lamp illuminated/extinguished status on the Operator

Display panel.

“R OFF” (Receipt OFF) Lamp Status Change Operations ([LOG/RECEIPT] = [RECEIPT]).

Mode Lock may be in any position

[LOG/RECEIPT]

Extinguished [LOG/RECEIPT] Illuminated

Receipt ON Status Receipt OFF Status

NOTES: 1. The “R OFF” lamp status at the starting of a transaction entry decides whether a receipt will be issued for the transaction or not. Switching the Receipt ON/OFF status during a transaction will not be effective.

2. If a transaction entered with the “R OFF” lamp illuminated and finalized but a receipt is required, the [RECEIPT ISSUE] (Post-issue Receipt) key can be operated to issue a receipt.

3. Simply depress the [LOG/RECEIPT] key without a numeric entry. If the key is depressed with a prior numeric entry in REG mode, it may turn out to be a Sign ON or Sign OFF operation (in case of Cashier Code Entry Method).

4. Receipt-issue or non-issue cannot be selected after a non-add number print, sales person entry, comment print, or credit card No. check.

10.2 Store Message Display

This operation designates one of the four messages programmed to display in REG or MGR mode when no entries are under way on the ECR.

OPERATION (Must be operated outside a sale)

|Display Message Code| [NS]

1 to 4

(corresponding to Line

No.1 to 4 in programming)

NOTE: This operation is effective when program options “Display Message Method 16 CHARACTERS HELD” and “Display Message DISPLAY in REG and MGR mode (as well as in LOCK mode)” are both selected. Display selection in LOCK mode also depends on the line designated in this operation.

10- 2

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.3 No-Sale

10.3 No-Sale

The no-sale transaction is used to open the cash drawer without relating to any sales, such as for giving change, testing the receipt/journal print condition, etc.

OPERATION (Must be operated outside a sale)

[NS] ...................... The drawer opens and a No-sale receipt is issued.

-- Receipt Print Format --

Max.4 lines of Store Name/Message

Max.3 lines of Commercial Message

Date (Month-Day-Year order in this sample)

Day-of-Week

Name of the Cashier who is operating the ECR.

-21(6

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

6$7

∗∗ 12 6$/( ∗∗

70

Register No.

No-sale Receipt Header

Consecutive No.

Current Time

NOTE: The print format samples in this manual are not copies of actual receipts printed on an ECR but are merely indications of print formats. In those format samples, the bold-face characters indicate

Double-sized Characters on actual receipts issued by the ECR. Also note that each Double-sized

Character on actual receipts will be printed at the position half-character space rightward more than in the print format samples in this manual.

10.4 Loan

This operation is used to record the cash amounts and food stamps loaned from the store as the change reserve in the drawer.

OPERATION

[R/A]

(Must be operated outside a sale)

|Food Stamp Amount Loaned| [FSTL TEND]

Repeatable to add up amounts.

To read the loan total so far entered.

Loan Receipt Header

Amounts loaned

Total amount loaned

∗∗ /2$1

&$6+

&$6+

&$6+

68%7/

727$/

∗∗

-21(6 70

NOTE: During the Loan operation, the Non-add Number print and the Validation print are possible.

10- 3

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.5 Department Entry

Each department is preprogrammed as the “PRESET” type (with a price programmed) or “OPEN” type (with no price programmed). Perform operation depending on the type selected.

-- Receipt Print Format -- OPERATION

Open Department Type

• |Price| [Open DEPT]

• |Open-Dept Code| [DP#] |Price| [AMT]

Preset Department Type

9(*(7$%/(

T: Taxable Item Symbol

F: Food Stampable Item Symbol

7)

[Preset DEPT]

• |Dept Code| [DP#]

Preset-price Open through Preset Department Type

[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Price| [Preset DEPT]

[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Dept Code| [DP#] |Price| [AMT]

Enter the sale amount of gasoline. The quantity of gasoline is calculated by the preset gallon unit price.

OPERATION

Same as Open Department Type of DEPARTMENT ENTRY sequence using the Department Key which is programmed as a Gasoline Sales department.

NOTES: 1. A department should be programmed with Gasoline status and unit price.

3. The calculation result (the quantity of gasoline) will be obtained down to the 3rd digit below the decimal point. The fraction rounding method is ruled by the option selected for the Quantity

Extension fraction rounding. (see NOTE 5 attached to QUANTITY EXTENSION section).

4. The repeat entry is unavailable to a Gasoline Sales department.

5. Gasoline sales department cannot be used as the Preset type. The sale amount of gasoline must be entered.

6. The quantity of gasoline calculated will be not displayed but printed.

Example) DEPT 10 = Unit price 3.00 with Gasoline status

-- Receipt Print Format --

[AT/TL]

*DO # *DO

*DVROLQH 7

7$;

&$6+

10- 4

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.7 PLU Entry (Manual PLU Code Entry)

10.7 PLU Entry (Manual PLU Code Entry)

Each PLU is preprogrammed as the “PRESET” type (with a price preset) or “OPEN” type (with no price preset).

Perform operation depending on the type selected.

OPERATION

-- Receipt Print Format --

Open PLU Type

• |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU

• |Open-PLU Code| [PLU] |Price| [AMT]

Preset PLU Type

'ULQN 6PDOO%

'ULQN 6PDOO%

7

7

[PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU

• |Preset-PLU Code| [PLU]

Preset-price Open Entry through Preset PLU Type

[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key]

[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Preset-PLU Code| [PLU] |Price| [AMT]

7RPDWR 7)

10.8 PLU Entry through Barcode Scanner

OPERATION

Basic Operation Sequence:

Scan the barcode of the required item (instead of |PLU Code| [PLU])

... A short tone is generated when the barcode is successfully scanned.

When a barcode scanner is connected to the COM port, the operation sequence “|PLU Code| [PLU]” can be replaced by simply scanning the barcode. It is true in any operation pattern relating to PLU entries (Repeat,

Quantity Extension, etc.).

10.9 Cigarette and Alcoholic Beverage Entry

(Entry of Sales Item Restricted by Age Limit)

This operation checks whether or not a customer satisfies the age limit to purchase cigarette and alcoholic beverage.

OPERATION

When the entry of “Date of Birth” is unnecessary.

Entry of a cigarette or an alcoholic beverage status

Department/PLU

|Date of Birth|

MM-DD-YYYY

8 Digits

( NOTE 1 below)

The display message

“CHECK ID” is displayed on the Operator’s Display.

[ID] When the age confirmation is accepted, the age confirmation print will be performed, and the sales item will be processed.

If the age confirmation is not accepted, the error message

“UNDER AGE” will be displayed on the Operator’s

Display.

NOTES:

1. When the month of date of birth is January to September, the entry of the preceding zero can be omitted.

2. Initial setting is as follows.

• Customer of the age 18 or more can purchase cigarette.

• Customer of the age 21 or more can purchase alcoholic beverage.

10- 5

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.10 Repeat Entry

3. In one sale transaction, when the entry of a sales item with the age limit status causes an error (the error message “UNDER AGE”), the entry of another sales item with the age limit status requires the entry of date of birth and the [ID] key depression. The age confirmation will be automatically performed in the second or later entry of cigarette or alcoholic beverage.

4. Entry of the date of birth can be programmed to be compulsory.

5. In the entry of cigarette or alcoholic beverage after the Recall Operation, it is unnecessary to enter the date of birth and depress the [ID] key if the age confirmation has been performed before the Hold

Operation.

6. Immediately after the ID check error (the error message “UNDER AGE”) is cleared by the [C] key, the

Item Correct Operation is not possible, but the Void or the All Void operation is possible.

Example) In case a customer aged 20 (date of birth: July 31st, 1983) purchases items (DEPT5=age limit 21,

DEPT6=age limit 18) on August 30th, 2003.

100

[DEPT5]

-- Receipt Print Format --

07311983

[ID CHECK]

Age Confirmation

The customer’s age is under 21, resulting in an error.

[C]

,' &+(&.

This sales item cannot be accepted by the age confirmation,

[DEPT6]

07311983

[ID CHECK]

[AT/TL]

The customer’s age is over 18, resulting that the sales item can be entered.

10.10 Repeat Entry

To repeat the same item of the last entry, simply depress the last key of the department or PLU entry sequence or depress the [RPT] key.

OPERATION

(1) Department Repeat

Open Department Type

• |Price| [Open DEPT] [Same DEPT] (or [RPT])

• |Open-Dept Code| [DP#] |Price| [AMT] [AMT] (or [RPT])

-- Receipt Print Format --

9(*(7$%/(

9(*(7$%/(

7)

7)

Preset Department Type

[Preset DEPT] [Same DEPT] (or [RPT])

• |Preset-Dept Code| [DP#] [DP#] (or [RPT])

Preset-price Open Repeat

[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Price| [Preset DEPT] [RPT]

[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Preset-Dept Code| [DP#] |Price| [AMT] [RPT]

(2) PLU Repeat

Open PLU Type

• |Open-PLU Code| [PLU] |Price| [AMT] [AMT] (or [RPT])

• |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] [Same key] (or [RPT])

-- Receipt Print Format --

7RPDWR

7RPDWR

7)

7)

NOTES: 1. If the first item of those repeated is modified with [SI/M], [LC OPEN], [FS/M], or [TX/M], the modified status will be effective through the last item of the repeated.

2. Please note that the Preset-price Open Repeat using a [Preset DEPT] key or a [PLU Preset-

Code Key] can only be repeated by the [RPT] key.

3. A negative Department or negative PLU item cannot be repeated. Neither can any Other Income

Department/PLU be repeated.

10- 6

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.11 Quantity Extension (Multiplication) for DEPTs/PLUs

10.11 Quantity Extension (Multiplication) for DEPTs/PLUs

OPERATION

(1) Department Multiplication

Open Department Type

• |Quantity| [@/FOR] |Price| [Open DEPT]

• |Quantity| [@/FOR] |Open-Dept Code| [DP#] |Price| [AMT]

Preset Department Type

• |Quantity| [@/FOR] [Preset DEPT]

• |Quantity| [@/FOR] |Preset-Dept Code| [DP#]

Preset-price Open Type

• |Quantity| [@/FOR] [PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Price| [Preset DEPT]

• |Quantity| [@/FOR] [PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Preset-Dept Code| [DP#] |Price| [AMT]

(2) PLU Multiplication

Open PLU Type

• |Open-PLU Code| [PLU] |Quantity| [@/FOR] |Price| [AMT]

• |Quantity| [@/FOR] |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Open-PLU

Preset PLU Type

-- Receipt Print Format --

[

[

#

#

• |Quantity| [@/FOR] |Preset-PLU Code| [PLU]

• |Quantity| [@/FOR] [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU

Preset-price Open Type

[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Preset-PLU Code| [PLU] |Quantity| [@/FOR] |Price| [AMT]

• |Quantity| [@/FOR] [PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU

NOTES: 1. Quantity ................. Max. 3 integral + 3 decimal digits (Use the [ . ] key for entering decimal digits.)

Price (Unit Price) ... Max. 6 digits (or 5 digits with Preset Point feature)

Product .................. Must not exceed 8 digits.

2. When the Quantity is 1-digit integer (1 to 9) followed by a Code-preset Department/PLU key with a price preset, the [@/FOR] key is omissible.

3. The product obtained by multiplication cannot be repeated.

4. The decimal portion of the Quantity entry itself is processed down to the two digits below the decimal point. The fraction rounding in this case is fixed to ROUND OFF.

5. You can select the rounding process of the fractions of the product (result of multiplication) by a program option: ROUND OFF (initial setting), ROUND UP, or ROUND DOWN.

10.12 Split Package Pricing

(“Q’ty” = Quantity ... in the patterns listed below)

This operation is used for entering individual item of whole package.

For example, one individual item of whole package ($1.00/3 pcs.) can be entered by this operation.

OPERATION

(1) Department

Open Department

• |Purchased Q’ty| [@/FOR] |Whole Package Q’ty| [@/FOR]

|Whole Package Price| [Open Dept]

10- 7

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.12 Split Package Pricing

Preset Department

• |Purchased Q’ty| [@/FOR] |Whole Package Q’ty| [@/FOR]

|Preset-Dept Code| [DP#]

Preset-price Open

[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Purchased Q’ty| [@/FOR] |Whole Package Q’ty| [@/FOR]

|Whole Package Price| [Preset Dept]

|Preset-Dept Code| [DP#] |Whole Package Price| [AMT]

(2) PLU

Open PLU

• |Purchased Q’ty| [@/FOR]

NOTE 1 below

Preset PLU

• |Purchased Q’ty| [@/FOR]

NOTE 1 below

|Split-Price Type PLU Code| [PLU] of open-price PLU

|Whole Package Price| [AMT]

|Whole Package Price| [PLU Preset-code Key] of open-price PLU and Split-Price Type

|Split-Price Type PLU Code| [PLU] of preset-price PLU

Preset-Price Open

[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN])

|Purchased Q’ty| [@/FOR]

[PLU Preset-code Key] of preset-price PLU and Split-Price Type

NOTE 1 below

|Split-Price Type PLU Code| [PLU] of preset-price PLU

|Whole Package Price| [AMT]

|Whole Package Price| [PLU Preset-code Key]

NOTES: 1. When this portion is omitted, the “Purchased Q’ty” value is regarded as “1” (i.e. one individual item but not the whole package quantity.)

2. Purchased Quantity ....................... max.3 digits integral only

Whole Package Quantity ............... max.3 digits integral only

Whole Package Price .................... max.6 digits of preset-price PLU and Split-Price Type

3. This operation is possible only when the option “Split Package Pricing” is selected (instead of

Triple Multiplication).

4. One of two fraction rounding methods can be selected for the Split Package Pricing calculations ---

Round Up PRODUCT (initial setting) or Round Up UNIT PRICE.

Whole Package Quantity

Purchased Quantity Whole Package Price

$SSOH

#

7)

Item Name Purchased Amount

10- 8

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.13 HI-CONE PLUs

10.13 HI-CONE PLUs

In addition to ordinary Split-Price PLUs, the HI-CONE status can be programmed to each of them.

If so programmed, the operation patterns for one item entry (entry of one individual split-package item) and for the whole package quantity entry are different from those of ordinary Split-Price PLUs.

To enter one individual item in the package (one unpacked item):

Ordinary Split-Price PLUs (i.e. without HI-CONE status)

Open PLU

(1 [@/FOR])

Entry of Quantity

1 can be omitted.

|Split-Price Type PLU Code| [PLU] of open-price PLU or Barcode Scanning

|Whole Package Price| [PLU Preset-code Key] of open-price PLU Entry of Quantity

Preset PLU

(1 [@/FOR])

Entry of Quantity

1 can be omitted.

|Split-Price Type PLU Code| [PLU] of preset-price PLU

[PLU Preset-code Key] of preset-price PLU and Split-Price Type

|Whole Package Price| [AMT]

HI-CONE PLUs

Open PLU

1 [@/FOR]

Entry of Quantity

1 is required.

Preset PLU

1 [@/FOR]

Entry of Quantity

1 is required.

|Split-Price Type PLU Code| [PLU] of open-price PLU and Split-Price Type or Barcode Scanning

|Whole Package Price| [AMT]

|Whole Package Price| [PLU Preset-code Key] of open-price PLU and Split-Price Type and HI-CONE status

|Split-Price Type PLU Code| [PLU] of preset-price PLU and HI-CONE status

[PLU Preset-code Key] of preset-price PLU and Split-Price Type and HI-CONE status

To enter Whole Package Quantity (all the items packed):

Ordinary Split-Price PLUs (i.e. without HI-CONE status)

Open PLU

• |Whole Package Q’ty| [@/FOR]

Cannot be omitted

|Split-Price Type PLU Code| [PLU] of open-price PLU or Barcode Scanning

|Whole Package Price| [AMT]

|Whole Package Price| [PLU Preset-code Key] of open-price PLU and Split-Price Type

10- 9

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.13 HI-CONE PLUs

Preset PLU

• |Whole Package Q’ty| [@/FOR]

Cannot be omitted

|Split-Price Type PLU Code| [PLU] of preset-price PLU

[PLU Preset-code Key] of preset-price PLU and Split-Price Type

HI-CONE PLUs

Open PLU

|Split-Price Type PLU Code| [PLU] of open-price PLU and HI-CONE status or Barcode Scanning

|Whole Package Price| [AMT]

|Whole Package Price| [PLU Preset-code Key] of open-price PLU and Split-Price Type and HI-CONE status

Preset PLU

|Split-Price Type PLU Code| [PLU] of preset-price PLU and HI-CONE status or Barcode Scanning

[PLU Preset-code Key] of preset-price PLU and Split-Price Type and HI-CONE status

Thus the “Whole Package Quantity” entry is not necessary for a sale of the Whole Package Quantity of a Split-

Price PLU of HI-CONE status.

NOTE: The Unit Price of Individual Split-package Item can be preset for each HI-CONE PLU. If it is preset,

Split Pricing entry of such a PLU (with less than the Whole Package Quantity) will be calculated on the basis of the preset price of Individual Split-package Item. If it is not preset, the calculation is performed on the basis of the Whole Package Price, just as ordinary Split-Price PLUs. Also see the

NOTES attached to the section of SPLIT PACKAGE PRICING.

Operation Examples of HI-CONE PLUs

1) When PLU No. 1 is programmed with Whole Package Price of $1.00, Whole Package of Quantity 3, and HI-

CONE status. The Split-package Individual Item Price is not preset.

Sale Amount (Calculation Process)

$0.34 ($1.00

÷

3 = $0.333 ...)

$0.67 ($1.00 x 2/3 = $0.666 ...) (NOTE)

$1.00 (Preset Whole Package Price)

(= Quantity 3)

NOTE: When the option “ROUND UP UNIT PRICE” is selected, the Sale Amount and the Calculation

Process will be as follows:

2) Same as 1) above, except that the Split-package Individual Item Price is preset with $0.40.

Sale Amount (Calculation Process)

$0.40 (Preset Indiv. Item Price)

$0.80 (Preset Indiv. Item Price x 2)

$1.00 (Preset Whole Package Price)

(= Quantity 3)

10-10

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.14 Mix & Match (M & M) Function of Split-Price PLUs

10.14 Mix & Match (M & M) Function of Split-Price PLUs

Each of Split-Price PLUs can be programmed with a M & M Group No. Even different PLUs of the same M & M

Group No. can be entered mixedly within a sale, then an automatic discount is made when the specified number of those PLU items are entered. For example, if two different bottled drink items cost $1.00 for three bottles, those items can be programmed with the same M & M Group No. to enable Mix & Match sales. To set different

PLUs into the same M & M Group, each of the PLUs must be set with the same Whole Package Quantity, same

Whole Package Price, and same Split-package Individual Price (if it is set). Otherwise, a wrong calculation will occur in actual entries in a sale.

Operation Examples of Mix & Match Functions

Cases 1) Two PLUs (PLU No. 1 and PLU No. 2 are programmed with Whole Package Quantity of 3, Whole

Package Price $1.00, and the same M & M Group No.:

1-1) When the PLUs are programmed as ordinary Split-Price PLUs (without HI-CONE):

Sale Amount (Calculation Process)

(within one sale)

1 x PLU No. 1

1 x PLU No. 2

1 x PLU No. 1

1 [@/FOR] 1 [PLU]

1 [@/FOR] 2 [PLU]

1 [@/FOR] 1 [PLU]

$0.34 ($1.00

÷

3 = $0.333 ...)

$0.33 ($1.00 x 2/3 = $0.666 ... rounded up to $0.67 - $0.34) (NOTE)

$0.33 ($1.00 - $0.67) (NOTE)

Sale Total $1.00

NOTE: When the option “ROUND UP UNIT PRICE” is selected, the Sale Amounts on the second and third entries are as follows:

$0.34 (instead of $0.33) (second entry)

$0.32 (instead of $0.33) (third entry)

1-2) When the PLUs are programmed with HI-CONE status and not programmed with Preset Individual Prices:

Sale Amount (Calculation Process)

(within one sale)

1 x PLU No. 1

1 x PLU No. 2

1 [@/FOR] 1 [PLU]

1 [@/FOR] 2 [PLU]

$0.34 ($1.00

÷

3 = $0.333 ...)

$0.33 ($1.00 x 2/3 = $0.666 ... rounded up to $0.67 - $0.34) (NOTE)

$0.33 ($1.00 - $0.67) (NOTE) 1 x PLU No. 1 1 [@/FOR] 1 [PLU]

Sale Total $1.00

NOTE: Same as the NOTE in Case 1) above

1-3) When the PLUs are programmed with HI-CONE status and programmed with Preset Individual Item Price of

$0.40:

(within one sale)

Sale Amount (Calculation Process)

1 x PLU No. 1

1 x PLU No. 2

1 x PLU No. 1

(1 [@/FOR]) 1 [PLU]

(1 [@/FOR]) 2 [PLU]

(1 [@/FOR]) 1 [PLU]

$0.40 (Preset Indiv. Item Price)

$0.40 (Preset Indiv. Item Price)

$0.20 ($1.00 - $0.80)

Sale Total $1.00

10-11

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.15 Price Shift Entry for Split-Price PLUs

Cases 2) Same as Case 1-3) except that the PLUs are not programmed with the same M &M Group

2-1) When Individual Items are entered separately:

(within one sale)

PLU No. 1 (3 [@/FOR]) 1 [PLU]

Sale Amount (Calculation Process)

$1.00 (Whole Package Price)

PLU No. 2 (3 [@/FOR]) 2 [PLU] $1.00 (Whole Package Price)

Sale Total $2.00

NOTE: Even without M &M Grouping programmed, an entry of any Split-Price PLU in units of Whole

Package Quantity is processed as Whole Package Price for each PLU.

2-2) When the PLUs are entered in units of whole packages:

(within one sale)

PLU No. 1 (3 [@/FOR]) 1 [PLU]

Sale Amount (Calculation Process)

$1.00 (Whole Package Price)

PLU No. 2 (3 [@/FOR]) 2 [PLU] $1.00 (Whole Package Price)

Sale Total $2.00

NOTE: Even without M &M Grouping programmed, an entry of any Split-Price PLU in units of Whole

Package Quantity is processed as Whole Package Price for each PLU.

10.15 Price Shift Entry for Split-Price PLUs

This operation performs Split-price PLU item entry using the following three unit price.

• Cooled one unpacked item

• Cooled packed item

• Packed item under normal temperature

OPERATION

1) For the entry of cooled packed item

[PACK]

[PACK]

[PACK]

Barcode Scanning

|PLU Code| [PLU]

[PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU

NOTES: 1. Depressing the [PACK] key after the [3rd PRICE] key is depressed results in an error.

2. This transaction can handle neither open price PLU nor scale-compulsory PLU.

3. Preset-price Open Entry is unavailable for this transaction.

4. This transaction is unavailable when the Triple Multiplication feature has been selected.

10-12

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.15 Price Shift Entry for Split-Price PLUs

2) For the entry of packed item under normal temperature

[3rd PRICE]

[3rd PRICE]

Barcode Scanning

|PLU Code| [PLU]

[3rd PRICE] [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU

NOTES: 1. Depressing the [3rd PRICE] key after the [PACK] key is depressed results in an error.

2. This transaction can handle neither open price PLU nor scale-compulsory PLU.

3. Preset-price Open Entry is unavailable for this transaction.

4. This transaction is unavailable when the Triple Multiplication feature has been selected.

Example)

Program

Contents

Entry

Contents

• Whole Package Price: $1.00

• Whole Package Quantity: 3

• HI-CONE Status: None

• Mix & Match Function: With

• Split-package Individual Item Price: $0.40 • Amount of Dollar Discount/ Extra Charge: $0.20

• Quantity Entry Compulsory: None (Discount)

1 [PLU] $0.40 ............ Split-package Individual Item Price

1 [PLU]

1 [PLU]

$0.40

$0.20

............ Split-package Individual Item Price

............ Mix & Match $1.00 - $0.40 - $0.40 = $0.20

Total $1.00

1 [@/FOR] 1 [PLU]

2 [@/FOR] 1 [PLU]

3 [@/FOR] 1 [PLU]

$0.40

$0.60

$1.00

............ Split-package Individual Item Price

............ Mix & Match $1.00 - $0.40 = $0.60

............ Mix & Match

Total $2.00

[PACK] 1 [PLU] $1.00 ............ Whole Package Price

[3rd PRICE] 1 [PLU] $0.80 ............ Whole Package Price -Dollar Discount

Total $1.80

Program

Contents

Entry

Contents

• Whole Package Price: $1.00 • HI-CONE Status: None

• Whole Package Quantity: 3 • Mix & Match Function: With

• Split-package Individual Item Price: $0.40 • Amount of Dollar Discount/ Extra Charge: $0.20

• Quantity Entry Compulsory: With (Discount)

1 [@/FOR] 1 [PLU] $0.40 ............ Split-package Individual Item Price

2 [@/FOR] 1 [PLU]

3 [@/FOR] 1 [PLU]

$0.60

$1.00

............ Mix & Match $1.00 - $0.40 = $0.60

............ Mix & Match

Total $2.00

[PACK] 1 [PLU] $1.00

[3rd PRICE] 1 [PLU] $0.80

............ Whole Package Price

............ Whole Package Price -Dollar Discount Amount

Total $1.80

10-13

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.16 Triple Multiplication

Program

Contents

Entry

Contents

• Whole Package Price: $1.00 • HI-CONE Status: With

• Whole Package Quantity: 3 • Mix & Match Function: With

• Split-package Individual Item Price: $0.40 • Amount of Dollar Discount/ Extra Charge: $0.20

• Quantity Entry Compulsory: None (Extra Charge)

1 [PLU]

1 [PLU]

1 [PLU]

$1.00

$1.00

$1.00

............ Whole Package Price

Total $3.00

1 [@/FOR] 1 [PLU] $0.40 ............ Split-package Individual Item Price

2 [@/FOR] 1 [PLU]

3 [@/FOR] 1 [PLU]

$0.60

$1.00 ............ Mix & Match

Total $2.00

[PACK] 1 [PLU] $1.00 ............ Whole Package Price

[3rd PRICE] 1 [PLU] $1.20 ............ Whole Package Price + Extra Charge Amount

Total $2.20

10.16 Triple Multiplication

(1) Department Triple Multiplication

Open Department

• |Length| [@/FOR] |Width| [@/FOR] |Unit Price| [Open DEPT]

Preset Department

Preset-price Open

[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN])

|Length| [@/FOR] |Width| [@/FOR]

(2) PLU Triple Multiplication

Open PLU

• |Length| [@/FOR] |Width| [@/FOR]

Preset PLU

• |Length| [@/FOR] |Width| [@/FOR]

Preset-price Open

[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN])

|Preset-Dept Code| [DP#]

|Unit Price| [Preset DEPT]

|Preset-Dept Code| [DP#] |Unit Price| [AMT]

|Open-PLU Code| [PLU] |Unit Price| [AMT]

|Unit Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Open-PLU

|Preset-PLU Code| [PLU]

[PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU

|Length| [@/FOR] |Width| [@/FOR] |Preset -PLU Code| [PLU] |Unit Price| [AMT]

|Unit Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU

PLU Entry through Barcode Scanner (see NOTE 4 on the next page)

|Length| [@/FOR] |Width| Scan the Barcode of Preset-price PLU

Scan the Barcode of Open-price PLU |Unit Price| [AMT]

10-14

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.17 Single-Item Department or Single-Item PLU Entry

NOTES: 1. The Triple Multiplication entries are possible only when the option “Triple Multiplication” is selected

(instead of Split Package Pricing).

2. Length, Width ................................ Max. 3 integral digits + max. 3 decimal digits

Unit Price ....................................... Max. 6 digits

Product of Length x Width ............. Less than 9999,999

3. The fraction rounding method is ruled by the process designated for ordinary Quantity Extension entries.

4. In a entry sequence using a barcode scanner, an error will result on entering the [@/FOR] key for the second time.

10.17 Single-Item Department or Single-Item PLU Entry

If a department (or PLU) is programmed as Single-item, the department (or PLU) entry sequence will immediately finalizes the sale as cash sale when operated outside a sale.

OPERATION

DEPARTMENT ENTRY

-- Single-item Receipt Print Format --

Same as

QUANTITY EXTENSION

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

SPLIT PACKAGE PRICING

TRIPLE MULTIPLICATION

NOTES: 1. If operated inside a sale, it functions just as an

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

6$7 ordinary itemized department or PLU.

2. For the Validation print after the Single-Item

Department (or PLU) entry, the name and the

'3

&$6+ amount of the department (or PLU) are printed. ,7(0

-21(6 70

10.18 HASH Department Entry, HASH PLU Entry

This operation is used to enter items which do not directly become sales for the store, such as lottery, postage, gift wrapping fee, size adjustment fee, utility (payment of electricity and gas), and donation.

OPERATION

Same as DEPARTMENT ENTRY sequence using the Department Key which is programmed as an HASH department. When a PLU is used for this purpose, the PLU must be programmed to link to a department with HASH status.

10.19 Sub-Link Department Entry

OPERATION

Head-link Dept Entry

-- Receipt Print Format --

(compulsory)

'5,1.

%7/ '(32 ↑

7)

Example) Dept.“DRINK” is programmed as Head- link Dept. and Dept. “BTL DEPO” is programmed as Sub-link Dept. in this example.

Sub-link Mark

10-15

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.20 Sub-Link PLU Entry

10.20 Sub-Link PLU Entry

OPERATION

Head-link PLU Entry

When the Sub-link PLU is of Preset-PLU Type:

(automatically entered)

When the Sub-link PLU is of Open-PLU Type:

(compulsory)

-- Receipt Print Format --

Example) PLU “Drink Small-B” is programmed as

Head-link PLU and PLU “Small-Btl

Depo” and “Eco Fees” are programmed as Sub-link in this example.

'ULQN 6PDOO%

6PDOO%WO 'HSR ↑

(FR )HHV ↑

7

7

PLU Table Link PLU Table

PLU Code PLU Name Tax Status

Link PLU

Table No.

1

2

1 000002

2

000003 Eco

000003

NOTES: 1. For entering a Price of the Sub-link PLU, the [PLU Preset-code Key] cannot be used (always use the [AMT] key in this case).

2. When the program option “Manager Intervention for entering Negative Departments/PLUs in REG mode” has been selected, a Manager Intervention is required for the Head-link PLU entry of which

Sub-link PLU is programmed as negative status.

10.21 Urgent PLU Maintenance

(to enter a PLU item not existing in the PLU program file)

OPERATION

PLU Entry Operation

[PLU ADD]

Error Message

“CODE ERROR” is displayed.

(|Quantity| [@/FOR]) in case of quantity extension

Depress [C] to cancel the error status.

|PLU Code| [PLU]

Or, scan the barcode.

[DEPT]

[DP#] Max. 6 digits

(0 to 999999)

Link Department Designation

NOTES: 1. When a PLU item is successfully entered in the operation procedure above, the item is printed on the receipt and journal. The item name at this time is the name of the Link Department. At the same time, the PLU item is automatically added to the PLU ADDITIONAL FILE. Thus, the added

PLU item can now be entered normally on any of the terminals.

2. Since PLU items thus added to the PLU file are programmed with the name of the link department and the “zero” status as a provisional measure, it will be a Manager’s job to change those PLU tables with proper name and status as a PLU maintenance operation later (described in the

Manager’s Guide).

10-16

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.22 Returned Merchandise

10.22 Returned Merchandise

OPERATION

[RTN MDSE] DEPARTMENT ENTRY

QUANTITY EXTENSION

SPLIT PACKAGE PRICING

TRIPLE MULTIPLICATION

SINGLE-ITEM DEPARTMENT/PLU ENTRY

SUB-LINK PLU ENTRY

(Operate before Head-link PLU to return both items linked together.)

SUB-LINK DEPARTMENT ENTRY

(Operate before each or one of the two items that is returned.)

-- Receipt Print Format --

571

' 3

571

3/8

7)

7)

NOTE: This operation cannot be performed for Negative Departments/PLUs.

10.23 Bottle Return

- - -

OPERATION

|Bottle Return Amount| [BTL RTN]

|Quantity| [@/FOR] |Unit Amount| [BTL RTN] max.3 digits (integral value only)

NOTES: 1. This operation can be performed both inside a sale and outside a sale. (The “Credit Balance” option is ignored.)

2. The bottle return amount exceeding the subtotal amount can be entered.

-- Receipt Print Format --

%75

%75

[ #

10-17

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.24 Dollar Discount

10.24 Dollar Discount

OPERATION

- - - Dept or PLU item entry

(for discount from an individual item)

[ST]

(for discount from the sale total)

-- Receipt Print Format --

9(*(7$%/(

',6&

7) 68%7/

',6&

NOTES: 1. This operation can be performed both inside a sale and outside a sale. (The “Credit Balance” option is ignored.)

2. After the [ST] key depression, the discount amount exceeding the subtotal amount can be entered.

3. This operation is not possible immediately after a link-PLU entry.

10.25 Percent Discount, Percent Charge

OPERATION

Dept or PLU entry

Positive Previous Balance entry (credit balance)

[%-] (or [%+])

[ST] |Rate| [%-] (or [%+])

NOTES: 1. Rate ............................................... 0.001 to 99.999 (%).

2. When the Dept or PLU item entry is modified with [RTN MDSE] or [VOID], the following % entry will also be modified with [RTN MDSE] or [VOID].

3. A % entry will cause an error if operated after a Negative Department/PLU or an HASH

Department/PLU.

4. After the [ST] key depression, a negative subtotal amount can be entered also.

-- Receipt Print Format --

7) 68%7/

10.26 Store Coupon

OPERATION

[STR CPN]

QUANTITY EXTENSION for DEPTs

NOTE: The store coupon amount to be entered must not exceed the sale total unless the “Credit

Balance” option is selected.

-- Receipt Print Format --

6&31

9(*(7$%/( 7)

10-18

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.27 Vendor Coupon

10.27 Vendor Coupon

OPERATION

([ST]) |Coupon [VND CPN] - - -

NOTES: 1. This operation can be performed both inside a sale and outside a sale. (The “Credit Balance” option is ignored.)

2. The vendor coupon amount exceeding the subtotal amount can be entered.

10.28 Item Correct

-- Receipt Print Format --

68%7/

9&31

OPERATION

DEPARTMENT ENTRY

PLU ENTRY

REPEAT ENTRY

QUANTITY EXTENSION

SPLIT PACKAGE PRICING

TRIPLE MULTIPLICATION

RETURNED MERCHANDISE

BOTTLE RETURN

DOLLAR DISCOUNT

PERCENT CHARGE/DISCOUNT

STORE COUPON

9(*(7$%/(

&255 ↑

[ITEM CORR]

-- Journal Print Format --

7)

VENDOR COUPON

Previous Balance Entry in CHARGE POSTING

(Manual PB Entry or Customer File Type)

RECEIVED-ON-ACCOUNT Item

PAID-OUT Item

MANUAL TAX

NOTES: 1. When [ITEM CORR] is depressed after a Repeat Entry, only the last item of those repeated will be deleted. multiplication) will be deleted.

3. When the Item Correct operation is performed, “CORR

“ is printed on the journal, but the deleted item is not printed on the receipt.

4. The Validation Print operation is possible after the Item Correct operation.

5. The Item Correct operation is not possible after the Validation Print operation.

6. The Item Correct operation is not possible immediately after a Link-PLU entry.

10-19

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.29 Void

10.29 Void

The VOID operation is used to delete an item already entered before the last item within the current sale. Such items cannot be deleted by the [ITEM CORR] key any longer.

OPERATION

[VOID] DEPARTMENT ENTRY - - -

QUANTITY EXTENSION

SPLIT PACKAGE PRICING|

TRIPLE MULTIPLICATION

NOTE: An amount exceeding the sale total cannot be entered unless the “Credit Balance” option is selected. voids

Void Entry

-- Receipt Print Format --

9(*(7$%/(

'3

92,'

9(*(7$%/(

7)

7)

7)

10.30 All Void

When the current transaction being entered is found to be canceled before finalizing it, ALL VOID can be operated to delete all the items entered in the transaction.

OPERATION

Sale Item Entries [ALL VOID]

[ITEM CORR] to execute ALL VOID

[C] to cancel ALL VOID

NOTES: 1. All Void is possible if the current transaction contains less than 50 items.

2. All Void can also be operated to delete a charge posting sale of Manual PB Entry

Type or Check Track Type.

3. The All Void cannot be operated after an

[EX] entry or during a Received-on-Account or Paid-Out transaction.

4. The All Void cannot be operated after the [FS TL/TEND] key.

5. The All Void is not possible during the Hold operation.

6. The All Void is not possible after recalling a sales transaction which the Hold is performed for.

-- Receipt Print Format --

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

6$7

9(*(7$%/(

'3

68%7/

∗∗ $// 9'

7)

7)

∗∗

-21(6 70

10.31 Non-Add Number Print

Non-add numbers can be entered and printed for future references, to indicate codes or numbers of customers, media checks, credit cards, etc. The entered numbers do not affect any sale total data.

OPERATION (allowed any time during a sale or transaction)

-

Max.18 digits.

Non-add No. Print

-- Receipt Print Format --

32

32

727$/

10-20

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.32 Scale Entry

10.32 Scale Entry

OPERATION

(The department or PLU through which scale items are entered must be a Scale-Allow department or a Scale-Compulsory PLU)

(1) Auto Scale Entry (without tare/tare 2/tare 3, or with tare/tare 2/tare 3 auto-subtraction)

(M)

• Through Dept: Place the item on the scale platter.

[SCALE] |Unit Weight| [@/FOR]

For entry with General Weight Unit .....

1 to 9 (LB or Kg), 10 for 1/2 LB or 100g, 11 for 1/4LB (when the

Unit Weight is different from the

General Weight Unit) per Unit Weight

Max. 6 digits

|Open-Dept Code| [DP#] |Unit Price| [AMT] per Unit Weight

Max. 6 digits

• Through Preset-PLU: Place the item on the scale platter.

([SCALE])

(M)

• Through Open-PLU: Place the item on the scale platter.

([SCALE])

(M) per Unit Weight

Max. 6 digits

NOTES: 1. When the PLU is programmed with a Tare Table No., the tare weight is automatically subtracted from the scaled weight, and thus only the net weight is processed.

2. If the Tare 2 rate is programmed in the PLU table, a Tare 2 entry is performed when the above

Preset/Open PLU entry is performed.

3. At the link-PLU entry, the Scale Entry can be performed for the head-link PLU but not for the sublink PLU.

(2) Auto Scale with Tare/Tare 2/Tare 3

|Tare Table No.| [TARE]

1 to 9

|Tare Table No.| [TARE]

1 to 9

|Tare 2 Rate| [TARE 2]

0 to 99.99 (%) to be continued to the arrows marked with “(M)” in the above three operation sequences of the Auto Scale Entry.

|Tare 2 Rate| [TARE 2]

0 to 99.99 (%) to be continued to the arrows marked with “(M)” in the above three operation sequences of the

Auto Scale Entry. to be continued to the arrows marked with “(M)” in the above three operation sequences of the Auto Scale Entry. to be continued to the arrows marked with “(M)” in the above three operation sequences of the Auto Scale Entry. Any value other than 0, however, less than the weight of scaled item

10-21

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.33 Listing Capacity Open

|Tare Weight| [TARE 3]

Any value other than 0, however, less than the weight of scaled item

|Tare 2 Rate| [TARE 2]

0 to 99.99 (%) to be continued to the arrows marked with “(M)” in the above three operation sequences of the

Auto Scale Entry.

NOTES: 1. If the Tare 2 rate is programmed in the PLU table, a PLU entry using |Tare 2 Rate| [TARE 2] (third pattern above) cannot be performed.

3. Omission of the Tare 3 Entry causes an error if the compulsory status of the Tare 3 Entry has been programmed to a department/PLU item to be entered.

(3) Manual Scale Entry (It may be prohibited by a program option.)

|Net Weight| of the item [SCALE]

1 to 99999

(unit: g or 1/100LB. For example, enter 5 for 0.05 LB.) to be continued to the arrows marked with “(M)” in the above three operation sequences of the Auto

Scale Entry.

(4) Return or Void Manual Scale Entry (It may be prohibited by a program option.)

[RTN MDSE] for Return to be continued to the top of the “Manual Scale Entry” sequence above.

[VOID] for Void

10.33 Listing Capacity Open

For Departments and PLUs

Depress [LC OPEN] (or [OPEN]) prior to or any time during an entry of an open-department, open-PLU, or preset-open department or PLU sequence (including REPEAT and QUANTITY EXTENSION entries). Please note that the [LC OPEN] or [OPEN] key must be pressed, at latest, before the final key of the entry sequence.

The High Amount Limit for the department or PLU will be extended with two higher digits, and the Low Amount

Limit will be extended with one lower digit. For entering an amount still exceeding these limits, you must call for a

Manager Intervention.

For Media Tender Amounts

Depress [LC OPEN] (or [OPEN]) before or after the amount but Media Key. The High Amount Limit for the media tendering will be extended with one higher digit. In need of still exceeding this limit, you must call for a

Manager Intervention.

For Amounts through [DOLL DISC], [VND CPN], [STR CPN], [BTL RTN]

To exceed their limits, you must always call for a Manager Intervention. The [LC OPEN] or [OPEN] key will not be effective. As for the [STR CPN] key only, the amount is limited by both High Amount Limit of the department through which the store coupon amount is entered and the amount limit for [STR CPN]. That is, when an amount cannot be entered using [LC OPEN] or [OPEN], you must call for a Manager Intervention.

10.34 Selective Itemizer (SI) Status Modification

Depress [SI/M] (or [SI1/M] and/or [SI2/M]) for entering the required Department or PLU item, the same way as

[LC OPEN] is operated for Departments and PLUs. The SI-net status is reversed to non-net status, and vice versa.

10-22

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.35 Tax Status or Food Stamp Status Modification

10.35 Tax Status or Food Stamp Status Modification

Depress [TX/M] (or [TX1/M], [TX2/M], [TX3/M], [TX4/M]), in the same way as [LC OPEN] is operated, prior to or any time during the entry sequence of the required Department, PLU, or any other tax-status-programmable item

([DOLL DISC], [%-], [%+], [STR CPN], [VND CPN], [BTL RTN]). The taxable status is reversed to non-taxable, and vice versa. The [FS/M] key operates the same to reverse from the Food Stampable status to nonstampable, and vice versa, of the required item.

10.36 Manual Tax Entry

(where irregular tax amount addition is applied)

OPERATION

- - -

10.37 Subtotal (Sale Total Pre-taxed) Read

OPERATION

[ST] - - -

The sale total (pre-taxed) of the items so far entered is displayed (and printed if so programmed), but the sale is not finalized. Additional item entries are allowed, if any.

10.38 Taxable Total (Sale Total With Taxes) Read

7$;

-- Receipt Print Format --

-- Receipt Print Format --

68%7/

OPERATION

[TXBL TL] - - -

The sale total including taxes due of the items so far entered is displayed (and printed if so programmed), but the sale is not finalized. Additional item entries are allowed, if any.

10.39 Taxable Total Read and Subtotal Print

-- Receipt Print Format --

7;%/ 7/

(when only one of [ST] and [TXBL TL] keys, not both, is installed on the keyboard)

In this case, the key is usually programmed as [ST] key with [TXBL TL] functions. Since this key has both [ST] and [TXBL TL] functions, it may be labeled as “[ST]” in some stores or as “[TXBL TL]” in others.

OPERATION

[ST] - - -

The sale total including taxes of the items so far entered is displayed (and the sale total pre-taxed is printed if so programmed), but the sale is not finalized. Additional item entries are allowed, if any.

10-23

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.40 Selective Itemizer (SI) Total Read

10.40 Selective Itemizer (SI) Total Read

OPERATION

[SI/TL] - - - (for Single-SI Machine)

-- Receipt Print Format --

([SI1/TL] and/or [SI/2/TL] for Dual-SI Machine)

SI Total Calculated

9(*(7$%/(

6, 7/

7$;

&$6+

The SI total is displayed and printed on journal (and printed on the receipt if so programmed).

7)

NOTES: 1. The fraction process method is fixed to Round OFF.

2. For the Validation print after depressing the [SI/TL] key, the SI total amount is printed.

10.41 PLU Preset Price Read

This operation may be used to verify the preset price of an individual PLU.

OPERATION

(Any time inside or outside a sale, but prohibited during a short-tendered condition. It is impossible to read the customer file during the training entry.)

(--- ) [READ] |PLU Code| [PLU] ( - - -)

(--- ) [READ] [PLU Preset-Code Key] ( - - -)

(--- ) [READ] Scan the Barcode of the PLU ( - - -)

(--- ) [READ] |Customer File Code| [PICK UP BAL] ( - - -)

... The operation header “READ” (programmable) and the name of the PLU displayed in the upper row and the preset price of the PLU is displayed in the lower row. When it is an open PLU, nothing will be displayed in the lower row. No print occurs.

NOTES: 1. Other items or operations relating or not relating to the read-out PLU may follow. If you want to clear the display content, depress the [C] key. It is only a “READ” operation and will not affect any sales data.

2. PLU Preset Price Read Operation designated by the [3rd PRICE] or [PACK] key is available.

10.42 Tax Calculation and Print

Your ECR has been programmed with proper tax tables (tax breaks and/or tax rates).

Each department or PLU has been programmed with proper tax status, i.e. taxable or non-taxable status of each

Tax (of maximum 4 taxes of Tax 1 to Tax 4).

On finalizing a sale, the taxes due are automatically calculated and printed on the receipt, and thus added to the sale.

Whether all taxes (Tax 1 to Tax 4) are consolidated into one line print or individually printed in separate lines is a program option.

-- Receipt Print Format --

Example of

Consolidated

Print Line

68%7/

7$;

&$6+

Example of

Separate Print

Lines

68%7/

7$;

7$;

&$6+

10-24

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.43 Tax Exemption

10.43 Tax Exemption

OPERATION

Selective Tax Exemption

Examples) [TX1/M] [EX]

[TX1/M] [TX2/M] [EX]

[TX1/M] [TX2/M] [TX3/M] [EX]

2. Tax Exemption is unavailable for inclusive taxes.

3. Only when the total validation function has been selected, the Validation print operation after depressing the [EX] key is possible.

Sale Finalization ... to exempt from Tax 1 only

Sale Finalization ... to exempt from Tax 1 & Tax 2

Sale Finalization... to exempt from Tax 1, Tax 2, & Tax 3

All Tax Exemption

[EX] Sale Finalization to exempt from all taxes

[TX1/M] [TX2/M] [TX3/M] [TX4/M] [EX] Sale Finalization

NOTES: 1. On depressing [EX], the sale total including the exempted tax(es) is displayed and pre-taxed amount of the sale portion subject to the tax exemption is printed.

Pre-taxed amount of the sale portion subject to Tax1

Pre-taxed amount of the sale portion subject to Tax2

-- Receipt Print Format --

7$;(;

7$;(;

10.44 Food Stampable Total Read, Food Stamp Tendering

OPERATION

[FSTL TEND]

Displays the Food

Stampable Total

Tendering in Food Stamp

(This must be operated first of all the payments in finalizing the sale if food stamps are part of the payment.)

... When the Food Stamp tendered amount is less than the sale total, the sale is not finalized with the balance still due displayed. Then it can be finalized with cash or other media total or tendering operations.

Entire Sale Total

Food Stampable Total

Food Stamp Tendered Amount

Change in Cash

Change in Food Stamp

727$/

)67/

)6703

&+$1*(

)6 &+*

NOTES: 1. Food Stamp feature is unavailable for the area where inclusive tax feature is used.

2. Any of the following features can be selected by the program option.

The amount including the food stampable tax can be paid by Food Stamp.

2) Illinois

Only the amount paid by Food Stamp is exempted from the food stampable tax.

3) New Jersey

All food stampable tax is exempted regardless of the amount of Food Stamp.

3. Change in unit of $ is paid by Food Stamp, and ¢ is paid by cash.

10-25

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.45 Sale Finalization by Media Keys

10.45 Sale Finalization by Media Keys

OPERATION

([TXBL TL]) [AT/TL] finalize without tendering

|Tendered Amount| finalize with tendering and change calculation finalize without tendering

|Tendered Amount| finalize with tendering and

[Chg]

[MISC TEND]

Other media keys max. 3 digits

|Code for Credit Card Company| [CARD No.]

1 to 12

(|Tendered Amount| ) [Chg]

( NOTE 6)

NOTES: 1. Whether each Media Key is depressed with a prior tendered amount entry or not is determined by the key status selections programmed for each media key.

2. If the sale total is zero, any Media Key must be depressed without a tendered amount entry even if the key is programmed as “Tender” key.

3. When a non-cash media key is programmed as “Tender-only” key, it cannot finalize a negative balance sale. Whether a “Total-only” or “Tender/Total” key can finalize a negative balance sale or not is a program option. Each of non-cash media key with Tender function may be programmed to prohibit Over-tendering and/or Short-tendering.

4. When a media is programmed to allow “Total” function, it can also be programmed with the

“Drawer Open” or “Not Open” status on operating the key.

5. When the media keys are programmed with the validation-compulsory status, the drawer opens after the Validation Print operation.

6. When performing the Validation Print operation after entering sale total for each credit card company, the name of the credit card company is printed.

-- Receipt Print Format --

7$;

&$6+

(Cash Total)

7$;

727$/

&$7(1'

&+$1*(

(Cash Tender)

10-26

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.46 Multi-Tendering

10.46 Multi-Tendering

Short-tendering repeated multiple times by the same media (allowed only when the media key is programmed to allow short-tendering).

OPERATION

|1st Amount Tendered| [MEDIA]

Repeat if not yet finalized.

NOTE: When the media keys are programmed with the validation-compulsory status, the drawer opens after the Validation Print operation.

Multi-tendering by [AT/TL] key

Change due, as the result of the 2nd amount tendered

10.47 Split Tendering

-- Receipt Print Format --

7$;

727$/

&$7(1'

&$7(1'

&+$1*(

Short-tendering repeated multiple times by the different media keys (allowed only when the media keys are programmed to allow short-tendering).

OPERATION

Example 1)

- - - |Check Amount Tendered| [CHK TND]

|Cash Amount Tendered| [AT/TL] ... Check & Cash

Example 2)

- ([TXBL TL])

|Cash Amount Tendered| [AT/TL] [Chg] ... Check, Cash, & Charge

|Cash Amount Tendered| [AT/TL]

NOTES: 1. In both MULTI-TENDERING and SPLIT TENDERING operations, the sale is finalized and a receipt is issued on reaching the sale total amount.

2. If a media key is depressed without an amount tender entry and the key is programmed to function as “Total” key, the sale is then finalized on that stage processing the balance at that moment into that media.

3. When the media keys are programmed with the validation-compulsory status, the drawer opens after the Validation Print operation.

-- Receipt Print Format --

7$;

727$/

&+(&.

&$6+

10-27

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.48 Sale Finalization by EFT (Electronic Fund Transfer)

10.48 Sale Finalization by EFT (Electronic Fund Transfer)

Sale transaction by the various cards such as credit card, etc. is executed via the EFT terminal.

(1) CREDIT Authorization

OPERATION

Key Operation

Sale Entry

FIU Upper Row Display

([TXBL TL]) the amount is paid, however depending on the program option)

[CREDIT]

([C]) Pressing the [C] key at this point will restore the ECR to the condition being ready for the [CREDIT] key entry

Card Slide

PROCESSING

(in case of no response from EFT)

or

(in case of decline)

Response from the EFT terminal

ECR prints a Customer Receipt

NO RESPONS

DECLINE

APPROVED

ECR prints a Store Receipt

NOTES: 1. At tendering in Foreign Currency, the EFT media cannot be used.

2. Receipt post-Issue operation after finalizing a sale by the EFT is unavailable.

3. Training Cashiers are unacceptable to the EFT terminal.

4. When “PROCESSING” is displayed, none of the operations on the ECR are possible.

5. EFT entry is also available to the partial payment to the received on account and charge posting transactions.

6. Issuance of the Store Receipt is selectable.

7. For the EFT function, do not perform any registration in Receipt OFF mode.

8. When manual issuance of store receipt has been programmed, the store receipt must be issued to perform next transaction or read/reset jobs.

10-28

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT

(2) DEBIT Authorization

OPERATION

Key Operation

Sale Entry

([TXBL TL]) the amount is paid, however depending on the program option)

[DEBIT]

([C]) Pressing the [C] key at this point will restore the ECR to the condition being ready for the [DEBIT] key entry

Card Slide

(in case of no response from EFT)

Response from the EFT terminal

Input the Pin No. from the Pin Pad

Then depress the [ENTER] key

ECR wait condition

(in case of no response from EFT)

or

(in case of decline)

Response from the EFT terminal

ECR prints a Customer Receipt

ECR prints a Store Receipt

EO1-11152

10.48 Sale Finalization by EFT (Electronic Fund Transfer)

FIU Upper Row Display

NO RESPONS

ENTER PIN#

PROCESSING

NO RESPONS

DECLINE

APPROVED

10-29

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.48 Sale Finalization by EFT (Electronic Fund Transfer)

NOTES: 1. At tendering in Foreign Currency, the EFT media cannot be used.

2. Receipt post-Issue operation after finalizing a sale by the EFT is unavailable.

3. Training Cashiers are unacceptable to the EFT terminal.

4. When “PROCESSING” is displayed, none of the operations on the ECR are possible.

5. EFT entry is also available to the partial payment to the received on account and charge posting transactions.

6. Issuance of the Store Receipt is selectable.

7. Validation Print operation after finalizing a sale transaction by the EFT is possible.

8. Finalization of the [DEBIT] key operation in - mode causes an error.

(3) CREDIT/DEBIT Refund

OPERATION

[RTN MDSE] to be continued to the top of “CREDIT/DEBIT Authorization” sequence

NOTES: 1. Receipt post-Issue operation after finalizing a sale by the EFT is unavailable.

2. Training Cashiers are unacceptable to the EFT terminal.

3. Key operation on the ECR is unavailable during the inquiry to the host.

4. Issuance of the Store Receipt is selectable.

5. Validation Print operation after finalizing a sale transaction by the EFT is possible.

6. During the Refund operation, finalizing operation by several EFT media keys should not be performed.

(4) Manual Card Number Entry

When the EFT terminal cannot read information contained in a card, the EFT approval entry will be executed by manually entering the card No. and the expiration date on the ECR.

• EFT Media Key Entry

Sales Item Entry [TXBL TL]

Max. 7 digits

NOTE 1

[EFT Media Key]

NOTE 2

|Card No.| [#]

Max. 25 digits

NOTE 3

|Expiration Date| [#]

Max 4 digits; MM/YY

(Omissible)

NOTES: 1. Entry of tendering amount is omissible if a customer pays all the amount.

3. For the Card No. entry, entering 0 at the beginning of the card No. is valid.

Example) When “00123” is entered, “00123” will be printed.

10-30

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.48 Sale Finalization by EFT (Electronic Fund Transfer)

(5) Off Line Authorization

When the EFT system is in trouble and down, the EFT can be finalized on the ECR. To obtain the authorization code of the EFT approval, you tell the customer’s card data and the amount of purchase to the

EFT authorization company on the telephone.

OPERATION

Sales Item Entry [TXBL TL]

or Max. 7 digits

NOTE 1

NOTE 2

[FSTL TEND]

Max. 11 characters

(Omissible)

NOTES: 1. Entry of tendering amount is omissible if a customer pays all the amount.

3. Before performing this operation, each EFT Media Key should be programmed with the statuses both “with EFT process” and “off line authorization is available”. Failure to do this may cause an error.

4. None of store receipt is issued by the Off Line Authorization operation.

5. In Off Line Authorization operation, the Manual Card No. entry is unavailable.

6. The OFF Line Authorization operation is not possible by cashiers with training status.

7. Values 0 to 9 and A to Z should be used to enter the Authorization Code.

Keyboard layout at the Authorization Code entry

The keyboard layout changes by the [EFT Media Key] depression as shown below.

Accordingly, values 0 to 9 and A to Z can be entered as the Authorization Code.

#

0

C

-- Ordinary Keyboard Type --

7 8 9 C

4 5 6 B

1 2 3 A

H

G

F

M R W

L Q V

K P U Z

10-31

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.48 Sale Finalization by EFT (Electronic Fund Transfer)

-- Flat Keyboard Type --

Q W E R T Y U I O P

A S D F G H J K L

Z X C V B N M

(6) Store Receipt

This operation is used for manually issuing the store receipt.

OPERATION

#

0

C

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

[STORE RECEIPT]

NOTES: 1. Journal print is not performed.

2. In case of the tendering operation (multi- or split-), the [STORE RECEIPT] key can be depressed at the same number of times as its operation. (Allowed up to 4 times)

3. None of store receipt is issued by the Off Line Authorization operation. available.” in the EFT key status setting. Failure to do this may cause an error.

5. When the host responds decline, the Store Receipt operation causes an error,

10-32

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.48 Sale Finalization by EFT (Electronic Fund Transfer)

(7) Cashing Authorization

Cashing operation with a Debit card or EBT cash card is performed here.

OPERATION

Key Operation

Amount to be cashed (Max. 7 digits)

[DEBIT] (or [EBT CASH])

([C]) Pressing the [C] key at this point will restore the ECR to the condition being ready for the [DEBIT] (or

[EBT CASH]) key entry.

Card Slide

(in case of no response from EFT)

Response from the EFT terminal

Input the Pin No. from the Pin Pad

Then depress the [ENTER] key

ECR wait condition

(in case of no response from EFT)

or

(in case of decline)

Response from the EFT terminal

ECR prints a Customer Receipt

ECR prints a Store Receipt

FIU Upper Row Display

NO RESPONS

ENTER PIN#

PROCESSING

NO RESPONS

DECLINE

APPROVED

10-33

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.48 Sale Finalization by EFT (Electronic Fund Transfer)

• Manual Entry (only for [EBT CASH] key)

Max. 7 digits

8 to19 digits

(|Expiration Date|) [#]

Max 4 digits: MM/YY

NOTES: 1. Before performing this operation, the [DEBIT] (or [EBT CASH]) key should be programmed with the status “no-purchase cashing is allowed”. Also each EFT Media Key should be programmed with the statuses both “with EFT process” and “off line authorization is available”. Failure to do this may cause an error.

2. For the EFT function, do not perform any registration in Receipt OFF mode.

3. Receipt post-Issue operation after the Cash-only Debit is unavailable.

4. Key operation on the ECR is unavailable during the inquiry to the host.

5. The Endorsement Print can be performed.

6. Training Cashiers are unacceptable to the EFT terminal.

7. Issuance of the Store Receipt is selectable.

8. When manual issuance of store receipt has been programmed, the store receipt must be issued to perform next transaction or read/reset jobs.

9. EFT Cashing Authorization operation with the [CREDIT], [CHECK], or [EBT F/S] key is not possible. (This operation in REG or MGR mode works as a no-sale cashing of a non-cash media.)

10-34

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.48 Sale Finalization by EFT (Electronic Fund Transfer)

(8) EBT CASH, EBT F/S Purchase

Purchase with an EBT cash card or EBT food stamp card is performed here.

OPERATION

Key Operation FIU Upper Row Display

Sale Entry

This operation is possible when the

[EBT F/S] key is programmed with the status “food stamp payment”.

([TXBL TL]) [FS TL/TEND]

(Tendered Amount)

(Max. 7 digits; Omissible if all the amount is paid, however depending on the program option.)

[EBT CASH]

|Tendered Amount|

Max. 7 digits

(Must be entered)

[EBT F/S]

SWIPE CARD

Card Slide

([C]) Pressing the [C] key at this point will restore the ECR to the condition being ready for the

[EBT CASH] (or [EBT F/S]) key entry.

(in case of no response from EFT)

Response from the EFT terminal

Input the Pin No. from the Pin Pad then depress the [ENTER] key.

(in case of no response from EFT)

or

(in case of decline)

Response from the EFT terminal

ECR prints a Customer Receipt

ECR prints a Store Receipt

NO RESPONS

ENTER PIN#

PROCESSING

NO RESPONS

DECLINE

APPROVED

10-35

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.48 Sale Finalization by EFT (Electronic Fund Transfer)

• Manual Entry

(when the [EBT CASH] or [EBT F/S] key has been programmed with the status “taxable total payment”.)

([TXBL TL]) Sales Entry

Max. 7 digits

(Omissible)

([EBT F/S])

8 to 19 digits

• Manual Entry

(|Expiration Date|) [#]

Max. 4 digits; MM/YY

(Omissible)

(when the [EBT F/S] key has been programmed with the status “food stamp payment”.)

Sales Entry ([FS TL/TEND])

Max. 7 digits

8 to 19 digits

3.

4.

Contents of the customer receipt are printed on the journal, but those of the store receipt are not.

Automatic issuance or manual issuance of the store receipt is selectable by the system option setting.

(|Expiration Date|) [#]

Max. 4 digits; MM/YY

(Omissible)

NOTES: 1. Receipt post-Issue operation after finalizing a sale by the EFT is unavailable.

2. Key operation on the ECR is unavailable during the inquiry to the host.

5. Up to 4 times of Multi-tendering operation or Split-tendering operation is possible when finalizing a sale transaction by the EFT, however, the 5 times of the operation causes an error. At this time, the sale finalization operation is possible only when using the [AT/TL] key or the media keys with the status “without EFT process”.

6. Sale finalization by the EFT is possible only when the media key has been programmed with the status “EFT media” in the EFT key status setting. If not, ordinary sale finalization is performed.

7. Training cashiers are unacceptable to the EFT terminal. (Ordinary finalization operation can be performed.)

8. Issuance of the store receipt is selectable by the EFT key status setting.

9. When tendering in foreign currency, the EFT media keys are not accepted.

10. For the EFT function, do not perform any registration in Receipt OFF mode.

11. Multiplication operation for each media with the EFT media keys is not possible.

12. When manual issuance of store receipt has been programmed, the store receipt must be issued to perform next transaction or read/reset jobs.

13. Validation Print operation after finalizing a sale transaction by the EFT is possible.

14. Negative balance sale causes an error.

10-36

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT

(9) Check Authorization

Sale finalization by a check via the EFT terminal is performed.

OPERATION

Key Operation

Sale Entry

([TXBL TL])

[CHECK]

(Max. 7 digits; Omissible if all the amount is paid, however depending on the program option)

Check Slide

Pressing the [C] key at this point will

([C]) restore the ECR to the condition being ready for the [CHECK] key entry.

(in case of no response from EFT)

or

(in case of decline)

Response from the EFT terminal

ECR prints a Customer Receipt

EO1-11152

10.48 Sale Finalization by EFT (Electronic Fund Transfer)

FIU Upper Row Display

SLIDE CHECK

PROCESSING

NO RESPONS

DECLINE

APPROVED

10-37

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.48 Sale Finalization by EFT (Electronic Fund Transfer)

• Manual Entry

Key Operation

Sale Entry

([TXBL TL])

[CHECK]

(Max. 7 digits; Omissible if all the amount is paid, however depending on the program option)

Max. 20 digits

Pressing the [C] key at this point

[#] will restore the

ECR to the condition being ready for the

|Routing entry.

[C]

Max. 10 digits

FIU Upper Row Display

ENT ACCT NUMBER

ROUTING NO

|State Code| 2 digits

[#] PROCESSING

(in case of no response from EFT)

or

(in case of decline)

Response from the EFT terminal

ECR prints a Customer Receipt

NO RESPONS

DECLINE

APPROVED

10-38

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.48 Sale Finalization by EFT (Electronic Fund Transfer)

NOTES: 1. It is possible to cancel this operation prior to the inquiry to the host (i.e. before the message

“PROCESSING” is displayed).

2. Customer receipt is printed, but store receipt is not.

3. Check No. and Authorization code are printed on the endorsement.

4. Training cashiers are unacceptable to the EFT terminal. (Ordinary finalization operation can be performed.) When they depress the [MANUAL CARD#] key at the manual entry, it results in an error.

5. As the finalization of the [CHECK] key, only the Check Authorization is possible. (Return operation is not possible.)

When negative balance sale is given in REG or MGR mode, the finalization of the [CHECK] key causes an error. Also, this operation causes an error in - mode.

6. This operation is possible only when “check authorization” has been selected for the [CHECK] key function in the system option setting.

10-39

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.48 Sale Finalization by EFT (Electronic Fund Transfer)

(10) Driver’s License Authorization

Sale finalization by a driver’s license via the EFT terminal is performed.

OPERATION

Key Operation

Sale Entry

([TXBL TL])

FIU Upper Row Display amount is paid, however depending on the program option)

Pressing the [C] key at this point will restore the

ECR to the condition being ready for the

[CHECK] key entry.

[C]

|State Code|

(alphanumeric character)

2 digits

[#] BIRTHDATE

|Date of Birth|

4 digits (MMYY) or 6 digits (MMDDYY)

[#] PROCESSING

(in case of no response from EFT)

or

(in case of decline)

NO RESPONS

DECLINE

Response from the EFT terminal

ECR prints a Customer Receipt

APPROVED

10-40

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.48 Sale Finalization by EFT (Electronic Fund Transfer)

NOTES: 1. It is possible to cancel this operation prior to the inquiry to the host (i.e. before the message

“PROCESSING” is displayed).

2. Customer receipt is printed, but store receipt is not.

3. License No. and Authorization code are printed on the endorsement.

4. Training cashiers are unacceptable to the EFT terminal. (Ordinary finalization operation can be performed.)

5. As the finalization of the [CHECK] key, only the Check Authorization is possible. (Return operation is not possible.)

When negative balance sale is given in REG or MGR mode, the finalization of the [CHECK] key causes an error. Also, this operation causes an error in - mode.

6. Date of birth can be entered with 3 digits (MYY) or 5 digits (MDDYY) also.

Example: Entry of January 2000 … 100 [#]

7.

Entry of January 15, 2000 … 11500 [#]

This operation is possible only when “driver’s license authorization” has been selected for the

[CHECK] key function in the system option setting.

10-41

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.49 Check Cashing (No-sale cashing of a non-cash media)

10.49 Check Cashing (No-sale cashing of a non-cash media)

This operation is performed when a check is changed with cash.

OPERATION (Must be operated outside a sale)

|Check Amount to be Cashed| [CHK TND] ... The drawer opens to enable the exchange.

NOTES: 1. Other non-cash media keys may be used for this purpose if programmed to allow no-purchase cashing.

2. Post-issue receipt is not available after the Check Cashing operation.

3. When the media keys are programmed with the validation-compulsory status, the drawer opens after the Validation Print operation.

Example) To encash the check for $10. -- Receipt Print Format --

10.50 Sale Paid in Foreign Currencies

Check Amount Cashed

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

6$7

&+(&.

-21(6 70

OPERATION

- - - [TXBL TL]

(or [ST])

[CUR1] Amount Tendered in [CUR1] [AT/TL]

Foreign Currency

Mandatory for a sale paid in foreign currencies.

Displays the equivalent value in

Foreign Currency 1.

Display the entered foreign currency amount.

Displays the domestic currency value equivalent to the tendered foreign currency.

Other media keys may be used if paid in that media. (The media key must be programmed to allow tendering in this case.)

NOTES: 1. The [CUR 2] to [CUR 5] keys operate the same as [CUR 1], except that each of these keys has its own exchange rate programmed corresponding to each foreign currency.

2. The amount tendered in the foreign currency and its exchange rate may be programmed to print by program options.

3. The foreign currency keys cannot be used to finalize Received-on-Account payments, Paid-out items, or charge posting (sale with previous balance).

4. When a tendering by a foreign currency occurs during a short-tendered condition, the [ST] key will not be mandatory.

5. A sale of zero or negative balance cannot be finalized using any of the foreign currency keys.

6. The sale finalization using the [FS TL/TEND] key is not possible.

7. The fraction process method at the currency exchange is fixed to Round OFF.

Optional Print

Amount Tendered in CUR1

CUR1 Exchange Rate

-- Receipt Print Format --

7$;

727$/

&85

&$7(1'

&+$1*(

10-42

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.51 No-Sale Exchange from Foreign Currency to Domestic Currency

10.51 No-Sale Exchange from Foreign Currency to Domestic Currency

Foreign currency amount is exchanged with equivalent domestic currency amount.

OPERATION (Must be operated outside a sale)

|Amount of Foreign Currency 1 to be exchanged| [NS]

... The drawer opens to enable exchange. Displays the domestic currency amount equivalent to the entered foreign currency amount.

NOTES: 1. The [CUR 2] to [CUR 5] keys operate the same.

2. The fraction process method is fixed to Round OFF.

3. After the [CARD No.] key, the [CUR] key depression causes an error.

4. On the validation after performing the No-Sale Exchange from Foreign Currency to Domestic

Currency, the exchanged amount is printed.

Amount of CUR1 to be exchanged

Exchange Rate (optional print)

Domestic Currency amount equivalent to the CUR2

&85

-- Receipt Print Format --

&+$1*(

10.52 No-Sale Exchange from Domestic Currency to Foreign Currency

Domestic currency amount is exchanged with equivalent foreign currency amount.

OPERATION (Must be operated outside a sale)

|Amount of Domestic Currency to be exchanged| [CUR 1] [NS]

... The drawer opens to enable exchange. The display content of the CUR 1 value obtained on the [CUR 1] key depression is held.

NOTES: 1. The [CUR 2] to [CUR 5] keys operate the same.

2. This operation (exchange from domestic to foreign currencies) may be prohibited by a program option.

3. The fraction process method is ruled by “Foreign Currency Rounding Process Setting”.

4. After the [CARD No.] key, the [CUR] key depression causes an error.

5. On the validation after performing the No-Sale Exchange from Domestic Currency to Foreign

Currency, the exchanged amount is printed.

Domestic Currency amount to be exchanged

Exchange Rate of CUR3 (optional print)

CUR1 amount equivalent to the domestic currency amount &85

-- Receipt Print Format --

&$7(1'

10-43

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.53 Received-on-Account

10.53 Received-on-Account

A received-on-account transaction is used to identify money which is in the drawer but not relating to a sale.

OPERATION

|Amount of Payment| [R/A] ([ST]) |Cash Amount Tendered| [AT/TL]

(if paid in cash)

(|Quantity| receipt sequence.

|Check Amount Tendered| [CHK TND]

(if paid in check)

Other Media Finalization

This portion is the same as SALE FINALIZATION BY

MEDIA KEYS already described.

NOTES: 1. The media keys used for this operation must be programmed to allow received-on-account entries.

2. MULTI-TENDERING and SPLIT-TENDERING (already described) are also applied to the finalization of received-on-account payments.

-- Receipt Print Format --

5$

5$

68%7/

&$6+

-21(6 70

3. The All Void operation is not possible during a

Received-on-Account transaction.

4. When the media keys to be used for sale finalization are programmed with the validation-compulsory status, the drawer opens after the Validation Print operation.

10.54 Paid-Out

A paid-out transaction is used when money is removed from the drawer without totaling to a sale.

OPERATION (Must be operated outside a sale)

|Amount to be paid out| [PO] ([ST])

Repeatable if multiple amounts to be paid out are recorded in one receipt sequence.

[AT/TL]

2. The All Void operation is not possible during a Paid-Out transaction.

3. Post-issue receipt is not available after the Paid-Out operation.

4. If the [AT/TL] key is programmed with the validation-compulsory status, the Validation Print operation is not compulsory at the Paid-Out operation.

-- Receipt Print Format --

32

32

68%7/

727$/

-21(6 70

10-44

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.55 Salesperson Entry (Salesperson Sign-ON)

10.55 Salesperson Entry (Salesperson Sign-ON)

This operation is used for performing sales management of each salesperson.

OPERATION

1 to 99

... The name of the person is displayed and printed on both journal and receipt.

Programmable options relating to Salesperson Entries:

• Salesperson’s name non-print on receipt (print on journal only)

• Salesperson Entry compulsory before sale item entries

• Salesperson Entry Prohibited during a sale (i.e. allowed only one person entry at the starting of a sale but prohibits any other salesperson entry once the sale is started.) When this program option is not selected, up to five salespersons can sign-ON during one sale.

The salesperson entry status (salesperson Signed-ON condition) will be held until:

• Another salesperson entry is operated, or

• The sale is finalized.

NOTE: After a Salesperson Entry, the mode change is prohibited.

-- Receipt Print Format --

6WDF\

Salesperson Code Salesperson’s Name

10.56 Hold & Recall

You can interrupt one customer’s transaction with other customer’s transaction.

OPERATION

Sales item entries [HOLD/RECALL] Operate sale item entries and finalize for Customer B. for Customer A

Temporary finalization of Customer A Sale (HOLD)

Recalling Customer A Sale (RECALL)

Sale for Customer A (HOLD) Sale for Customer B Sale for Customer A (RECALL)

68%7/

∗∗ +2/'

-21(6

∗∗

70

'3

'3

7$;

&$6+

,7(0

-21(6

7)

7)

70

∗∗ 5(&$//

7$;

&$6+

,7(0

-21(6

The same Receipt Consecutive No.

NOTES: 1. The All Void operation is not possible during a Hold transaction.

2. After a Hold operation, the mode change, Sign-OUT, and Sign-OFF are not possible.

∗∗

70

10-45

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.57 Credit Card No. Check

3. The Recall operation is not possible after a Hold operation or during sales item entry. After the sales finalization, the Recall operation is possible.

4. When a customer is being held, after the sales transaction is finalized, a buzzer tone generates twice.

5. When the Recall operation is performed for a sales transaction being held, the All Void operation is not possible for this sales transaction. (The Void operation is possible.)

6. During a Hold, Total-only type Post-issue Receipt can be issued.

7. The Validation Print operation is not possible after depressing the [HOLD/RECALL] key.

10.57 Credit Card No. Check

- - - |Number printed on the card|

Max. 19 digits

Max 15 digits

This operation is allowed at the top of a sale or any time during a sale including while a sale is being finalized, or a received-on-account transaction is being operated. When an error results, the operator calls the manager. The manager then can select one of the following solutions:

1. Tells the customer that the card cannot be accepted referring to the displayed status code. (Or, lets the operator do so without calling the manager.)

2. To allow payment by this card as an exceptional case for some reason, depress the [C] key to clear the error, then turn the Mode Lock to “MGR” position using the MA key, and depress the [CARD CHK] key. The card

No. is then accepted and printed.

NOTES: 1. The card check function is activated in the REG mode only; in MGR or - mode, the card No. entry is accepted without an inquiry to the “Card No. Negative Check List”.

Please also note that the card check function can be set to “active” or “non-active” in the MGR mode (described in Manager’s Guide.)

2. It is programmable to prohibit finalizing a sale before the card check operation by programming the compulsory card check to each media key.

10.58 Receipt Post-Issue

OPERATION (Must be operated outside a sale)

(A sale is finalized) [RECEIPT ISSUE]

Programmable options:

• Post-issue receipt is available only when the sale has been finalized with Receipt-OFF mode.

• Available regardless of Receipt-ON/OFF mode (in this case two receipts may be obtained for one sale.)

• Post-issue receipt is itemized receipt for a sale of maximum 50 lines. Exceeding 50 lines, the post-issue receipt is total-only receipt.

• Post-issue receipt is always total-only receipt regardless of the number of lines of a sale.

• Post-issue receipt is issued only once.

• Post-issue receipt can be issued any number of times.

NOTES: 1. The post-issue receipt content will not be printed on the Remote Slip Printer.

2. The post-issue receipt is not available for Paid-Out transactions.

10-46

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.59 Charge Posting: Previous Balance Manual Entry Type

3. The program option allows you to select that the post-issue receipt operation is available for the

Received-on-Account transaction, the Charge Posting transaction and the Hold & Recall transaction. However, when the Charge Posting transaction is finalized by the [PO] key, the postissue receipt operation cannot be unconditionally performed.

4. The Validation Print operation is not possible after performing the post-issue receipt operation.

-- Ordinary Receipt --

6$7

9(*(7$%/(

[

7RPDWR

68%7/

7$;

727$/

&$7(1'

&+$1*(

,7(0

-21(6

#

7)

7)

70

Itemized Type

-- Post-issue Receipt --

Total-only Type

6$7

∗∗ &23<

9(*(7$%/(

[ #

7RPDWR

68%7/

7$;

727$/

&$7(1'

&+$1*(

,7(0

-21(6

∗∗

7)

7)

70

6$7

727$/

-21(6

This line is printed only when a post-issue receipt is issued after the Ordinary Receipt is issued, or the second and subsequent postissue receipts are issued.

10.59 Charge Posting: Previous Balance Manual Entry Type

70

OPERATION

(1) To initiate charge posting for a new customer

Follow the line marked with “*” in Operation 2 below.

zero

(2) Charge posting with a previous balance first entered (pre-select) with or without PAYMENT

[PB+] (for credit balance) * Sale item entries, if any.

([TXBL TL])

Displays the sale total excluding the previous balance.

[Chg]

Finalizes the current sale, displays the entire sale total including the previous balance.

The prior [Chg] key may be omitted in this case.

|Amount Paid for this occasion| [R/A]

(The amount to be paid, partially or entirely, for this occasion.

An excessive amount may be entered, in which case a debit balance will result.)

Media Key operations

(Same as media key operations for RECEIVED-ON

-ACCOUNT payment finalization already described.)

Repeatable if necessary. cash now.

10-47

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.59 Charge Posting: Previous Balance Manual Entry Type

(3) Charge posting with a previous balance entered during a sale (post-select)

A previous balance (including a zero balance for a new customer) may be entered not only before sale items but also after or between them if the [Chg] key has not been depressed. Multiple previous balance entries are possible within a sale (for the purpose to sum up multiple accounts into one, etc.).

(4) Percent rate addition to a previous balance

NOTES: 1. The [%-] key operates the same for percent discounting.

2. The previous balance entered through [PB-] (debit balance) will not allow %+ or %- operation.

3. When the last key is programmed with the validation-compulsory status, the drawer opens after the

Validation Print operation.

Charge Posting Operation Sample (Previous Balance Manual Entry Type)

OPERATION CONTENTS KEY OPERATION DISPLAY (Lower Row)

Receipt 1

To open a new customer account:

Sale Items:

$3,50 Dept.1

$2,40 Dept.3

Finalize this sale.

To transfer all the balance without payment.

The above customer comes to the store for payment.

All his balance is read.

He will pay all the balance today.

He tenders $7,00 in cash.

The balance of the customer is now zero.

Give the change to the customer in cash.

0 [PB+]

350 [DEPT 1]

240 [DEPT 3]

([Chg])

[TRF]

(See Receipt 1 below.)

623 [PB+]

(previous balance)

[Chg]

623 [R/A]

700 [AT/TL] (See Receipt 2 below.)

0

0

1

3

0.

3.

2.

6.

6.

6.

6.

6.

0.

0

5

4

2

2

2

2

2

7

0

3

3

0

0

3

3

3

7

-- Receipt Print Format --

Receipt 2

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

6$7

3%

9(*(7$%/( 7)

7)

7$;

&KJ

1(: %$/

,7(0

-21(6 70

New Balance is transferred as PB.

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

6$7

3%

&KJ

5$

&$7(1'

&+$1*(

1(: %$/

,7(0

-21(6 70

10-48

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.60 Charge Posting: Customer File Type (Check Track Memory Option)

10.60 Charge Posting: Customer File Type (Check Track Memory Option)

OPERATION

(1) To initiate charge posting for a new customer

|Customer File Code| [PICK UP BAL]

(Must be one of those already opened in the

“SET” mode and its balance must be zero.)

|New Customer File Code| [CODE OPEN]

(any 1 to 12-digit code not yet opened in the

“SET” mode) ... (The use of [CODE OPEN] may require a Manager Intervention.)

Follow the line marked with

“*” in Operation 2 below.

(2) Charge posting with a previous balance first entered (pre-select) with or without Payment

|Customer File Code| [PICK UP BAL] * Sale item entries, if any.

([TXBL TL]) [Chg]

Displays the sale total excluding the previous balance.

Finalizes the current sale, displays the entire sale total including the previous balance.

The prior [Chg] key may be omitted in this case.

|Amount Paid for this occasion| [R/A]

(The amount to be paid, partially or entirely, for this occasion.

An excessive amount may be entered, in which case a debit balance will result.)

Media Key operations

(Same as media key operations for RECEIVED-ON

-ACCOUNT payment finalization already described.)

Repeatable if necessary. cash now.

(3) Charge posting with a previous balance entered during a sale (post-select)

A previous balance recalled through [PICK UP BAL] (or a zero balance by [PICK UP BAL] or [CODE OPEN]) may be entered not only before sale items but also after or between them if the [CRT] key has not been depressed. But, this operation is allowed only once in a sale.

(4) Percent rate addition to a previous balance

|Customer File Code| [PICK UP BAL] (|Rate|) [%+]

NOTES: 1. The [%-] key operates the same for percent discounting.

- - -

2. When the balance recalled is negative (debit balance), neither %+ nor %- can be operated.

10-49

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.60 Charge Posting: Customer File Type (Check Track Memory Option)

Charge Posting Operation Sample (Check Track Memory Option)

OPERATION CONTENTS KEY OPERATION

Mr. JAMES HAILY comes and you start charge posting for him.

Sale Items:

$1,20 Dept.1

$3,50 Dept.3

Finalize this sale.

To transfer all the balance without payment.

Mr. JAMES HAILY now comes to pay all his account balance.

He tenders $10,00 in cash.

The balance is now zero due to the payment.

Give the change to the customer in cash.

1 [PICK UP BAL]

120 [DEPT 1]

350 [DEPT 3]

([Chg])

[TRF]

(See Receipt 1 below.)

1 [PICK UP BAL]

[Chg]

488 [R/A]

1000 [AT/TL]

(See Receipt 2 below.)

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

-- Receipt Print Format --

Receipt 2 Receipt 1

Customer

File Code

Customer’s

Name &

Balance

6$7

3%

-$0(6 +$,/<

9(*(7$%/(

'3

7$;

&KJ

7)

7)

1(: %$/

,7(0

-21(6 70

0

0

1

3

DISPLAY (Lower Row)

0.

1.

3.

4.

4.

5

8

8

0

2

0

8

8

0

0

4.

4.

4.

5.

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

6$7

3%

-$0(6 +$,/<

&KJ

5$

&$7(1'

&+$1*(

1(: %$/

,7(0

-21(6 70

8

8

8

1

8

8

8

2

10-50

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.61 Function Key Entry

10.61 Function Key Entry

This operation will execute a string of key operations preprogrammed on each [FUNCTION] key.

OPERATION

-- Receipt Print Format --

[FUNCTION] ( - - - ) - - -

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

[FUNCTION 1] to [FUNCTION 10]

• The following key operations are preprogrammed on

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\ the [FUNCTION 1] key in this example.

[1] [00] [DP1] [ST] [AT/TL]

6$7

'3

68%7/

&$6+

7)

,7(0

-21(6 70

10.62 Endorsement Print

OPERATION

After operating the required non-cash media key

(usually the [CHK TND] key)

Insert the check or the required slip into

Remote Slip Printer

Enter the check No. (Max.

15 digits) (if so the programmed), and then

NOTES: 1. The Check No. entry prior to the [CHECK NO.] key may be programmed to be compulsory.

2. Endorsement print performed after the received-on-account transaction is available.

3. When the validation-compulsory status is activated, the Endorsement print is possible after performing the Validation Print.

-- Endorsement Print Sample --

Printed on Remote Slip Printer:

6$7

9(*(7$%/(

'3

'3

68%7/

7;%/ 7/

7$;

727$/

&+(&.

&+$1*(

7)

7)

7)

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9( /,9(5322/

(1*/$1'

727$/

&+(&.

&/ 70

Check No. Line

Endorsement Message Lines

Total Line (may not be printed)

Check Amount Line

Cashier ID, Consecutive No.,

Date, Time

,7(0

-21(6 70

10-51

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.63 Comment Print

10.63 Comment Print

OPERATION

Print of the programmed message

|Comment Message Code| [COMMENT] .............. Programmed message corresponding to the designated

1 to 10 code is printed on the receipt and the remote slip.

Print of a message using character code entry

[COMMENT] Character Code Entry

(Max. 32 characters; 2-digit code is assigned to each character as shown on the table below.)

[COMMENT] .................. Message entered by character code is printed on the receipt and the remote slip.

Example) Character code “00” is assigned to “SPACE”.

Character code “34” is assigned to “B”.

NOTES: 1. This operation is available any time outside a sale or inside a sale including during the short tendering condition, however except the following.

During the Loan transaction

During the Pick Up transaction

During the Paid Out transaction

2. Neither the Item Correct transaction nor the Validation Print is effective for this operation.

10-52

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.64 Sale Finalization by EBT (Electronic Benefit Transfer)

10.64 Sale Finalization by EBT (Electronic Benefit Transfer)

OPERATION

Entry for customer’s receipt (1st Receipt)

• Using the EBT Card (for Food Stamp)

When all the amount is paid by EBT Card

Sales Item Entry

[DISPLAY 1]

[FS TL/TEND] (|Food Stamp Tendered Amount|)

The message “EBT AUTH” is displayed, and the sale finalization process is automatically performed as the EBT Card sale.

• Using the Debit Card, Check, Credit Card and Cash EBT Card

During short tendering condition When all the amount is paid by one media

Sales Item Entry [TXBL TL] (|Media Tendered Amount|)

[DISPLAY 2]

[DISPLAY 3]

[DISPLAY 4]

The message “DEBIT AUTH” is displayed, and the sale finalization process is automatically performed as the Debit Card sale.

The message “CHECK AUTH” is displayed, and the sale finalization process is automatically performed as the Check sale.

The message “CREDIT AUTH” is displayed, and the sale finalization

[DISPLAY 5] process is automatically performed as the Credit Card sale.

The message “CASH EBT” is displayed, and the sale finalization process is automatically performed as the Cash EBT Card sale.

Entry for store’s receipt (2nd Receipt)

After the 1st receipt is issued [DISPLAY 6] The message “RECEIPT” is displayed, and the

2. This operation is available for the Received-on-Account transaction and the partial payment on the

Charge Posting transaction.

2nd receipt (Receipt for store; Copy) is issued.

NOTES: 1. Do not operate the keys on the keyboard until the 1st receipt (Receipt for customer) is issued.

3. As for the journal print, only the content of the 1st receipt is printed.

4. When the Validation Print or the Endorsement Print is necessary, perform it after the 1st receipt is issued. Neither the Validation Print nor the Endorsement Print can be performed after the 2nd receipt is issued.

10-53

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.65 Validation Print

10.65 Validation Print

After performing each registering operation, insert a validation slip into the validation slot of the slip printer, confirm the PAPER OUT lamp on the slip printer is off, then depress the [VALIDATE] key to perform a validation print.

OPERATION

After entering the required item through a transaction key or media key.

Insert a validation slip into the validation slot.

[VALIDATE]

NOTES: 1. The following options are selectable.

1) Print/Non-print selection

Date print/non-print, consecutive No. print/non-print, cashier No. print/non-print, terminal No. print/non-print, and time print/non-print are selectable.

2) Multi-validation function

3) Total validation function

2. When depressing the declaration key, numeric key, or point key, the Validation Print causes an error.

3. The Validation Print is possible after depressing the [#] or [NS] key.

4. The validation compulsory status is programmable on each key by the key status setting.

5. When the validation compulsory status after the issuance of the long receipt is activated, the

Validation Print is performed then the drawer opens.

6. When the total validation function is not selected, the Validation Print after the [EX] key depression causes an error.

7.

8.

9.

The subtotal amount is printed on the validation after performing the All Void operation.

The Validation Print operation is not possible by cashiers with training status.

The tendered amount is printed on the validation after tendering food stamps.

10. When the taxable total display by the [ST] key depression has been programmed, not the taxable total amount but the subtotal amount is printed.

11. While the entered data is printed by the slip printer, if you want to perform a validation print, press the RELEASE key of the slip printer to replace the slip with the validation slip, then depress the

[VALIDATE] key.

12. Characters of character codes 1007, 1206, 1207, 1211, 1500 through 1503, 1506 through 1514

VXFK DV , Œ, œ, - : 8 ; 9 , , kg, lb, No, ×, , are not printed on the validation slip.

13. The name and amount of the head-link PLU are printed on the validation slip after performing the link PLU entry.

10-54

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.66 Remote Slip Printer (hardware option) Operation

10.66 Remote Slip Printer (hardware option) Operation

The Remote Slip Printer TM-U295 (EPSON printer) may be connected to the ECR as an optional device. The

Remote Slip Printer will operate printing if a slip is properly inserted, regardless of the Mode Lock position (except that no print will occur in the “ SET ” mode or during program verification in the “ X ” mode).

1. The remote slip printer will automatically activate printing when the slip has properly been set to the printer table.

2. The following are selective status programmable relating to the remote slip printer. Ask the store manager and mark the status selected for your store.

PROGRAM OPTIONS RELATING TO REMOTE SLIP CONTROL

• Remote Slip Print compulsory for any Previous Balance entry in “ REG ” or “ MGR ” mode:

Standard: FREE (Not compulsory)

Option: COMPULSORY (applies to any Previous Balance entry whether it is the Manual PB Entry type or the Customer File (Check Track) Memory type.

• Code No. (Check No.) Entry Before [CHECK NO.] key at Endorsement Print (Refer to ENDORSEMENT

PRINT operation already stated.)

Standard: FREE (Not compulsory)

Option: COMPULSORY

3. The gap of the slip inlet is usually opened, and the slip may be inserted or withdrawn freely outside a receipt/journal print sequence.

When a slip is properly set to the remote slip printer and the ECR is operated, the gap will be closed and printing will be performed. When the sale is finalized and the receipt is issued, the gap of the Remote Slip

Printer will be opened to allow the slip withdrawal. (The gap keeps closed during sale item entries.)

4. The RELEASE key on the TM-U295 may be used to open the closed gap in order to withdraw the slip and skip unnecessary item print.

5. Printing on the remote slip will be performed alternately with printing on the receipt/journal of the ECR.

6. When the remote slip print is compulsory, the slip printer OFF status or the disconnection of the cable causes a SLIP OFFLINE error. During the error, the [ITEM CORR] key depression results in that the slip printer connection check message is displayed. At this time, the [ITEM CORR] key depression again results in that the slip printer is disconnected, however, the [C] key depression results in that the slip printer remains connected.

7. When the remote slip print (or endorsement print) is compulsory, the [VALIDATE] or [CHECK NO.] key depression may cause a SLIP OFFLINE error or SLIP PAPER OUT error. At this time, the compulsion status is canceled by performing one of the following operations, and you can proceed to the registering operation.

(a) [ITEM CORR] key

[ITEM CORR] key

• Depress the [ITEM CORR] key if you want to cancel the compulsion status. At this time, the confirmation message “COMP CANCEL?” is displayed.

• Depress the [ITEM CORR] key again to perform the cancellation.

• The cancellation continues during a sale transaction.

(b) [ITEM CORR] key

[C] key

• When the confirmation message “COMP CANCEL?” is displayed, if you do not want to perform the cancellation, depress the [C] key.

(c) [C] key

• Depress the [C] key to clear the error message.

After clearing the error, the Validation Print operation or the Endorsement Print operation is possible by depressing the [VALIDATE] or [CHECK NO.] key.

8. Characters of character codes 1007, 1206, 1207, 1211, 1500 through 1503, 1506 through 1514 such as Ë, Œ,

œ,

,

,

,

,

, × , ¯ , kg, lb, No, ×,

,

are not printed on the validation slip.

10-55

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.66 Remote Slip Printer (hardware option) Operation

As typical application of remote slip printing, print formats of invoice and Charge Posting Customer Sale File are placed below.

-- Invoice Print Format --

6$7

9(*(7$%/(

[ #

'ULQN 6PDOO%

[ #

6PDOO%WO 'HSR ↑

68%7/

7)

7

9(*(7$%/(

#

'ULQN 6PDOO%

#

6PDOO%WO 'HSR

68%7/

&$6+

7)

7

&$6+

,7(0

-21(6

,7(0

-21(6 70

-- Charge Posting Sale File Print Format (PB Manual Entry Type) --

1

6$7

3%

9(*(7$%/(

3%

9(*(7$%/( 7)

7)

7$;

&KJ

7$;

&KJ

1(: %$/

70

7)

7)

1(: %$/

,7(0

,7(0

-21(6 70

-21(6 70

3%

7RPDWR

&KJ

7)

2

1(: %$/

6$7

3%

7RPDWR

&KJ

7)

1(: %$/

,7(0

-21(6 70

,7(0

-21(6

3%

&KJ

5$

&$6+

1(: %$/

,7(0

-21(6

70

70

3

6$7

3%

&KJ

5$

&$6+

1(: %$/

,7(0

-21(6 70

10-56

10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT EO1-11152

10.67 When a Power Failure Occurs...

10.67 When a Power Failure Occurs...

If a power failure occurs, all sales data stored in the memory are automatically protected by the battery installed in the ECR. The battery is rechargeable and it is recharged when the AC power returns. As the power returns, the ECR revives to continue the work and displays the last item entered before the power failure. However, please note the following phenomena to occur on the ECR when the power is regained:

1. The printer will work to print the entered data without failure after the power recovery, if any data was being printed. However, one extra line may be fed on the power recovery depending on the power-recovery timing.

2. The following are the display indications on the power recovery:

ECR CONDITION at the time of Power Failure DISPLAY INDICATION on the Power Recovery

OUTSIDE A

SALE

DURING A

SALE

No key-in has been operated.

Numeric or Declaration keys have been entered but not motorized keys.

No Numeric or Declaration keys have been entered.

Numeric or Declaration keys have been entered.

Displays zero. Operations may go on.

Regains the display content that was obtained just before the power failure. The operations may be continued.

Regains the display content that was obtained just before the power failure. The operations may be continued.

In case a power failure occurred during printing, after the power recovery, a line of “*****” is printed on the receipt, then whole contents will be printed.

Example:

-- Receipt Print Format --

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

'3

'3

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

6$7

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

6$7

'3

'3

'3

'3

'3

&$6+

,7(0

-21(6 70

10-57

11. JOURNAL AND RECEIPT PAPER-END DETECTOR EO1-11152

11. JOURNAL AND RECEIPT PAPER-END DETECTOR

11. JOURNAL AND RECEIPT PAPER-END DETECTOR

(1) This detects when either the journal or receipt paper is coming near the end. It is provided in order to prompt the operator to replace the old paper roll with a new one.

(2) When the paper roll is out (or the paper has not been set properly), no key operation will be accepted and the front display will indicate “PAPER END”.

(3) When a new paper roll is set, only the [C] key is allowed to operate. Next, when the [C] key is depressed, the error message “PAPER END” will be cleared and normal key-in operations will be accepted. If any printing was suspended, it will continue printing.

(4) If this detector senses a paper-end condition during printing, the printing will stop after the current line printing is completed.

(5) If the [C] key is depressed in the paper-end condition, it will be ignored. The [C] key depression will be effective to clear the error message only after the new paper roll is set.

(For further details, refer to Chapter 6.)

12. ECR PRINTER MOTOR LOCK DETECTOR

(1) This detects the printer motor lock condition caused by some trouble.

(2) When such a condition is detected, the front display indicates “PRINTER ERROR” and none of the keys

(including [RF] and [JF]) will be accepted.

(3) To regain the normal condition, turn the power of the ECR to OFF, remove the cause of the motor lock, and then turn the power to ON again.

11- 1

13. REMOTE SLIP PRINTER MOTOR LOCK DETECTOR EO1-11152

13. REMOTE SLIP PRINTER MOTOR LOCK DETECTOR

13. REMOTE SLIP PRINTER MOTOR LOCK DETECTOR

(1) This detects the remote slip printer motor lock condition caused by some trouble.

(2) When such a condition is detected, the front display indicates “SLIP OFF LINE” and none of the keys

(including [RF] and [JF]) will be accepted.

(3) To regain the normal condition, turn the powers of the ECR and the remote slip printer to OFF, remove the cause of the motor lock, and then turn the powers to ON again.

* If the cause cannot be found in the remote slip printer and only the ECR may be required to work temporarily without the remote slip printer, remove the remote printer cable from the ECR, and turn the power of the ECR to ON.

14. PRINTER HEAD OPEN DETECTOR

(1) This detects the printer head open condition.

(2) When such a condition is detected, the front display indicates “Error” and none of the keys (including [RF] and

[JF]) will be accepted.

(3) To regain the normal condition, turn the power of the ECR to OFF, close the printer guide, and then turn the power to ON again.

13- 1

15. GENERAL MAINTENANCE EO1-11152

15.1 Cleaning the Covers

15. GENERAL MAINTENANCE

WARNING!

1. DO NOT POUR WATER directly onto the ECR, as this may cause electric shock or fire.

2. The Journal Take-up Motor becomes very hot while printing. To avoid getting burned, never touch the Journal Take-up Motor.

CAUTION!

Never use an organic solvent like thinners or benzene for cleaning. Using such solvents may discolor the cover.

15.1 Cleaning the Covers

Wipe the covers with a soft dry cloth slightly moistened with mild detergent. After using detergent for cleaning, be sure to wipe it off with a slightly moistened cloth.

15.2 Removing Jammed Paper

1) Turn the power OFF.

2) Open the Receipt Frame Cover Ass’y. If Receipt Frame Cover Ass’y will not open because of paper jam, turn knob until pin appears in opening by triangle.

Knob

Pin

3) Remove the jammed paper. DO NOT USE any sharp implement or tool as these will damage the printer.

4) Re-load the receipt roll. (Refer to Section 6.1 Installing/Replacing the Receipt/Journal Roll.)

15.3 Clearing the Cutter Error

When the display indicates “CUTTER ERROR”, clear this error by following procedure below.

1) Turn the power OFF.

2) Turn the power ON.

3) Depress the [C] key.

15- 1

15. GENERAL MAINTENANCE EO1-11152

15.4 Manual Drawer Release and Lock

15.4 Manual Drawer Release and Lock

WARNING!

When opening the cash drawer, be careful not to let the drawer hit any person.

The drawer opens automatically when a registration is performed. In the event of a power failure or other trouble, the drawer can be opened manually in the following manner:

Releasing

1) Remove the CDC Cap.

2) Insert the Drawer Release Key into the Drawer Release Lock, then turn the key clockwise. The drawer will now open. The Drawer Release Key can be taken out by returning it to the original position.

Locking

When the drawer is closed, it is automatically locked and will not open without the Drawer Release Key or transaction entries.

15.5 Removing the Drawer

1) Pull the drawer out, and when it stops by the stopper, lift the drawer up and pull it again.

2) When it stops again by the roller fixed in the drawer case, lift it and pull it again.

15- 2

15. MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS EO1-11152

15.6 Media Slot

15.6 Media Slot

The Media Slot provided at the front of the drawer is used to put non-cash media such as check in the drawer without opening it. The non-cash media put from this slot are kept under the Money Case, therefore you can keep them in secret.

Media Slot

Non-cash media are kept here.

Money Case

15.7 CDC (Cash Drawer Cover; Option) Lock

Locking

1) Push the Cash Drawer Cover to the back of the drawer.

2) Press the cover lightly, insert the key into the key hole on the cover, and turn it 90

°

clockwise.

Unlocking

Unlock the cover using the key, and lift the front end.

15- 3

16. SPECIFICATIONS EO1-11152

16. SPECIFICATIONS

16. SPECIFICATIONS

Size ........................................................ 460 mm (width) x 430 mm (depth) x 350 mm (height)

(height including rubber feet)

Weight ................................................... 15.0 kg

Power Required .................................... AC 117 V ±10 %; 60 Hz

(varies depending on the destination)

Power Consumed ................................. 0.6 A at 117 V

Ambient Temperature .......................... 0 °C to 40 °C, 10% to 90% Relative Humidity

Size of Receipt and Journal Tape ...... Width: 57.5 ± 0.5 mm

Thickness:

Outside dimension:

0.06 mm to 0.075 mm

83 mm or less

Recommended thermal paper: KF50 (KANZAN)

TF50KS-E2C (Nippon Paper Industries)

16- 1

2. STAND-ALONE LEVEL

EO1-11152

MA-1595-1 SERIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

1. DAILY OPERATION FLOW -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1- 1

2. MANAGER INTERVENTION------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2- 1

2.1 Items Programmed to Require Manager Interventions ------------------------------------------ 2- 1

2.2 Other Operations Required Manager Interventions ---------------------------------------------- 2- 3

3. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE --------------------------------------- 3- 1

3.1 Pick Up Operation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3- 1

3.2 Enforced Sign-OFF of a Cashier (Code Entry Method)------------------------------------------ 3- 2

3.3 Post Authorization Operation -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3- 3

3.4 EBT F/S Electronic Voucher Purchase -------------------------------------------------------------- 3- 4

3.5 EBT CASH, EBT F/S Balance Inquiry --------------------------------------------------------------- 3- 6

4. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 4- 1

4.1 Ordinary Operations In “ - ” Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------- 4- 1

4.2 Charge Posting With Customer File (Check Track Memory) In “ - ” Mode ------------------ 4- 1

4.3 Scale Item Entry In “ - ” Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4- 3

4.4 Electronic Fund Transfer (EFT) Operation In “ - “ Mode ---------------------------------------- 4- 3

4.5 Prohibitive Operations In “ - ” Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------ 4- 7

4.6 Manager Intervention Required Status or Amount Limit In “ - ” Mode------------------------ 4- 7

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS------------------------------------------------------------ 5- 1

5.1 Combination Reports ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5- 4

5.2 General Notes On Report Takings ------------------------------------------------------------------- 5- 4

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS ------------------------------------------------------------------- 6- 1

6.1 Basic Key Functions and Keyboard Variations in Programming Operations --------------- 6- 2

6.2 Character Entries ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6- 4

6.3 Condition Required for Programming Operations------------------------------------------------- 6- 8

6.4 Store Name Message and Commercial Message Programming (Submode 1) ------------ 6- 9

6.5 Cashier Code and Name Programming (Submode 2) ------------------------------------------ 6-11

6.6 PLU Table Programming (Submode 4)------------------------------------------------------------- 6-13

6.7 Time Setting or Adjustment (Submode 5)---------------------------------------------------------- 6-24

6.8 Date Setting or Adjustment (Submode 6) ---------------------------------------------------------- 6-25

6.9 Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys (Submode 8) ------------------------------------------ 6-25

6.10 Customer File Code (Check Track No.) and Name Setting (Submode 15) ---------------- 6-26

6.11 Salesperson Code and Name Programming (Submode 20) ---------------------------------- 6-28

6.12 Link-PLU Table Programming (Submode 25)----------------------------------------------------- 6-29

6.13 Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting (Submode 26) ---------------------------------- 6-30

6.14 PLU Preset-Code Key Setting (Submode 27)----------------------------------------------------- 6-32

6.15 Display Message Programming (Submode 31)--------------------------------------------------- 6-35

6.16 Negative Amount Key Limit Amount Setting (Submode 35) ----------------------------------- 6-37

6.17 PLU Price Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Amount Setting (Submode 40) ------------------ 6-38

6.18 Department Preset Price Setting or Changing ---------------------------------------------------- 6-39

6.19 PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing, Whole Package Quantity Changing -------------- 6-40

6.20 %+ and %- Preset Rate Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-41

6.21 Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers (SI1 and SI2) ------------------------------------- 6-42

6.22 Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting --------------------------------------------------------- 6-44

EO1-11152

MA-1595-1 SERIES

Page

6.23 TAX Table Setting --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-45

6.24 Store/Register No. Setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-47

7. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA----------------------------------------------------- 7- 1

7.1 Tax Calculation Test -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------7- 2

8. BAR CODE SYSTEM FOR EACH MODEL ------------------------------------------------------ 8- 1

1. DAILY OPERATION FLOW EO1-11152

1. DAILY OPERATION FLOW

1. DAILY OPERATION FLOW

The following shows the typical flow of daily operations on the ECR.

CASHIER’S OPERATIONS

(described in OPERATOR’S GUIDE)

MANAGER’S OPERATIONS OR ASSISTANCE

(described in MANAGER’S GUIDE)

Sign-ON (or Cashier Key to ON)

No-sale Receipt (to check the print condition, and check the date and time print)

(Adjust the date and time, if necessary, Chapter 6.)

(or by Manager) Loan

STORE OPEN

Sale entries start.

Sign-OUT

Sale entries.

Sign-OFF

STORE CLOSE

Sign-OFF (or Cashier Key to OFF)

Cashier

Sign-IN Sign-ON Changes

.... for breaks of the cashier, or for cashier changes

Manager Interventions when requested (for such operations as Returned Merchandise, Amount

Discount, etc. Chapter 2)

“X” report takings (sales data readings during the day. Chapter 5)

Pick Up (money collections from the ECR drawer for banking purpose, etc. Chapter 3)

Operations in “ - ” Mode (for entire-sale return or cancel. Chapter 4)

“X” report takings

“Z” report takings (Chapter 5)

OTHER OPERATIONS OUTSIDE STORE’S BUSINESS HOURS

Programming Data Additions, Deletions, Changes

Operations in Training Mode

(for practicing of new cashiers)

(Chapter 6)

Programmed Data Verification (Chapter 7)

Training mode Start and End (Operator’s Guide)

PAPER ROLL REPLACEMENT OR OTHER MAINTENANCE

(OPERATOR’S GUIDE)

1- 1

2. MANAGER INTERVENTION EO1-11152

2.1 Items Programmed to Require Manager Interventions

2. MANAGER INTERVENTION

2.1 Items Programmed to Require Manager Interventions

During daily sale entry operations, the cashier may call for Manager Interventions. The following is the operation flow of a Manager Intervention.

1) During operations, the cashier comes across an item that requires a Manager Intervention. The cashier, already informed of it, may immediately call for a Manager Intervention. Or the cashier, without knowing of it, attempts the operation, and error results with Error Message “MANAGER REQUIRED” (programmable) displayed, clears the error by the [C] key, and then calls for a Manager Intervention.

2) The manager goes to the cashier counter with the MA key.

3) The cashier explains what kind of operation is attempted, and removes the REG key from the Mode Lock at the “REG” position.

4) The manager inserts the MA key and turns it to the “MGR” position.

5) The cashier operates the required item.

6) The manager returns the MA key to the “REG” position and pulls it out.

7) The cashier sets the REG key to the “REG” position again and continues registering operations.

The following is the table of the keys and operations that are programmable with Manager Intervention. Fill in the table by marking in the “Not Required” or “Required” column of each item, referring to the documents, etc. listed in the table.

2- 1

2. MANAGER INTERVENTION EO1-11152

2.1 Items Programmed to Require Manager Interventions

KEYS/OPERATIONS AND MANAGER INTERVENTION STATUS TABLE

KEY

[DOLL DISC]

[VND CPN]

[STR CPN]

[BTL RTN]

[%-] (or [% II])

[RTN MDSE]

[VOID]

[PO]

[PB-] or [CODE OPEN]

[EX]

[NS]

As for changing the key status, ask your

TOSHIBA TEC representative.

[ALL VOID]

Credit Balance

(NOTE 1 below)

Negative-balance Sale

Finalization by Media Keys except [AT/TL] and

[FSTL TEND]

(NOTE 2)

Negative Department or negative PLU Entries

(NOTE 3)

PLU Price Read

Manager Intervention

Not required Required

Reference

These are program options for each store.

Ask your TOSHIBA TEC representative for information and these status changes.

NOTES: 1. The “Credit Balance” means that amount entries through [DOLL DISC], [VOID], [VND CPN], [STR

CPN], [BTL RTN] will result in over-subtraction of the subtotal amount at the time of the entry through any of those keys. If the status “Not required” is selected, over-subtraction using these keys will be allowed in the “REG” mode. The [RTN MDSE] key, negative departments, and negative PLUs are not subject to this “Credit Balance” status selection.

2. The “Negative-balance Sale” may be caused by:

1. Credit Balance if “Not required” is selected as the above Credit Balance status.

2. Amounts entered through the [RTN MDSE] key.

3. Amounts entered through negative departments or negative PLUs.

4. Other negative amounts.

3. The “Negative DEPTs or PLUs” are the DEPTs/PLUs programmed as negative status, but not normal DEPTs/PLUs through which Store Coupon or Returned Merchandise amounts are entered.

2- 2

2. MANAGER INTERVENTION EO1-11152

2.2 Other Operations Required Manager Interventions

2.2 Other Operations Required Manager Interventions

Listing Capacity or Amount Limit Release

Amount Limits may be programmed on Departments/PLUs, Tender Medias, [DOLL DISC], [VND CPN], [STR

CPN], [BTL RTN]. These limits are programmed to check an excessively high or low amount entry by cashier’s mistake at the earliest stage. Guide your cashiers as in the following procedure:

(1) During sale entries by the cashier, an error occurs with Error Message “OPERATION ERROR”

(programmable) is displayed.

(2) The cashier clears the error by the [C] key. The cashier confirms the amount and operates the item again.

(3) If the same error occurs again, the cashier attempts to enter the amount using the [LC OPEN] or [OPEN] key.

(4) If the operation results in an error again, the Amount Limit cannot be solved by the [LC OPEN] or [OPEN] key.

(5) The cashier calls for Manager Intervention.

The procedure thereafter is the same as Steps 2) to 7) for the ITEMS PROGRAMMED TO REQUIRE

MANAGER INTERVENTIONS (Section 2.1).

In need of information of Amount Limits, see the following:

1) Individual Department High and Low Amount Limits (each PLU is restricted by the Amount Limits of its linked department): Ask your TOSHIBA TEC representative.

2) Departments Common High and Low Amount Limits, and High Amount Limits of Tender Media keys:

Chapter 7: VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA

• FUNCTION KEYS AMOUNT LIMIT READ

3) High Amount Limits for [DOLL DISC], [VND CPN], [STR CPN], and [BTL RTN] keys:

Chapter 7: VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA

• NEGATIVE AMOUNT KEY AMOUNT LIMIT READ

4) For setting or changing the current Amount Limits, see the following:

Chapter 6: PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

• AMOUNT LIMIT SETTING FOR FUNCTION KEYS (Submode 8)

• NEGATIVE AMOUNT KEY AMOUNT LIMIT SETTING or CHANGING (Submode 35)

2- 3

3. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE EO1-11152

3.1 Pick Up Operation

3. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE

The following are operations possible only in the “MGR” position of the Mode Lock, which are performed by the manager or by a person under the manager’s control.

3.1 Pick Up Operation

This operation is used when you collect money from the ECR drawer, during the day, for the banking purpose, etc. In order to record the money amounts collected and to subtract the amounts from the In-drawer Totals memory, this operation is necessary.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale, in a Signed-ON condition.

[PO] |Media Amount Collected| [MEDIA KEY] ([ST]) [AT/TL] opens.

NOTE 1

Repeat until all the collected media amounts are recorded.

NOTES: 1. As for each media and Food Stamp, its in-drawer limit amount can be programmed. On reaching this in-drawer limit when a sale is finalized, the message “DRAWER LIMIT” (programmable) is displayed with an alarm buzzer generated to indicate that a Pick Up operation is necessary.

2. Depress the media keys or the [VND CPN] or [FSTL TEND] key corresponding to the collected media ([AT/TL] for cash). The media keys that can be operated here are those programmed to print their media-in-drawer amounts in reports.

4. During the Pick Up operation, both the Non-Add Number Print and the Validation Print are possible.

Pick Up Operation Sample:

The manager comes to the register and collects the cash amount of $300.00 from the drawer:

-- Receipt Print Format --

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

Mode Lock: MGR

(must be in a signed-ON condition)

Depress [PO].

Enter 30000, depress [AT/TL].

Depress [AT/TL].

681

∗∗ 3,&. 83

&$6+

727$/

∗∗

-21(6 70

3- 1

3. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE EO1-11152

3.2 Enforced Sign-OFF of a Cashier (Code Entry Method)

3.2 Enforced Sign-OFF of a Cashier (Code Entry Method)

Each cashier signs-ON to start operations, signs-OUT for leaving the register for a while, signs-IN when comes back, and signs-OFF to end operations (refer to the OPERATOR’S GUIDE). However, when a cashier once signed-ON and then signed-OUT for taking a break does not come back (or the cashier may have operated a

Sign-OUT by mistake instead of a Sign-OFF), the register cannot be operated. No one else can operate Sign-

OFF, either, because the same cashier must sign-IN first before Sign-OFF. In this case, the manager may operate an Enforced Sign-OFF.

CONDITION In a Signed-OUT condition

The 2-digit Cashier Code

01 to 99

The 2-digit code assigned to each cashier. As for the code opening and assigned cashier names, refer to the following:

For verifying the code and the assigned cashier’s name:

Chapter 7: VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA

• CASHIER CODE AND NAME READ

For programming or changing the cashier’s names or assigned codes:

Chapter 6: PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

• CASHIER CODE AND NAME PROGRAMMING (Submode 2)

-- Receipt Print Format --

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

∗∗ 6,*1 2 ))

-21(6

∗∗

70

3- 2

3. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE EO1-11152

3.3 Post Authorization Operation

3.3 Post Authorization Operation

This operation is used for finalizing the EFT sale transaction which was authorized on the off-line ECR.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale, In a Signed-ON condition

OPERATION

• Without Card Number Entry

[POST AUTH] Card Slide

ECR wait condition

Max. 7 digits Max. 11 characters

NOTE 1 (Omissible)

EFT terminal responds “APPROVAL” Store Receipt Print

• With Card Number Entry

[MANUAL CARD#]

Max. 25 digits

(|Expiration Date|) [#]

Max. 4 digits; MM/YY

(Omissible)

Max. 7 digits Max. 11 characters

(Omissible)

NOTES: 1. Pressing the [C] key at this point will restore the ECR to condition being ready for the [POST

AUTH] key entry.

2. Training cashiers are unacceptable to the EFT terminal.

3. Values 0 to 9 and A to Z should be used to enter the Authorization Code.

4. None of customer receipt is issued by the Post Authorization operation.

5. The Validation Print operation is not possible after performing the Post Authorization operation.

3- 3

3. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE EO1-11152

3.4 EBT F/S Electronic Voucher Purchase

3.4 EBT F/S Electronic Voucher Purchase

In this operation, a sale entry with EBT card is performed on the off-line ECR when the network is down, then the sale transaction is authorized after the network recovery. (This operation is used for the EBT food stamp.)

CONDITION Any time outside a sale, In a Signed-ON condition

OPERATION Mode Lock: MGR

• Without Card Number Entry

Key Operation

[VOUCHER AUTH]

FIU Upper Row Display

SWIPE CARD

Card Slide

Response from the EFT terminal

|Tendered Amount|

[#]

Max. 7 digits

ENT AMOUNT

ENT AUT CD

Pressing the [C] key at this point will restore the

ECR to the condition being ready for the

[VOUCHER

AUTH] key entry.

[C]

(|Authorization Code|)

Max. 11 characters

(alphanumeric characters); omissible

[#]

(|Voucher No.|)

[#]

Max. 10 digits; omissible

ENT VOUCHER#

PROCESSING

(in case of no response from EFT) or

(in case of decline)

Response from the EFT terminal

ECR prints a Store Receipt

NO RESPONS

DECLINE

APPROVED

3- 4

3. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE EO1-11152

3.4 EBT F/S Electronic Voucher Purchase

• With Card Number Entry

[MANUAL CARD#]

8 to19 digits

(|Expiration Date|) [#]

Max. 4 digits; MM/YY

(Omissible)

Max. 7 digits Max. 11 characters Max. 10 digits;

Omissible

NOTES: 1. It is possible to cancel this operation prior to the inquiry to the host (i.e. before the message

“PROCESSING” is displayed).

2. Training cashiers are unacceptable to the EFT terminal.

3. Values 0 to 9 and A to Z should be used to enter the Authorization Code.

4. None of customer receipt is issued by the EBT F/S Electronic Voucher Purchase operation.

5. The Validation Print operation is not possible after performing the EBT F/S Electronic Voucher

Purchase operation.

3- 5

3. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE EO1-11152

3.5 EBT CASH, EBT F/S Balance Inquiry

3.5 EBT CASH, EBT F/S Balance Inquiry

This operation is used for inquiring the balance to the host.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale, In a Signed-ON condition

OPERATION Mode Lock: MGR

• Without Card Number Entry

Key Operation

[BALANCE INQUIRY]

[EBT CASH] or [EBT F/S]

Card Slide

(in case of no response from EFT)

Response from the EFT terminal

Input the Pin No. from the Pin Pad

Then depress the [ENTER]

(in case of no response from EFT) or

(in case of decline)

key

Response from the EFT terminal

ECR prints a Customer Receipt

FIU Upper Row Display

BALANCE INQUIRY

SWIPE CARD

NO RESPONS

ENTER PIN#

PROCESSING

NO RESPONS

DECLINE

APPROVED

3- 6

3. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE EO1-11152

3.5 EBT CASH, EBT F/S Balance Inquiry

• With Card Number Entry

[BALANCE INQUIRY] [MANUAL CARD#] [EBT CASH] or

[EBT F/S]

|Card No.| [#]

8 to19 digits

(|Expiration Date|) [#]

Max. 4 digits; MM/YY

(omissible)

NOTES: 1. It is possible to cancel this operation prior to the inquiry to the host (i.e. before the message

“PROCESSING” is displayed).

2. Training cashiers are unacceptable to the EFT terminal.

3. None of customer receipt is issued by the EBT CASH, EBT F/S Balance Inquiry operation.

4. The Validation Print operation is not possible after performing the EBT CASH, EBT F/S Balance

Inquiry operation.

3- 7

4. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE EO1-11152

4.1 Ordinary Operations In “ - “ Mode

4. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE

Instead of using the [RTN MDSE] or [VOID] key in the “REG” or “MGR” mode for deleting individual items, the

“ - ” mode automatically processes positive items into negative and negative into positive. To operate, turn the

Mode Lock to the “ - ” position using the MA key, and enter the items, one by one, just as in the “ REG” mode, as reading the sale receipt (issued at the time of the purchase) or tracing the returned items as if in the “ REG” mode.

A positive balance resulted in the “ - ” mode indicates the amount to be paid back to the customer.

The “ - ” mode operation may occur from time to time during day, on the cashier’s request, just as in the case of ordinary Manager Interventions, when a customer comes to the cashier counter to return or cancel all the items that he once purchased. In using this mode, please be certain to read the following three cases of operation patterns. If you only turn the Mode Lock to the “ - ” position and let the cashier operate the actual item entries in this mode, you should also inform the cashier of these three cases.

4.1 Ordinary Operations In “ - ” Mode

Except those described in the next sections 4.2 to 4.4, all the sale items that were entered in “REG” or “MGR” at the time of purchase may be entered in the “ - ” mode in the same way as operated at the time of purchase.

OPERATION AND RECEIPT SAMPLE

RECEIPT ISSUED IN “REG” or “MGR” MODE RECEIPT ISSUED IN “ - ” MODE

681

9(*(7$%/(

'3

68%7/

&$6+

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

7)

7)

These two receipts contain the same sale items and media finalization. The operations are also the same except the Mode

Lock position.

The cashier merely follows the purchase receipt (on the left) and enters the same items in the position, finalizing with the same media in case a customer has returned or canceled the entire sale after the cashier had finalized that sale.

The - mode header ( * REG- * in this example ) is printed at the top and the bottom of the sale contents in the - mode receipt.

∗∗ 5(*

9(*(7$%/(

'3

7;%/ 7/

&$6+

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

∗∗

7)

7)

,7(0

-21(6 70 ,7(0

∗∗ 5(*

-21(6

∗∗

70

NOTE: When you handle a sales item of cigarette or alcoholic beverage in the “ - ” mode, the age confirmation is unnecessary.

4.2 Charge Posting With Customer File (Check Track Memory) In “ - ”

Mode

When your register adopts the Customer File Memory type (instead of the PB Manual Entry type), the previous balance entry is different from that operated in the “REG” or “MGR” mode. Due to the memory process, this special operation is required. In case a customer cancels the entire sale once purchased in the charge posting mode, please be certain to operate as instructed on next page.

4- 1

4. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE EO1-11152

4.2 Charge Posting With Customer File (Check Track Memory) In “ - “ Mode

(1) Operation in “REG” or “MGR” mode (at the purchase; refer to the OPERATOR’S GUIDE.)

|Customer File Code*| [PICK UP BAL] (or [CODE OPEN])

**

The previous balance is recalled from the customer’s file memory.

Entries of the purchased items***

(if any)

([TXBL TL]) [Chg]

****

|Payment Amount| [R/A] Finalization with Media Keys

(2) Operation in “ - ” mode (at the cancel or return of the above sale)

|Customer File Code| [PICK UP BAL] |Previous Balance| [AMT]

Equivalent to * Equivalent to **

Entries of the returned items (equivalent to ***) [Chg]

Balance Transfer or Payment operation (equivalent to ****)

NOTE: Only the previous balance that was automatically recalled from memory in the “REG” or “MGR” mode must be entered manually through the [AMT] key in the “ - ” mode. Other operations are identical to those operated in the “REG” or “MGR” mode. (Such items as %+ and %- are also operated the same as entered at the time of purchase.)

Mode Lock:

REG or MGR

3 (Cus. File Code)

(A)

[PICK UP BAL]

600 [DEPT 1]

10 [%-]

[Chg]

[TRF]

RECEIPT AT PURCHASE

681

3%

.$5(1 :$/7(56

9(*(7$%/(

7$;

&KJ

1(: %$/

,7(0

-21(6

7)

70

RECEIPT AT RETURN

681

∗∗ 5(*

3%

.$5(1 :$/7(56

9(*(7$%/(

7$;

&KJ

1(: %$/

1(: %$/

,7(0

∗∗ 5(*

-21(6

∗∗

7)

∗∗

70

Mode Lock: -

3 (Cus.File Code)

[PICK UP BAL]

636 [AMT]

Operated exactly the same as the sequence marked with

“(A)” at purchase.

The final new balance after correction in this operation (which should be equal to the balance called at the starting of the RECEIPT AT

PURCHASE).

As shown in the sample above, the previous balance $6.36 is entered manually through the [AMT] key on the right-hand side receipt, while the same previous balance is automatically recalled by merely designating the

Customer File Code through the [PICK UP BAL] key on the left-hand side receipt.

The print formats in both receipts are designed to be the same from Customer File Code down to the first “NEW

BAL” amount (resulting balance at the time of purchase.), except that the final new balance at the time of return is additionally printed (which will be the same amount of the balance before the purchase) and the “ - ” mode header is printed on the right-hand side receipt.

4- 2

4. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE EO1-11152

4.3 Scale Item Entry In “ - “ Mode

4.3 Scale Item Entry In “ - ” Mode

Any scale item entered in the “REG” or “MGR” mode at the time of purchase must be entered manually (Manual

Scale Entry but not Auto Scale) in the “ - ” mode at the time of return or cancel.

That is, for entering a scale item (once purchased) in the “ - ” mode, you must read the written net weight on the item (if any) or read the net weight in the scale display panel by placing it on the scale platter, then enter the net weight value, manually in the procedure described as MANUAL SCALE ENTRY operation in the OPERATOR’S

GUIDE.

NOTE: At the link-PLU entry, the Scale Entry can be performed for the head-link PLU but not for the sub-link

PLU.

4.4 Electronic Fund Transfer (EFT) Operation In “ - “ Mode

(1) Void Credit Sale

This operation is performed for canceling credit sale transactions.

OPERATION

Sales Item Entry

Max. 7 digits

Card Slide

EFT terminal responds “APPROVAL”

Max. 11 characters

Customer Receipt Print

Max. 16 digits

Store Receipt Print

(2) Void Credit Refund

This operation is performed for canceling credit refund transactions.

[RTN MDSE] to be continued to the top of “Void Credit Sale” sequence

NOTES: 1. Receipt post-Issue operation after finalizing a sale by the EFT is unavailable.

2. Key operation on the ECR is unavailable during the inquiry to the host.

3. Values 0 to 9 and A to Z should be used to enter the Authorization Code.

4. Issuance of the Store Receipt is selectable.

5. In the Receipt-OFF mode, payment by the EFT media cannot be made.

6. The Validation Print operation is not possible after performing the Void Credit Sale or the Void

Credit Refund operation.

(3) Cashing Debit Refund

This operation is performed for canceling debit cashing transactions.

OPERATION

| Amount to be cashed |

Max. 7 digits

[DEBIT] or

[EBT CASH]

Card Slide Input the Pin No. from the

Pin Pad. Then depress the

[ENTER] key.

EFT terminal responds “APPROVAL”. Customer Receipt Print Store Receipt Print

NOTES: 1. Before performing this operation, the [DEBIT] (or [EBT CASH]) key should be programmed with the status “no-purchase cashing is allowed”. Also each EFT Media Key should be programmed with the statuses both “with EFT process” and “off line authorization is available”. Failure to do this may cause an error.

2. For the EFT function, do not perform any registration in Receipt OFF mode.

3. Receipt post-Issue operation after the Cashing Debit Refund is unavailable.

4- 3

4. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE EO1-11152

4.5 Prohibitive Operations In “ - “ Mode

4. Key operation on the ECR is unavailable during the inquiry to the host.

5. The Endorsement Print can be performed.

6. Training Cashiers are unacceptable to the EFT terminal.

7. Issuance of the Store Receipt is selectable.

8. When manual issuance of store receipt has been programmed, the store receipt must be issued to perform next transaction or read/reset jobs.

9. The Validation Print operation is not possible.

10. EFT cashing operation with the [CREDIT], [CHECK], and [EBT F/S] keys is not possible.

4- 4

4. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE EO1-11152

4.5 Prohibitive Operations In “ - “ Mode

(4) EBT CASH, EBT F/S Return

This operation is performed for canceling EBT CASH and EBT F/S transactions.

OPERATION

Key Operation FIU Upper Row Display

Sale Entry

This operation is possible when the

[EBT F/S] key is programmed with the status “food stamp payment”.

( [TXBL TL] ) [FS TL/TEND]

(Tendered Amount)

(Max. 7 digits; Omissible if all the amount is paid, however depending on the program option.)

[EBT CASH]

|Tendered Amount|

Max. 7 digits

(Must be entered)

[EBT F/S]

SWIPE CARD

Card Slide

( [C] then depress the

) Pressing the [C] key at this point will restore the ECR to the condition being ready for the

[EBT CASH] (or [EBT F/S] ) key entry.

(in case of no response from EFT)

Response from the EFT terminal

Input the Pin No. from the Pin Pad

[ENTER]

(in case of no response from EFT) or

(in case of decline)

key.

Response from the EFT terminal

ECR prints a Customer Receipt

ECR prints a Store Receipt

NO RESPONS

ENTER PIN#

PROCESSING

NO RESPONS

DECLINE

APPROVED

4- 5

4. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE EO1-11152

4.5 Prohibitive Operations In “ - “ Mode

• Manual Entry

(when the [EBT CASH] or [EBT F/S] key has been programmed with the status “taxable total payment”.)

([TXBL TL]) Sales Entry

Max. 7 digits

(Omissible)

([EBT F/S])

8 to 19 digits

• Manual Entry

(|Expiration Date|) [#]

Max. 4 digits; MM/YY

(Omissible)

(when the [EBT F/S] key has been programmed with the status “food stamp payment”.)

Sales Entry ([FS TL/TEND]) [MANUAL CARD#] |Sale

Max. 7 digits

[EBT F/S]

8 to 19 digits

3.

4.

Contents of the customer receipt are printed on the journal, but those of the store receipt are not.

Automatic issuance or manual issuance of the store receipt is selectable by the system option setting.

(|Expiration Date|) [#]

Max. 4 digits; MM/YY

(Omissible)

NOTES: 1. Receipt post-Issue operation after finalizing a sale by the EFT is unavailable.

2. Key operation on the ECR is unavailable during the inquiry to the host.

5. Sale finalization by the EFT is possible only when the media key has been programmed with the status “EFT media” in the EFT key status setting. If not, ordinary sale finalization is performed.

6. Training cashiers are unacceptable to the EFT terminal. (Ordinary finalization operation can be performed.)

7. Issuance of the store receipt is selectable by the EFT key status setting.

8. When tendering in foreign currency, the EFT media keys are not accepted.

9. For the EFT function, do not perform any registration in Receipt OFF mode.

10. When manual issuance of store receipt has been programmed, the store receipt must be issued to perform next transaction or read/reset jobs.

11. Validation Print operation at the EBT CASH or EBT F/S Return operation is prohibited.

4- 6

4. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE EO1-11152

4.5 Prohibitive Operations In “ - “ Mode

4.5 Prohibitive Operations In “ - ” Mode

• NO-SALE ([NS])

• AUTO-SCALE (described in 4.3.)

• NO-SALE CASHING OF CHEQUE OR OTHER NON-CASH MEDIAS

• NO-SALE EXCHANGE from Foreign Currency to Domestic Currency, or vice versa

• LOAN

• PICK UP

• TRAINING MODE START/END

• ENDORSEMENT PRINT

• RECEIPT POST-ISSUE ([RECEIPT ISSUE])

4.6 Manager Intervention Required Status or Amount Limit In “ - ” Mode

Since operations in the “ - ” mode are performed under the manager’s control, the status requiring a Manager

Intervention, and Amount Limits (described in Chapter 2) will all be released, i.e., the same handling as in the

“MGR” mode.

4- 7

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS EO1-11152

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

The following table shows the key operation to take each report. The “X” and “Z” reports have exactly the same print content if both are available, except that:

1. The “X” reports allow to read the sales data but not clear memories, while the “Z” reports allow to read the sales data and at the same time all the resettable memories will be cleared when the reports have been issued.

2. The symbol “X...” is printed on the top line of a Daily Read Report, “Z...” on a Daily Reset Report, “GTX...” on a GT Read Report, and “GTZ...” on a GT Reset Report, as initial settings.

3. A reset count is printed on the bottom of a “Z” report only.

WARNING!

When opening the cash drawer, be careful not to let the drawer hit any person.

TABLE OF OPERATIONS FOR X AND Z REPORTS

Daily Reports

Report Name

FINANCIAL READ AND RESET

Financial Read

Financial Reset

CASHIER READ AND RESET

All Cashier Read

All Cashier Reset

Individual Cashier Read

Individual Cashier Reset

SALESPERSON READ AND RESET

All Salesperson Read

All Salesperson Reset

CREDIT CARD COMPANY SALES READ AND

RESET

Credit Card Company Sales Read

Credit Card Company Sales Reset

DEPARTMENT GROUP READ

MEDIA SALES AND IN-DRWER TOTAL READ

HOURLY RANGE READ AND RESET

Hourly Read

Hourly Reset

Mode

Lock

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

X

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

6 [AT/TL]

Key Operation

3 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)

4 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)

Code Entry Method:

4 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]

(2-digit manager-assign code)

Cashier Key Method:

Set the required Cashier Key (or depress the required Cashier Key), then 4 [#] [AT/TL]

5 [AT/TL]

Sample

Page

5-5

5-7

5-8

5-8

8 [AT/TL] 5-9

9 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)

10 [AT/TL]

5-10

5-10

5- 1

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

Daily Reports ( Continued )

Report Name

DEPARTMENT READ AND RESET

• Individual Department Read

• All department Read

• All department Reset

ALL MEDIA SALES TOTAL AND CASH-IN-

DRAWER READ

PLU READ AND RESET

• Individual PLU Read

• Zone PLU Read

• Zone PLU Reset

• All PLU Read

• All PLU Reset

• Inactive PLU Read

CUSTOMER FILE READ AND RESET (for

Check Track Memory type only)

• All Files Read

• All Files Reset

• Individual File Read

• Zone Files Read

• Zone Files Reset

• Zero-balance Files Read

• Credit-balance Files Read

• Debit-balance Files Read

PLU GROUP SALES READ AND RESET

• PLU Group Sales Read

• PLU Group Sales Reset

EFT MEDIA LOG READ AND RESET

• EFT Media Log Read

• EFT Media Log Reset

EO1-11152

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

X

X

Z

X

Z

Z

X

X

X

Z

X

X

X

Z

Z

X

X

X

Mode

Lock

X

Z

X

X

Key Operation

11 [#] , then depress the required Dept.

Keys (or use [DP#] key), one by one,

[ST] may be used to obtain subtotal,

[AT/TL] to end.

11 [AT/TL]

12 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)

Sample

Page

5-11

5-8

*

13 [#] |PLU Code| [PLU] ([ST] )

Repeatable

[AT/TL]

* (May be replaced by

[PLU Preset-code Key] )

13 [#] Zone-start [@/FOR] Zone-end [AT/TL]

PLU Code

13 [AT/TL]

13 [#] 0 [AT/TL]

15 [AT/TL]

45 [AT/TL]

PLU Code

15 [#] |Customer File Code| [@/FOR] [AT/TL]

15 [#] |Zone-start File Code| [@/FOR]

|Zone-end File Code| [AT/TL]

15 [#] 0 [AT/TL]

15 [#] 1 [AT/TL]

15 [#] 2 [AT/TL]

24 [AT/TL]

5-13

5-15

5-17

5-18

5- 2

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS EO1-11152

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

GT Reports -- to be taken on weekly or monthly basis --

Report Name

Mode

Lock

Key Operation

(The Mode Lock position is the same as the corresponding Daily report.

However, always add 200 to the numeric value for the report taking.)

FINANCIAL GT READ AND RESET

Financial GT Read

• Financial GT Reset

CASHIER GT READ AND RESET

X

Z

203 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)

All Cashier GT Read

All Cashier GT Reset

Individual Cashier GT Read

Individual Cashier GT Reset

X

Z

X

Z

204 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)

Code Entry Method:

204 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]

(2-digit manager-assign code)

Cashier Key Method:

Set the required Cashier Key (or depress the required Cashier Key), then 204 [#] [AT/TL]

206 [AT/TL]

CREDIT CARD COMPANY SALES GT READ

AND RESET

• Credit Card Company Sales GT Read

• Credit Card Company Sales GT Reset

DEPARTMENT GROUP GT READ

DEPARTMENT GT READ AND RESET

• Individual Department GT Read

• All Department GT Read

• All Department GT Reset

PLU READ AND RESET

• Individual PLU GT Read

• Zone PLU GT Read

• Zone PLU GT Reset

• All PLU GT Read

• All PLU GT Reset

• Inactive PLU GT Read

PLU GROUP SALES GT READ AND RESET

• PLU Group Sales GT Read

• PLU Group Sales GT Reset

X

X

Z

X

X

Z

X

X

Z

X

Z

X

X

Z

208 [AT/TL]

211 [#] , then depress the required Dept.

Keys (or use [DP#] key), one by one,

[ST] may be used to obtain subtotal,

[AT/TL] to end.

211 [AT/TL]

*

213 [#] |PLU Code| [PLU] ([ST] )

* (May be replaced by

[PLU Preset-code Key]

PLU Code

Repeatable

213 [AT/TL]

213 [#] 0 [AT/TL]

224 [AT/TL]

)

[AT/TL]

213 [#] Zone-start [@/FOR] Zone-end [AT/TL]

PLU Code

Sample

Page

5-18

5-18

5-18

5-18

5-18

5-18

5-18

5- 3

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS EO1-11152

5.1 Combination Reports

Multiple reports can be programmed to be issued in one operation sequence. The following are reports programmable for combinations (max. 5 reports in one table, max. 3 tables). Ask your TOSHIBA TEC representative for information of the contents of your Combination Report Tables or for changes.

REPORT NAME AVAILABLE REPORTS

All Cashier Report

All Salesperson Report

Credit Company Sales Report

Department Group Report

Media Sales and In-drawer Report

Hourly Range Report

All Department Report

All Media Sales & Cash-in-drawer Report

All PLU Report

All Customer Files Report

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Z

Z

Z

Z

Z

Z

GTX

GTX

GTX

GTX

GTX

GTZ

GTZ

GTZ

GTZ

KEY OPERATION: Mode Lock: X for Read

| | [AT/TL]

Z

Enter the Report Combination-ID No.:

None (simply depress [AT/TL]): Daily Combination Report Table No.1

200: GT Combination Report Table No.1

1: Daily Combination Report Table No.2

201: GT Combination Report Table No.2

2: Daily Combination Report Table No.3

202: GT Combination Report Table No.3

NOTES: 1. When the mode set for taking combination reports does not match the mode of a report contained in the table, that report will be skipped.

2. If no combination reports data have been programmed, Combination Report Table No. 1 (which is issued by depressing the [AT/TL] key alone for Daily Reports and depressing 200 [AT/TL] for GT

Reports) is auto-preset with All Department Report and Financial Report. It will be active as Table

No. 1 content unless no data are programmed for Table No. 1.

3. The report output order is determined by the order programmed in each table.

4. The drawer will open when a contained report is ruled to open the drawer.

5.2 General Notes On Report Takings

1. The cashier signed-OFF or signed-OUT condition is required for taking any Z reports in the Code Entry

Method. (Otherwise, an error will result when the Mode Lock is turned to the “X” or “Z” position.) However, in case of a standalone system with PC connected and CVS spec. selected, X/Z reports can be taken during

Sign-ON and sales entries.

2. Reset reports will be printed on the receipt roll as well as on journal, and issued, regardless of the current

Receipt-ON/OFF status.

3. The [ITEM CORR] (or [VOID]) key may be depressed halfway during printing a report, for the purpose to abort the receipt issuance (except for some short reports). When a report-abort has been operated for a reset report, the memory of the report data will not be cleared.

5- 4

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS EO1-11152

5.2 General Notes On Report Takings

4. The drawer will open at the starting of printing the reports which are stated with “(Drawer opens)” in the Daily and GT report table. However, the drawer may remain closed if so selected by a program option. This selection is applied only to the Financial Report.

5. The sales data of the following read reports will be cleared when the relevant reset reports are cleared. If those read reports are necessary, please be certain to take them before the relevant reset reports are taken:

READ REPORT

(with no reset reports provided)

RELEVANT RESET REPORT that clears the read report data

Department Group Read

Media Sales and In-drawer Total Read

All Media Sales Total and Cash-in-drawer Read

Customer File Read ... non-resettable

Inactive PLU Read

Department Group GT Read

Inactive PLU GT Read

All Department Reset

Financial Reset

Financial Reset

PLU Reset

All Department GT Reset

PLU GT Reset

6. The PLU with the Delete Status set in each PLU report is not printed/searched.

As you notice, “Financial Reset”, “All Department Reset”, and “PLU Reset” reports should be taken after all other reports (particularly read reports) on the respective levels of daily and GT, so that the required read reports data may not be cleared by those reset report takings.

FINANCIAL READ or RESET (Daily or GT)

Mode Lock: X for read Enter 3, depress [AT/TL] (for Daily)

Z for reset Enter 203, depress [AT/TL] (for GT)

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

Reset Report Format Sample

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

*7

;B),1$1&,$/

1(7 *7

*6

7$;

7$;

',6&

681

+$6+ '3

9&31

Date, Day-of Week, Store/Register No.

Report Name

Grand Total (non-resettable)

Net GT (non-resettable)

Gross Sale Item Count

& Amount

Net Sale Without Tax Item Count

& Amount

NOTES:

1. The numeric values placed in reports in this manual are merely examples to show the print format and may not balance correctly.

2. The items attached with “*” outside the receipt frame are printed only on Daily Reports but not on GT Reports.

3. The print or non-print status of each item on Financial

Reports can be programmed.

4. Non-printing of items with zero sales (i.e.,zero skip) can be programmed by a program option.

Percent Charge I, II Count & Amount

Tax 1 Amount

Manual Tax Amount

Net Sale With Tax Item Count

Tax 2 to 4 Amount

& Amount

Total of Positive Departments programmed as HASH Dept., Item Count

& Amount

Percent Discount (on Subtotal) Count

& Amount

Total of Negative Departments programmed as HASH Dept., Item Count & Amount

Vendor Coupon Count

& Amount

Dollar Discount (on Subtotal) Count

& Amount

Percent Discount II (on Subtotal) Count &

Amount if two Percent Discount keys are installed.

-- To be continued --

5- 5

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS EO1-11152

5.2 General Notes On Report Takings

(Financial Read or Reset)

-- Continued --

BTR 6

$0.35

TOTAL 71CU

$310.49

CASH 71CU

$292.77

CHECK 0CU

$5.00

FS TL 1CU

$12.72

R/A 2

$8.00

PO 8

$37.10

CASH ID $95.02

CHECK ID 2

$15.00

FS ID 1

$13.00

FS CG $0.28

CORR 1

$1.00

VOID 1

$1.00

ALL VD 2

$8.60

%- 11

$2.02

DISC 4

$2.00

S. CPN 2

$1.00

-DP TL 1

$1.00

RTN 4

$3.80

-TAX $0.22

-SALE 4CU

$5.37

REG- 2

$7.95

TRF TL $0.03

TRF-GT $0.03

TRF- $0.03

PB TL 1CU

$0.00

TXBL1 $284.98

TXBL2 $58.20

SI1 TL 2

$1.40

TAX EX 1CU

TAX1 EX $10.00

CUR 1 3

150.00

CUR 2 1

5.68

CUR 3 1

1.45

CUR RND 18.00

ITEM/CUS 1.58

NS/CUS $4.23

NO SALE 3

VALI CTR 3

HOLD CTR 1

0001Z

Bottle Return Item Count

& Amount

All-media Sales (including CASH, FS TL, and PB TL)

Customer Count & Amount

Cash Sales

Customer Count & Amount

Check Sales

Customer Count & Amount

Food Stamp Sales

Customer Count & Amount

Received-on-Account Count

& Amount

Paid-Out Count

& Amount

Cash-in-drawer Amount

Check-in-drawer Count

& Amount

Food Stamp-in-drawer Count

& Amount

Food Stamp Change Amount

Item Correct (on positive Depts/PLUs) Count

& Amount

Void Count

& Amount

All Void Count

& Amount

Percent Discount (on Line Items) Count

& Amount

Dollar Discount (on Line Items) Count

& Amount

Store Coupon Item Count

& Amount

Negative Departments Item Count

& Amount

Returned Merchandise Item Count

& Amount

Negative Tax Amount

Negative-balance Sales

Customer Count & Amount

Negative Mode (“ - “ Mode) Count

& Amount

Transfer GT Balance

Transfer - GT

Transfer - Daily

Previous Balance Sales

Customer Count & Amount

Taxable Total 1 (Sale Amount Portion subject to Tax 1 taxation)

Taxable Total 2 (Sale Amount Portion subject to Tax 2 taxation)

Selective Itemizer 1 Count

& Amount calculated out or processed

Tax Exempted Customer Count

Sale Portion Exempted from Tax 1

Additional Media (MISC, CREDIT, DEBIT, etc.) Sales data, if any

Loan Amount, Pick Up Count & Amount

Additional Media-in-drawer data, if any

Miscellaneous Void Count & Amount

Percent Discount II (on Line Items) Count &

Amount if two Percent Discount keys are installed.

Transfer + GT

Transfer + Daily

Previous Balance R/A, PO Amount

Taxable Total 3, 4

Selective Itemizer 2 Count & Amount

The amounts are expressed in the respective currencies’ unit

Sales Portion Exempted from Tax 2 to 4

FS EX1 to FS EX4 for Taxes exempted by tendering food stamps if ILLINOIS or NEW

JERSEY type of food stamp system

Foreign Currency Rounding Amount

Sales Item Count per Customer

Net Sale Amount per Customer

No-sale Count

Validation Count

HOLD Operation Count

Financial Reset Report Count (on Reset Reports only)

Foreign Currencies 4 & 5-in-drawer data if opened.

Off-line EFT Authorization Count &

Amount (for EFT spec.)

5- 6

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS EO1-11152

5.2 General Notes On Report Takings

CASHIER READ or RESET (Daily or GT)

Reset Report Format Sample

Mode Lock: X for read

Z for reset

1343 PEACH DRIVE

PHONE: 87-6437

Open 8:00am to 7:00pm

Closed: every Wednesday

08-31-2003 SUN #3001

Z_CLERK

GT

01 JONES

GS 125

$346.77

NS 112

$300.48

(1) All Cashiers:

Enter 4, depress [AT/TL] (for Daily).

Enter 204, depress [AT/TL] (for GT).

(2) Individual Cashier:

Enter 4, depress [#] , enter the Cashier ID Code (2 digits), and depress [AT/TL] (CODE ENTRY Method) (for Daily)

Set the required Cashier Key to ON, enter 4, depress [#] and [AT/TL]

(CASHIER KEY Method) (for Daily)

Enter 204, depress [#] , enter the Cashier ID Code (2 digits), and depress [AT/TL] (CODE ENTRY Method) (for GT)

Set the required Cashier Key to ON, enter 204, depress [#] and

[AT/TL] (CASHIER KEY Method) (for GT)

ITEM/CUS 1.56

NS /CUS $4.17

NO SALE 2

VALI CTR 3

HOLD CTR 1

0001Z

02 SMITH

∗ TRAINING ∗ ∗

03 MEHL

∗ TRAINING ∗ ∗

04 BROWN

GS 9

$22.80

NS 9

$21.50

TAX1 $1.30

NS 9

$22.80

TOTAL 5CU

CASH $22.80

$22.80

CASH ID $22.80

TXBL1 $21.50

ITEM/CUS 1.80

NS /CUS $4.30

0001Z

0261 18:58TM

In CASHIER SIGNING Method, the ID code here is the 2-digit manager-assign portion of the Cashier Code

Cashier ID Code & Cashier’s Name

Same contents as Financial Reports except for GT and NET GT

Individual Cashier Reset Report Count (on Reset Reports only)

5- 7

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS EO1-11152

5.2 General Notes On Report Takings

SALESPERSON READ OR RESET

(all Salespersons)

Reset Report Sample

Mode Lock: X for read Enter 5, depress

CREDIT CARD COMPANY SALES READ OR

RESET (Daily or GT)

Reset Report Sample

Mode Lock: X for read Enter 6, depress [AT/TL]

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

=B6/63(5621

6WDF\

571

=

70

ALL MEDIA SALES TOTAL AND

CASH-IN-DRAWER READ

(read only)

Mode Lock: X, enter 12, depress [AT/TL]

Person Code, Name

Gross Sale Item Count

& Amount

Net Sale Without Tax

Item Count & Amount

Net Sale With Tax

Item Count & Amount

Returned Item Count

& Amount

All Salesperson Reset Report

Count (on Reset Reports only)

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

;B0(',$

727$/ &8

&$6+ ,'

All Media Sales Total

Customer Count, Amount

Cash-in-drawer Amount

70

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

=B&5(',7

$%&

727$/

=

Enter 206, depress [AT/TL]

(for GT)

70

Company Code, Name,

Count & Sales Amount

Total of all card Companies’ sales (Item Count & Amount)

Credit Card Co.Sales Reset

Report Count (on Reset

Reports only)

5- 8

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

DEPARTMENT GROUP READ (Daily or GT)

(read only)

Mode Lock: X

Enter 8, depress [AT/TL] (for Daily).

Enter 208, depress [AT/TL] (for GT).

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

; '3 *5283

9( )5

727$/

727$/

Minor Groups:

Group Name, Item Count

Sales Percentage & Amount

Item Count

Amount

Total of all Minor Groups

Major Groups:

Item Count

Amount

Total of all Major Groups

70

EO1-11152

5.2 General Notes On Report Takings

5- 9

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS EO1-11152

5.2 General Notes On Report Takings

MEDIA SALES AND IN-DRAWER

TOTAL READ

(read only)

Mode Lock: X, enter 9, depress [AT/TL]

&85

&85

&KJ

)6 7/

&$6+ ,'

&+(&. ,'

&KJ ,'

)6 ,'

)6 &*

3% 7/

&85

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

;B0(',$B$//

727$/ &8

&$6+

&+(&.

&8

&8

&8

&8

&8

70

HOURLY RANGE READ or RESET

Reset Report Sample

Mode Lock: X for read

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

Enter 10, depress

All Media Sales

Customer Count

& Amount

Each Media Sales

Cus, Count & Amount

Each Media-in-drawer

Count & Amount

Food Stamp Change

Previous Balance Sales

Cus. Count & Amount

Each Foreign Currency-in-

drawer Count & Amount

681

=B+285/<

70

70

70

&8

70

=

70

8:01 to 12:00

12:01 to 15:00

15:01 to 19:00 Item Count

Customer Count & Amount

19:01 and thereafter

Hourly Range Reset Report

Count (on Reset Reports only)

5-10

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS EO1-11152

5.2 General Notes On Report Takings

DEPARTMENT READ or RESET

Individual Department Read (Daily or GT)

Operation for this sample report:

Mode Lock: X

11 [#] (for Daily)

211 [#] (for GT)

[DEPT: VEGETABLE]

[DEPT: FRUIT]

[ST]

[AT/TL]

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

Mode Lock: X

Enter 11 and depress [#] for Daily Report, or

Enter 211 and depress [#] for GT Report

Depress the required Dept Keys (or enter the required

Dept Code and depress [DP#]), repeat this for other required DEPTs, depress [ST] if subtotal is necessary, depress [AT/TL] to end reading.

;B'3B,1',9

9(*(7$%/(

',6&

571

6&31

&255

5(*

)58,7

',6&

571

6&31

&255

5(*

68%7/

727$/

70

Department Name,

Item Count

Customer Count (or Sales Percentage: NOTE ), Amount

Dollar Discount or %-

Count & Amount

Return Merchandise Item

Count & Amount

Store Coupon Item

Count & Amount

Item Correct/Void

Count & Amount

Negative Mode

Count & Amount

The print or non-print status of each item is selected in a programming operation.

Item Count Subtotal of VEGETABLE + FRUIT

Amount

Item Count Total of all departments

Amount read in this report

When there is any

Negative Department

Subtotal value, its Item

Count & Amount is printed here.

When there is any Negative Department

Total value, its Item Count & Amount is printed here.

NOTE: A program option allows to select which of Customer Count and Sales Percentage is printed here.

5-11

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS EO1-11152

5.2 General Notes On Report Takings

All Department Read or Reset (Daily or GT)

Reset Report Sample

Mode Lock: X for read

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

=B'3B$//

9(*(7$%/(

',6&

571

&255

5(*

',6&

571

&255

5(*

681

6&31

6&31

727$/

727$/

Department Data

Dept. 1 Name

Item Count

Customer Count (or Sales %), Amount

Dollar Disc. or %- Count

& Amount

Returned Merchandise Item Count

& Amount

Store Coupon Count

& Amount

Item Correct/Void Count

& Amount

Negative Mode Count

& Amount

Dept. 15 Data:

Item Count of positive departments

Amount

Item Count of negative departments

Amount

Enter 11, depress [AT/TL] (for Daily).

Enter 211, depress [AT/TL] (for GT).

5-12

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS EO1-11152

5.2 General Notes On Report Takings

PLU (PLU SALES DATA) READ or RESET

Individual PLU Read (Daily or GT)

Mode Lock: X

Enter 13 [#] for Daily Report, or Enter 213 [#] for GT Report.

Enter the PLU code, depress [PLU]. (Repeat this step if necessary.)

Depress [ST] for subtotal.

Depress [AT/TL] to end.

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

/HPRQ

$SSOH

68%7/

727$/

OPERATION FOR THIS SAMPLE REPORT:

Mode Lock: X

13 [#]

20102 [PLU]

20105 [PLU]

[ST] to obtain subtotal of the above two PLUs.

[AT/TL] to end

70

Zone PLU Read or Reset (Daily or GT)

Mode Lock: X or Z

Enter 13 [#] for Daily Report, or Enter 213 [#] for GT Report.

Enter the zone-start PLU code, depress [@/FOR].

Then enter the zone-end PLU code, depress [AT/TL].

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

;B3/8B=21(

!

6PDOO%WO 'HSR

727$/

For this sample

Mode Lock: X or Z

13 [#] (for Daily)

100000 [@/FOR]

199999 [AT/TL]

Zone-start PLU Code -> Zone-end PLU Code

PLU Code

PLU Name

Item Count, Amount

Item Count, Amount of Total of all PLUs read in this report

70

NOTES: In Zone PLU Read Reports:

• PLUs of zero sale will be skipped.

• PLUs not existing in the PLU Program File memory will not be printed in reports (in any reports).

5-13

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS EO1-11152

5.2 General Notes On Report Takings

All PLU Read or Reset (Daily or GT)

Reset Report Sample

Mode Lock: X or Z

13 [AT/TL] (for Daily), or 213 [AT/TL] (for GT)

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

7RPDWR

/HPRQ

0LON/DUJH 3DFN

&KHHVH+DOI 3FN

(JJ 3DFN

+DOI 5ROOV

7XQD &DQ

6RXS &DQ

.LZL -DP

'ULQN 6PDOO$

6PDOO%WO 'HSR

727$/

=

70

INACTIVE PLU READ (Daily or GT)

(read only)

Mode Lock: X

13 [#] (Daily), or 213 [#] (GT).

Print data in order from lower to larger numbered

PLU Code.

PLU Code 10101

Name “Tomato”

Item Count, Amount

NOTE:

When a scaled item is entered, the item count “1” is processed into the Total Item

Count of all the PLUs to be printed at the bottom, regardless of its actual weight volume.

PLU Code 101301

Total Item Count and Amount of all the PLUs

PLU Reset Report Count

(on Reset Reports only)

Enter 0 (zero), depress [AT/TL].

3RWDWR

2UDQJH

$SSOH

%HHI

3RUN

0XWWRQ

6DOPRQ

&RG

6KULPS

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

0LON6PDOO 3DFN

70

PLU Code

Name

5-14

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS EO1-11152

5.2 General Notes On Report Takings

CUSTOMER FILE READ or RESET

(for Check Track Memory Type only)

All Files (with balance remaining) Read or Reset

Mode Lock: X or Z

Enter 15, depress [AT/TL]

Zone Files Read or Reset

Mode Lock: X or Z

Enter 15, depress [#].

Enter the zone-start File Code, depress [@/FOR].

Then enter the zone-end File Code, depress [AT/TL].

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681 681

;B&867B$//

-$0(6 +$,/<

70

Customer’s Name

File Code

Balance

;B&867B=21(

!

-$0(6 +$,/<

Zone-start File Code->

Zone-end File Code

Customer’s Name

File Code

(In this case, this is the only Balance file with any balance (In this case, there is only remaining.)

70 one file with a balance in the designated zone.)

Individual Files Read

Mode Lock: X

Enter 15, depress [#].

Enter the required File Code, depress [@/FOR].

Depress [AT/TL] to end.

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

+(/(1 5((' Customer’s Name

File Code

Balance

70

Zero-balance Files Read

Mode Lock: X

Enter 15, depress [#].

Enter 0 (zero), depress [AT/TL].

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

;B&867B=(52

+(/(1 5(('

70

Customer’s Name

File Code

5-15

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS EO1-11152

5.2 General Notes On Report Takings

Credit-balance Files Read

Mode Lock: X

Enter 15, depress [#].

Enter 1, depress [AT/TL].

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

;B&867B&5('

-$0(6 +$,/<

Debit-balance Files Read

Mode Lock: X

Enter 15, depress [#].

Enter 2, depress [AT/TL].

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

Customer’s Name

File Code

Balance

70

In this case no debit-balance files are found at present.

70

NOTE: The program option allows you to select that data concerning the Previous Balance provided to the daily/GT financial memory (TRF TL, TRF + GT, TRF - GT, TRF +, TRF -, PB TL, PB R/A and PB PO) is all reset to zero on taking the All Customer Files Reset report.

5-16

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS

PLU GROUP SALES READ or RESET (Daily or GT)

Reset Report Format Sample

Mode Lock: X for read

Z for reset

Enter 24, depress

Enter 224, depress

TEC STORE

1343 PEACH DRIVE

PHONE: 87-6437

Open 8:00am to 7:00pm

Closed: every Wednesday

08-31-2003 SUN #3001

Z_PLU_GROUP

VEGETABLE

4

3.22% $1.50

MEAD & DAIRY

15

75.75% $35.30

BAKERY

1

1.72% $0.80

CAN & BTL FOOD

17

16.31% $7.60

DRINK

2

2.58% $1.20

BTL DEPO

4

0.43% $0.20

TOTAL 43

$46.60

0001Z

0390 09:18TM

[AT/TL] (for Daily)

[AT/TL] (for GT)

PLU Group Name

Item Count

Sales Percentage, Amount

PLU Group Sales Reset Report Count (on Reset Reports only)

EO1-11152

5.2 General Notes On Report Takings

5-17

5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS EO1-11152

5.2 General Notes On Report Takings

EFT MEDIA LOG READ or RESET

This report can be taken when the connection of the EFT terminal has been programmed.

Mode Lock: X for read

Z for reset

Enter 45, depress

TEC STORE

1343 PEACH DRIVE

PHONE: 87-6437

Open 8:00am to 7:00pm

Closed: every Wednesday

08-31-2003 SUN #3001

X_MEDIA _LOG

2 $252.23 3

3 $62.00 2

4 $74.62 2

5 $0.00 0

6 $0.00 0

7 $0.00 0

8 $0.00 0

9 $102.60 6

10 $24.12 3

11 $82.56 5

99 $598.13 21

0393 19:42TM

[AT/TL]

AMEX (Amount, Count)

VISA (Amount, Count)

Master Card (Amount, Count)

Discover (Amount, Count)

Private Label (Amount, Count)

Diner’s Club or Carte Blanche (Amount, Count)

JCB (Amount, Count)

Debit (Amount, Count)

EBT F/S (Amount, Count)

EBT CASH (Amount, Count)

Total for all card types (Amount, Count)

GT REPORTS

The print form and items of a GT report are the same as those of its corresponding daily report, except the report header portion. Please also note that some items provided in the daily report are not provided in its GT reports.

The counters and totals in a GT report are records accumulated for a certain period (week, month, etc.) while those counters and totals in the daily report are usually records for a day. The accumulated record data in each

GT report will be renewed when its GTZ report has been taken.

Header Example

Z_DP_ALL

All Department Read Report (Daily)

GTX_DP_ALL

All Department GT Read Report

5-18

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

This chapter is provided for the store programmer or the store manager who may have to change the programmed data of the ECR on the daily, weekly, or monthly basis. Usually, all the basic program data required for your store should be set before delivering the product by your local TOSHIBA TEC representative. However, in need of changing or adding program data, please refer to this chapter. It is also recommended to read the

OPERATOR’S GUIDE as well as other chapters of the MANAGER’S GUIDE in order to thoroughly understand the descriptions in this chapter. If there are any unclear points or program data other than listed here must be changed or added, please contact your TOSHIBA TEC representative.

TABLE OF PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

(Page)

Basic Key Functions and Keyboard Variations in Programming Operations ...................................................... 6- 2

Character Entries ................................................................................................................................................. 6- 4

Condition Required for Programming Operations ............................................................................................... 6- 8

Submode No. 1: Store Name Message and Commercial Message Programming ......................................... 6- 9

Submode No. 2: Cashier Code and Name Programming ............................................................................... 6-11

Submode No. 4: PLU Table Programming ..................................................................................................... 6-13

Submode No. 5: Time Setting or Adjustment .................................................................................................. 6-24

Submode No. 6: Date Setting or Adjustment .................................................................................................. 6-25

Submode No. 8: Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys ............................................................................... 6-25

Submode No. 15: Customer File Code (Check Track No.) and Name Setting ................................................. 6-26

Submode No. 20: Salesperson Code and Name Programming ....................................................................... 6-28

Submode No. 25: Link-PLU Table Programming .............................................................................................. 6-29

Submode No. 26: Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting ....................................................................... 6-30

Submode No. 27: PLU Preset-Code Key Setting ............................................................................................. 6-32

Submode No. 31: Display Message Programming ........................................................................................... 6-35

Submode No. 35: Negative Amount Key Limit Amount Setting ........................................................................ 6-37

Submode No.40: PLU Price Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Amount Setting ................................................... 6-38

No Submode No.: Department Preset Price Setting or Changing ..................................................................... 6-39

PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing, Whole Package Quantity Changing ...................... 6-40

%+ and %- Preset Rate Setting ........................................................................................... 6-41

Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers (SI1 and SI2) ................................................... 6-42

Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting ........................................................................... 6-44

Store/Register No. Setting ................................................................................................... 6-47

6- 1

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.1 Basic Key Functions and Keyboard Variations in Programming Operations

6.1 Basic Key Functions and Keyboard Variations in Programming

Operations

6.1.1 Basic Key Functions

1. The following are main keys and their functions to be used in programming operations:

[@/FOR] (or [X]) ------------------------- Used to enter the program Submode No. (NOTE below)

[ST] or [NS] ------------------------------- Used to enter the Address No. or Item Code. Also used to end the item data entry.

[#] -------------------------------------------- Used to enter data for the address or item. Each character also entered through this key.

[ITEM CORR] ----------------------------- When you enter incorrect settings, depressing this key can return the display to the previous item setting.

[AT/TL] ------------------------------------- Used to end the entire program Submode sequence.

NOTE: Regarding programming operations in this chapter, the [X] key instead of the [@/FOR] key is shown.

2. Function of the [C] key:

ù

When an entered program data is already printed, the [C] key cannot clear if any longer.

To correct the data, re-enter it.

ù Before the entered data is printed, the data may be cleared by the [C] key (except in the

SFKC Programming Operation).

3. To clarify the operation flow, definitions of keys of the ECR keyboard are as shown below.

| | --------- Selective numeric value which is entered through the Numeric keys.

[ ]---------- Depression of the function key.

xxxx ------------ Fixed numeric value which is entered through the Numeric keys.

Fixed

6.1.2 Keyboard Variations in Programming Operations

This ECR provides several keyboards for programming operations. Depending on which keyboard is used, the key layout and the character entry method will vary.

Case 1: When the ECR Keyboard is Ordinary Type (Stroke-key Type)

1-1 When the Ordinary keyboard alone is used for programming, follow the instructions as they are described in this manual. For character settings, use the CHARACTER CODE TABLE (later stated).

None of the DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY methods are possible.

1-2 When the PLU Keyboard PK-2 (hardware option) is connected:

1) Character Keys provided on the PK-2 Character Setting Sheet may be used to directly enter the characters (DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY method). Any characters not provided there (and those provided as well) may be entered, in the CHARACTER CODE ENTRY method, through the Numeric

Keys and the [#] key on the ECR keyboard.

6- 2

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.1 Basic Key Functions and Keyboard Variations in Programming Operations

2) All Function keys ([C], [@/FOR], [ST], [AT/TL], [DP#], etc.) must be operated on the ECR keyboard.

3) In the following operations, however, the Character Setting Sheet should be removed and the keys on the PK-2 are used as PLU Preset-code Keys:

• PLU PRESET-CODE KEY SETTING (Submode 27 in this chapter)

Case 2: When the ECR Keyboard is Flat Keyboard Type:

The Flat Keyboard will be set with the “Setting Mode Key Layout” in the programming operations including character entries. On this keyboard, functions and locations of keys required in various programming operations are fixed. Characters on the key sheet can be entered directly through this keyboard. The

Character Code Entry method is also allowed.

NOTE: If an option keyboard (PK-2) is connected, the DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY method is allowed through both the ECR keyboard and the option keyboard.

6- 3

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.2 Character Entries

As already stated, there are two methods of operations for character settings for names or messages:

CHARACTER CODE ENTRY Method and DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY Method.

CHARACTER CODE ENTRY Method

This method is to set a character by entering a Character Code and depressing the [#] key. This method is allowed in either of Case 1 and Case 2, but is operated only on the ECR keyboard (Ordinary Type or Flat

Type).

DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY Method

This method is to set a character by directly depressing the Character Key on any of the following keyboard:

• Flat Keyboard (ECR Keyboard Flat Type) with “Setting Mode Key Layout” sheet

(refer to Case 2)

• PK-2 Keyboard (PLU Keyboard; hardware option)

By using those character keys, the characters are directly entered. In this manual, sample operations are attached to most of the programming operations. And at name or message programming portions, characters are entered by the CHARACTER CODE ENTRY method. Instead of this, you may depress the Character

Keys. For example, instead of entering 401 [#] (to enter character “A”), you may simply depress Character

Key “A” on any of the above three keyboards.

On the following pages, Character Code Tables under the CHARACTER CODE ENTRY Method and three different keyboards under the DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY Method are shown. These pages are to be referred to, every time the “Character Entries” sequence is contained in various programming operations in this manual.

Read through these pages at least once first, so that you may know the appropriate method of character entries using the ECR keyboard and/or option keyboards.

6- 4

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS

6.2.1 Character Code Entry Method

Character Code Table 1: Standard Characters

EO1-11152

6.2 Character Entries

Row

Code

00 SP 0 @ P ` p

01

! 1 A Q a q

02

" 2 B R b r

03 # 3 C S c s

04 $ 4 D T d t

05 % 5 E U e u

06 & 6 F V f v

07 ' 7 G W g w

08 ( 8 H X h x

¼ „

á Å \

•

é å

í Ø

ó ø

, ú Æ ½

• â æ

Ä ê Œ

Ë î œ

Ö ô

¼

Ì

‘

Kg

09 ) 9 I Y i y Ü û ¢ lb

10 * : J Z j z

11 + ; K [ k {

12 , < L ¥ l |

13 - = M ] m }

14 . > N ^ n ¯

É à £

ä è

-

ë ì

™

ï ç

÷

ö Ñ

F

No

X

V

U

15 / ? O _ o ü ñ

NOTE: Characters of those character codes 1007, 1206, 1207, 1211, 1500 through 1503, and 1506 through

1514 cannot be printed on the slip printer.

6- 5

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.2 Character Entries

Character Setting Operations

• To set a regular-sized character, enter the COL (column) code and then the ROW code, followed by the

[#] key. ex.) To set “%”, enter 205 and depress [#].

To set “kg” enter 1508, and depress [#].

• To set a blank instead of a character, simply depress [#] without a prior entry, or enter 200 and depress

[#].

• Depress the [@/FOR] key once prior to regular-sized character entry, and it will be a double-sized character (a blank will also be double-sized). ex.) To set “GROUP”, “G” in double-sized, and “ROUP” in regular-sized:

500 [#]

• Depress the [@/FOR] key twice prior to the first character code entry to set the entire message line or enter name will all double-sized characters. ex.) To set “GROUP” all in double-sized:

To set “Drink”, all in double-sized;

All Double-sized Declaration

6.2.2 Direct Character Entry Method

Using Flat Keyboard (installed as the ECR Main Keyboard):

-- Setting Mode Key Layout --

(Use the special template for this purpose and insert it between the film layers covering the flat keyboard.

This key layout is applicable to only certain submodes.)

Z X C V B N M , . /

ALL

VOID q w e r t y u i o p C z x c v b n m - ? – 4 5 6

1 2 3 ST

Character Key in Programming Function key in programming

Character Keys: Simply depress the key to enter the character. (The [#] key should not follow.) Then numerics

1 to 0 are entered as characters 1 to 0 but not as codes for PLU Item Codes, etc.

Function Keys: These are function keys to be used in programming operations with the Setting Mode Key

Layout. The numeric Keys here are used to enter PLU Codes, etc. or numeric values as program data, but not to enter the numerics as characters.

6- 6

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.2 Character Entries

Using PK-2 (PLU Keyboard; hardware option)

The PK-2 is used to enter a required PLU code by simply depressing the code-preset key on the PK-2 keyboard in the “REG” or “MGR” mode. In addition, the PK-2 can be used to enter characters directly during the programming operations that require character settings, such as STORE NAME/MESSAGE AND

COMMERCIAL MESSAGE PROGRAMMING, DEPARTMENT TABLE PROGRAMMING, etc.

The figure below shows the key indications of the PK-2 keyboard for the character setting purpose.

Insert the template for this purpose between the film layers that cover the PK-2 keyboard.

Instead of entering a 3 or 4 digit character code and depressing the [#] key on the ECR keyboard, a simple depression of the appropriate key on the PK-2 keyboard will be the character entry.

All the function keys, such as [@/FOR], [ST], [#]. [AT/TL], etc. must be operated on the ECR side. Any characters not listed on the template may be entered by the CHARACTER CODE ENTRY method on the ECR keyboard (the characters even listed on the template may be entered as well by that method).

Please note also that the keys “0” to “9” in the figure below function as character keys but do not function for code entries. Any code entries, for Menu Item Codes, Address Nos, etc. must be entered through the

Numeric Keys on the ECR keyboard.

The One Double-size Declaration (by depressing the [@/FOR] key once prior to the required character) and the All Double-sized Declaration (by depressing [@/FOR] twice before all the characters) are the same as in the CHARACTER CODE ENTRY method.

7 8 9

4 5 6

! @ # $ % ¢ & * ( ) 0 q w e r t y u i o P ~ ^

a s d f g h j k l " _ +

z x c v b n m ' - =

Q W E R T Y U I O P [ ]

A S D F G H J K L ; : ,

Z X C V B N M space . / ?

6- 7

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.3 Condition Required for Programming Operations

6.3 Condition Required for Programming Operations

“CONDITION” is given at the top of each programming operation. The ECR must satisfy this condition to perform programming operations.

There are two types of conditions:

“Any time outside a sale”

It means that the programming operation is allowed when a sale is finalized before going into any other sale entry.

“After------ reset”

It means that the designated reset report must be taken before entering the programming operation.

And an error will result if the operation is attempted without taking the report. However, the words “After ...

Reset” do not necessarily mean “immediately after ...”.

When the designated reset report has already been taken and then some operations are performed in the SET,

X, or Z mode, the condition “After ... Reset” is still satisfied and the programming operation is still allowed.

On the contrary, when the designated reset report has been taken but then some sales data relating to that report’s output data are entered in the REG, MGR, or - mode, the programming operation will no longer be allowed and the same reset report must be taken.

Thus the condition “After ... Reset” indicates that all the sales data relating to the report data must be zero

(except non-resettable memory data). Because of this “CONDITION” requirement, the report data will be protected from any inconsistencies of sales data entered in the period from a resetting of the report to another resetting of the same report next time.

6- 8

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.4 Store Name Message and Commercial Message Programming (Submode 1)

6.4 Store Name Message and Commercial Message Programming

(Submode 1)

Store Name Message and Commercial Message to be printed on the receipt can be programmed here.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

Repeat for another line.

1 digit (1 to 7)

1 to 4: Store Name Message

5 to 7: Commercial Message

(For sequentially programming lines, the line number specification can be skipped.)

Character Entries [ST] [AT/TL]

Max. 32 characters/line

(See Section 6.2 Character

Entries.)

To complete this line. To complete this programming operation.

NOTES: 1. For each line, a maximum of 32 regular-sized characters or 16 double-sized characters can be entered. A combination of both types is also available.

2. When blanks are entered for the whole one line, it results in one line feed.

3. If no commercial message is required on the receipt, program blanks for all three lines. As a result no extra lines will be fed. If any one of the three lines is programmed, the two other lines will cause line feeds.

4. The 4-line range assigned for the store name/message will be either printed or fed, regardless of any system option selection.

5. If any incorrect characters have been programmed, depress the [C] key to clear all the characters on a line and then re-enter characters from the beginning, or end the line with an [ST] and re-program the entire line. The new data will be active.

6. When all the lines have been programmed, do a check by issuing a receipt. Only the lines with errors need to be re-programmed; other lines will not be affected.

Example)

To program the following Store Message and Commercial Message

E T

P - e : 7

C l o s e d : e v e r y W e d n e s d a y

Line No. 1

Line No. 2

Line No. 3

Line No. 4

Line No. 5

Line No. 6

Line No. 7

Store Name/Message portion

Commercial Message portion

6- 9

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.4 Store Name Message and Commercial Message Programming (Submode 1)

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 1 and depress the [X] key.

1 [ST] (Line No. 1)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[X] [5] [0] [4] [#] (T )

[X] [4] [0] [5] [#] (E )

[X] [4] [0] [3] [#] (C )

[X] [#] (Space)

[X] [5] [0] [3] [#] (S )

[X] [5] [0] [4] [#] (T )

[X] [4] [1] [5] [#] (O )

[X] [5] [0] [2] [#] (R )

[X] [4] [0] [5] [#] (E )

[ST] (to complete Line 1)

2 [ST] (Line No. 2)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[3] [0] [1] [#] (1)

[3] [0] [3] [#] (3)

[3] [0] [4] [#] (4)

[3] [0] [3] [#] (3)

[#] (Space)

[5] [0] [0] [#] (P)

[4] [0] [8] [#] (H)

[4] [1] [5] [#] (O)

[4] [1] [4] [#] (N)

[4] [0] [5] [#] (E)

[3] [1] [0] [#] (:)

[#] (Space)

[3] [0] [8] [#] (8)

[3] [0] [7] [#] (7)

[2] [1] [3] [#] (-)

[3] [0] [6] [#] (6)

[3] [0] [4] [#] (4)

[3] [0] [3] [#] (3)

[3] [0] [7] [#] (7)

[ST] (to complete Line 3)

5 [ST] (Line No. 5)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[4] [1] [5] [#] (O)

[7] [0] [0] [#] (p)

[6] [0] [5] [#] (e)

[6] [1] [4] [#] (n)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[3] [0] [8] [#] (8)

[3] [1] [0] [#] (:)

[3] [0] [0] [#] (0)

[3] [0] [0] [#] (0)

[6] [0] [1] [#] (a)

[6] [1] [3] [#] (m)

[#] (Space)

[4] [0] [5] [#] (E)

[4] [0] [1] [#] (A)

[4] [0] [3] [#] (C)

[4] [0] [8] [#] (H)

[#] (Space)

[4] [0] [4] [#] (D)

[5] [0] [2] [#] (R)

[4] [0] [9] [#] (I)

[5] [0] [6] [#] (V)

[4] [0] [5] [#] (E)

[ST] (to complete Line 2)

3 [ST] (Line No. 3)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[5] [0] [0] [#] (P)

[7] [0] [4] [#] (t)

[6] [1] [5] [#] (o)

[#] (Space)

[3] [0] [7] [#] (7)

[3] [1] [0] [#] (:)

[3] [0] [0] [#] (0)

[3] [0] [0] [#] (0)

[7] [0] [0] [#] (p)

[6] [1] [3] [#] (m)

[ST] (to complete Line 5)

6 [ST] (Line No. 6)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[4] [0] [3] [#] (C)

[6] [1] [2] [#] (l)

[6] [1] [5] [#] (o)

[7] [0] [3] [#] (s)

[6] [0] [5] [#] (e)

[6] [0] [4] [#] (d)

[3] [1] [0] [#] (:)

[#] (Space)

[6] [0] [5] [#] (e)

[7] [0] [6] [#] (v)

[6] [0] [5] [#] (e)

[7] [0] [2] [#] (r)

[7] [0] [9] [#] (y)

[#] (Space)

[5] [0] [7] [#] (W)

[6] [0] [5] [#] (e)

[6] [0] [4] [#] (d)

[6] [1] [4] [#] (n)

[6] [0] [5] [#] (e)

[7] [0] [3] [#] (s)

[6] [0] [4] [#] (d)

[6] [0] [1] [#] (a)

[7] [0] [9] [#] (y)

[ST] (to complete Line 6)

[AT/TL] (to complete this submode)

)5,

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

70

6-10

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.5 Cashier Code and Name Programming (Submode 2)

6.5 Cashier Code and Name Programming (Submode 2)

Cashier Code and Name, and Cashier Status for each cashier can be programmed here.

6.5.1 Programming

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

OPERATION

(See NOTE 1 below.)

Address 1: Cashier Name

[ST]

Max. 12 characters

(See NOTE 2 below.)

Address 2: Cashier Status

For sequentially programming the address, the Address number specification can be skipped.

2 Status| [#]

Repeat for another cashier.

0: Cashier for sale entries

1: Cashier for training entries ( NOTE 3)

[AT/TL] (To complete this submode.)

NOTES: 1. The following table shows the Cashier Codes that can be entered (the capacity is determined by the RAM Allocation Setting).

Standard memory Expansion memory

Code entry type 1 to 15 1 to 99

Cashier key type [CLK] key 1 to 8, 99* ---

* The Cashier Code 99 for the Cashier Key Type is fixed as a code of a cashier for Training

Entries.

2. For the name of each cashier, a maximum of 12 regular-sized or 6 double-sized characters can be entered. A combination of both types is also available.

3. Training entry status is available for every cashier.

4. When the center file is used, this programming cannot be performed on the Satellite Terminal.

5. Prior to the change of cashier status (Normal cashier

Training cashier, or Training cashier

Normal cashier), daily reports and GT reports of this cashier should be taken.

6-11

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.5 Cashier Code and Name Programming (Submode 2)

Example) To program the following cashier data

Cashier Code 1: Name JONES, Status 0 (for Sale Entries)

Cashier Code 2: Name SMITH, Status 0 (for Sale Entries)

Cashier Code 3: Name MEHL, Status 1 (for Training Entries)

Cashier Code 4: Name BROWN, Status 1 (for Training Entries)

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 2 and depress the [X] key.

1 [NS] (Cashier Code) 3 [NS] (Cashier Code)

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\ setting)

0 (for Sales Entries)

2 [NS] (Cashier Code)

4 [NS] (Cashier Code)

)5,

-21(6

70 setting)

0 (for Sales Entries)

6.5.2 Deletion

CONDITION

[AT/TL] (to end this submode.)

After the Daily and GT Cashier’s Resets, (and his/her Sign OFF for Code Entry Type)

Repeatable for another cashier to be deleted.

or

[VOID]

NOTES: 1. The Cashier Reset Report Count of the deleted cashier will be cleared.

2. The cashier key or cashier code of the deleted cashier cannot be used or signed-ON for sale entries.

Example)

To delete Cashier Code 1 with name “JONES” that has been programmed in the preceding page:

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 2 and depress the [X] key.

[ITEM CORR] (for declaration of deletion)

1 (Cashier Code)

[AT/TL] (to end this program.)

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

)5,

-21(6

70

6-12

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.6 PLU Table Programming (Submode 4)

6.6 PLU Table Programming (Submode 4)

This submode can be operated when new PLU items are to be added, PLU program data is to be changed, or

PLUs are to be deleted.

6.6.1 Programming or Changing

CONDITION

Any time outside a sale

OPERATION

As for details of each Address, refer to the following pages.

(See NOTE 2 .)

Barcode Scanning

[PLU]

(See NOTE 1 .)

Address 1: Link Department for sequential-coded item only

(1 to 99)

Address 2: PLU Name

[ST]

Max. 16 characters

Address 3: Preset Price

(Max. 6 digits)

Address 4: Status Code 1

Address 5: Status Code 2

Address 6: Tax Status

(Max. 4 digits)

Repeat for other PLUs.

Address 7: Unit Price of Individual Split Package within the same PLU by Address 8: Whole Package Quantity

8 correction.

(Max. 6 digits)

(Max. 2 digits)

( NOTE 3 )

Address 9: PLU Group No.

(1 to 99; 0 to reset)

Address 10: Link-PLU Table No.

(1 to 99; 0 to reset)

Address 11: Tare Table No.

(1 to 9; 0 to reset)

Address 12: Unit Weight Code

(1 to 11; 0 to reset)

Address 13: Mix & Match Group No.

(1 to 255; 0 to reset)

Address 14: Tare 2 Rate

(0.01 to 99.99%; 0 to reset)

Address 15: Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code

(1 to 99; 0 to reset)

[AT/TL] (To complete this submode.)

6-13

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.6 PLU Table Programming (Submode 4)

NOTES: 1. The “Address Numbers” designation at the top after “4 [X]” can be skipped if not necessary. If entered, the designated Address(es) will automatically be accessed after the PLU Code designation.

2. A maximum of 65,000 PLUs (5,000 PLUs as standard when the Expansion Memory is installed) are programmable (varies depending on the capacity and allocation of the RAM). Also refer to the

“CODING PLUs” to be described at the end of this section. The “[PLU]” key here indicates the key labeled simply as “PLU” but not any PLU Preset-code Keys.

3. When the Address No. is sequential from the preceding address (if the Address Designation feature has not been used), the Address No. and the following [ST] can be omitted.

4. The programming contents of each address are further described in the PLU TABLE

PROGRAMMING CONTENTS below.

PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS

Address No.

1

2

3

Description of Programming Contents

Linked Department Code

Enter the 2-digit code of the department to which the PLU is linked. When the PLU is newly programmed, this entry is compulsory (an error will result if this entry is skipped.)

[#]

1 to 99

PLU Name (Descriptor)

Enter a maximum of 16 regular-sized or 8 double-sized characters by referring Section 6.2

Character Entries, then end with the [ST] key.

When no name is programmed for a PLU, the following will be the auto-program name for printing:

PLUxxxxxx (for PLU Code Max. 6-digit feature)

PLUxxxxxxxxxxxxx (for PLU Code Max. 13-digit feature)

NOTE: For details, please contact your nearest TOSHIBA TEC representative.

Preset Price

• For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress the [#] key.

1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99)

When the option “Preset Point for one decimal digit allowed” is selected, the decimal digit can be entered after entering a maximum of 5 integer digits and the [.] key.

1 to 99999 (result: $0.01 to $999.99)

or

0.1 to 99999.9 (result: $0.001 to $999.999)

• A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation.

• When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the PLU will be an open

PLU (open-price PLU).

6-14

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.6 PLU Table Programming (Submode 4)

PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS (continued)

Address No.

4

Description of Programming Contents

Status Code 1 Selection

• Enter Codes 1 to 7 whose status must be set to ON side. More than one code may be entered. Enter 0 when none of the statuses should be set to ON.

Code Item

Selective Status

ON OFF

Compulsory Optional

2

3

4

5

Net to Selective Itemizer 1

Net to Selective Itemizer 2

Food Stamp Status

Scale Entry

Yes

Yes

Yes

Compulsory

No

No

No

Prohibited

7

8

Lock or Unlock Status

Delete Status

Lock (not in use)

Yes

Unlock (in use)

No

NOTES:

Code 1: Quantity Entry Compulsion

• When this status is selected, the quantity entry is always necessary for PLU item entry.

Code 2,3: Net to Selective Itemizer 1, 2

• Refer to Section 6.21 Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers.

Code 5: Scale Entry

• This status and the HI-CONE Status (Code 6) cannot be combined for one PLU.

• The Scale Entry status is unavailable for the Age Limit 1 and 2 (Codes 6 and 7 in status

2 selection).

Code 6: HI-CONE Status

• This status requires setting of the Whole Package Quantity (Address 8).

Code 7: Lock Status

• When this status is set to a PLU, an entry of the PLU in a sale is prohibited.

Code 8: Delete Status

• This status can be set only to a PLU of sales data 0 in the stand-alone system with PLU expansion memory or the M/S system with “PLU to be inquired” feature. When this status is set to a PLU, an entry of the PLU in a sale is not allowed. PLU which has the this status is deleted from the PLU Table File when the PLU Merge is executed.

• This status set is possible only when the PLU center file is selected.

Setting Examples:

To set only Status 2 to ON …........... Enter 2 [#]

To set Statuses 2, 3, 5 to ON …....... Enter 235 [#]

To set none of statuses to ON …..... Enter 0 [#]

6-15

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.6 PLU Table Programming (Submode 4)

PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS (continued)

Address No.

5

Description of Programming Contents

Status Code 2 Selection

• Enter Codes 2 to 7 (Code 3 is vacant.) whose status must be set to ON side. More than one code may be entered. Enter 0 when none of the statuses should be set to ON.

Code Item

Selective Status

ON OFF

1 Price Print Non-print Print

2

3

4

5

Tare 3 Entry

-- vacant --

Tax Symbol “F” Print

Canada Non-taxable Quantity

Compulsory

Print

Objective

Optional

Non-print

Not objective

6 Age Limit 2 Status (alcohol) Necessary Unnecessary

7 Age Limit 1 Status (cigarette) Necessary Unnecessary

NOTES:

Code 1: Price Print

• When this status is set to ON (Non-print), PLU price will not be printed. However, when the Quantity Extension transaction is performed for the PLU, its price will be always printed regardless of this status selection. Do not set this status code ON.

Code 4: Tax Symbol “F” Print

• Tax symbol “F” is printed when this status code has been set “ON” to a taxable PLU.

• If the Food Stamp feature has been selected, this symbol “F” will be always printed regardless of this code status when a food stamp taxable department is entered.

* In Canada, some area handles two kinds of tax; GST and PST. Status Code 4 (Tax

Symbol “F” Print) should be set at the GST status setting.

Tax Symbol “T” ...... PST

Tax Symbol “F” ...... GST

Status Code 6,7: Age Limit Status 2, 1

• When the Age Limit 1 or Age Limit 2 Status is set to ON, the age confirmation is always necessary before entering a sales item.

• The Age Limit 2 or Age Limit 1 Status (Code 6 or 7) is unavailable for the Scale Entry

Compulsory PLU (Code 5 in Status 1 Selection).

• Enter one- to four-digit Status Codes for applicable Taxes.

[#]

0: Non-taxable

1: Tax 1 (Tax 1 taxable)

2: Tax 2 (Tax 2 taxable)

(More than one code can be entered for combining Tax1 to Tax4 taxable status.

For example, enter 12 to select Tax1 and Tax2

3: Tax 3 (Tax 3 taxable) taxable status.)

4: Tax 4 (Tax 4 taxable)

NOTES: 1. The rate of each Tax will be later be set and described in Section 6.23 Tax

Table Programming.

2. In case of inclusive tax, the combination of the tax status is unavailable. Only one inclusive tax status can be programmed for a PLU. (Tax 3 taxable or Tax 4 taxable)

6-16

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.6 PLU Table Programming (Submode 4)

PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS (continued)

Address No.

7

8

9

10

Description of Programming Contents

Unit Price of Individual Split Package

• The unit price of individual split package can be programmed regardless of the HI-CONE status.

• For preset the unit price of individual split package, enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress [#].

• To cancel the unit price of individual split package, enter 0 and depress [#].

(When the unit price of individual split package is not preset (or 0), whole package price

(Address 3 setting) will be used in the registration.

• When HI-CONE PLU is entered as an open-price PLU, use the unit price of whole package instead of that of individual split package.

Whole Package Quantity (for Split Package Pricing PLUs)

[#]

Enter the whole package quantity in max. 2 digits (1 to 99), or enter 0 to cancel the

Split Package Pricing status. Be sure to set a whole package quantity here for PLUs with HI-CONE Status (Address 4 - Code 6) or Mix & Match Group No. (Address 13).

NOTES: 1. This setting is not allowed for PLUs with the Scale-compulsory status.

2. When the option “Preset Point for one decimal digit” is selected, this setting is not allowed to any PLUs. (For details, please contact your nearest TOSHIBA

TEC representative.)

PLU Group No. (for purposes of reports)

• Enter a 2-digit code (1 to 99) as a PLU Group No. to which the PLU belongs, and depress

[#]. To cancel the Group No. once set, enter 0 and depress [#].

• For HASH PLU, the PLU Group No. setting is available.

Link-PLU Table No. (for PLU-to-PLU linking requirement only)

• This entry is useful, similar to the “Sub-link Dept.” feature in the Department Table

Programming operation, when the PLU item entry should always be followed by another

PLU item sale. If the PLU is not applied to this case, skip this address entry. Refer to the following examples of applications:

Example 1) PLU 1 (Drink Small

Bottle Net Content at $0.45

Example 2) PLU 101 (Battery-drive

PLU 2 (Bottle Deposit for the small bottle at $0.05

PLU 202 (Battery-drive Pack

Clock at $20.00) at $1.50)

As shown in the examples, this feature prevents the cashier from forgetting to enter the Sublink PLU item attached to the Head-link PLU item. And at the same time, in reports, two

PLU Totals are separately read.

• In setting, enter the Link-PLU Table No. (1 to 99) and then depress [#].

[#]

1 to 99 (Link-PLU Table No. The Sub-link PLU which link to the Link-PLU Table will be programmed in a separate programming operation later.)

• To cancel the sub-linking, enter 0 instead of the Link-PLU Table No. before [#].

6-17

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.6 PLU Table Programming (Submode 4)

PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS ( continued )

Address No.

(10)

11

Description of Programming Contents

REMARKS:

1) When the Head-link PLU is entered in a sale, the Sub-link PLU will automatically be entered. When the Sub-link PLU is an open-price PLU, the price entry and the [AMT] key depression should follow manually on the main keyboard. This manual operation sequence cannot be replaced by a PLU Preset-code Key on the main keyboard or on the PK-2 keyboard.

2) The PLU-to-PLU linkage is effective even when the Head-link PLU is an open-price

PLU.

3) The linkage of the Sub-link PLU is as shown below.

• Head-link PLU (one PLU) + Sub-link PLU (Max. seven PLUs)

The linkage of the Sub-link PLU is effective so that up to seven Sub-link PLUs can be entered. If eight or more Sub-link PLUs are programmed, they will be ignored at the item entry.

4) It is possible to set multiple PLUs as Head-link to one Sub-link PLU. (In Example 1 described above, it may be extended to have more Head-link PLUs of similar items such as Drink Large, which also link to the Bottle Deposit of the same amount.)

5) Repeat, Item Correct, Dollar Discount, Vendor Coupon, Bottle Return, %+, or %- operations are not accepted for PLU-to-PLU link entries. But Return Merchandise or

Void operation is possible for the Head-link (and the Sub-link PLU will be processed as returned or voided item automatically, in this case).

6) The Sub-link PLU may be operated for sales entries, skipping the Head-link PLU, without affecting the Head-link PLU sales memory.

7) Multiplication is possible on the Head-link PLU, and then the Sub-link PLU will automatically be multiplied with the same quantity.

8) Modifier Keys (such as [SI/M] ) will be effective for the Head-link PLU item only, and the modification will be disregarded for the Sub-link PLU.

9) When an error occurs at the Sub-link PLU, only the Head-link PLU is entered but not the

Sub-link PLU. (Errors such as Multiplication Product Over-limit Error, the Sub-link PLU has not been opened, the sale subtotal will turn into negative, etc.)

10) When the Sub-link is a negative PLU, a Return Merchandise or Void entry through the

Head-link PLU is not possible.

11) None of Scale-Compulsory PLUs should be linked as Sub-link to another PLU of Headlink. An error will result on the Head-link item entry attempt in this case.

12) When a price-change entry is made (using the [PR OPEN] or [OPEN] key) through the

Head-link PLU, the Sub-link PLU will always require a manual amount entry (through

[AMT] ) even when the Sub-link is a preset-price PLU.

13) PLU with the Age Limit Status or with the Quantity Entry Compulsion Status programmed cannot be used for Link-PLU.

Tare Table No. (for Scale-compulsory PLUs only)

[#]

Enter the Tare Table No. (1 to 9). The content of each Tare Table is set later in a separate operation (Submode 26). In a scale item entry of a PLU with a Tare Table No. set, the tare weight preset in the Tare Table will automatically be subtracted from the total weight read from the scale. Enter 0 to cancel a Tare Table No. once set. Or skip this address setting for

PLUs not needing any tare weight calculations.

6-18

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.6 PLU Table Programming (Submode 4)

PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS (continued)

Address No. Description of Programming Contents

12

13

Individual PLU Unit Weight Table Code (for Scale-compulsory PLUs only)

[#]

0:

1:

General Unit Weight (Set in Submode 26)

2:

3:

4:

5:

6:

7:

8:

9:

10: 1/2 LB 100 g

11: 1/4 LB not applicable

NOTE: Whether the ECR adopts the LB or Kg unit system is determined by a system option selection. (For details, please contact your nearest TOSHIBA TEC representative.)

Mix & Match Group No.

14

[#]

Enter the Mix & Match Group No. (1 to 255). To cancel the Mix & Match Group once set, enter 0.

NOTE: This Mix & Match Group No. setting is only possible when a Whole Package

Quantity (Address 8) is set.

Tare 2 Rate

• Enter a Tare 2 Rate (0 to 9999; 0% to 99.99%), and depress [#]. To cancel the Tare 2 Rate once set, enter 0 and depress [#].

Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code 15

• Enter the Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code (1 to 99), then depress the [#] key. Enter 0 as the Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code to reset the code once programmed.

PLU Price Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Amount Setting can be performed in Submode 40.

ADDITIONAL NOTES

If a PLU is linked to a negative Department, the PLU is automatically set as negative PLU. If a PLU is linked to an HASH Department, the PLU is automatically set as HASH PLU.

When a negative PLU is set with the Scale-Compulsory status, an error will result in a sale entry attempt of that

PLU.

The Amount Limits (High Amount, Low Amount) of each open-price PLU is ruled by that of its linked department.

When a PLU is linked to a Gasoline Sales Department, an error will result in a sale entry attempt of that PLU.

The system option allows you to select that the Tax Status and the Food Stamp Status of each PLU are determined by those of its link department.

6-19

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.6 PLU Table Programming (Submode 4)

Example) To program the following PLU data:

PLU Code

Link Department (Address 1)

PLU Name (Address 2)

Preset Price (Address 3)

Status Code 1 (Address 4)

Status Code 2 (Address 5)

Tax Status (Address 6)

Unit Price of Individual Split Package (Address 7)

Whole Package Quantity (Address 8)

PLU Group No. (Address 9)

Link-PLU Table No. (Address 10)

Tare Table No. (Address 11)

Unit Weight Code (Address 12)

Mix & Match Group No. (Address 13)

Tare 2 Rate (Address 14)

Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code (Address 15)

None

None

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 4 and depress the [X] key.

10101

Dept. 1

Tomato

$1.00

4 (Food Stamp Status)

4 (Tax Symbol “F” print)

1 (Tax 1 taxable)

None

None

1

None

None

None

None

(Addresses 7,8,10 to 15 are skipped.)

[ST] (Name: Tomato)

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

)5,

3/8

[AT/TL] (Complete this submode)

7RPDWR

#

70

6-20

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.6 PLU Table Programming (Submode 4)

6.6.2 Deletion

CONDITION

To delete a PLU with sales data of zero: Any time outside a sale

To delete a PLU with sales data of not zero: After PLU Reset

Individual PLU Deletion

or

[VOID]

Repeatable for other PLUs to be deleted.

Example) To delete PLU No. 90701 (Drink Small-B) that was once programmed:

Key Operation Mode Lock: SET, enter 4, depress the [X] key.

90701 [PLU]

[AT/TL]

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

)5,

'ULQN 6PDOO%

70

All PLU Deletion

[ITEM CORR] [ALL VOID] [AT/TL]

or

[VOID]

NOTES: 1. If PLU items have been added to the PLU Additional File, these PLU items are also deleted by the

ALL PLU Deletion operation.

2. Prior to the All PLU Deletion operation, the PLU daily reset report and the PLU GT reset report should be taken.

6-21

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.6 PLU Table Programming (Submode 4)

6.6.3 PLU Programmed Data Copying

This operation is used to copy the programmed data of a PLU item and to use it in programming another PLU item, thus eliminating time in PLU programming operation.

CONDITION

OPERATION

To program new PLUs or to change any programmed contents of PLUs:

Any time outside a sale (except the following case)

To change the PLU of the copy-destination with sales data not zero:

After PLU Reset

|PLU Code of the copy-destination| [PLU] [NS]

|PLU Code of the copy-source| [PLU]

The programmed data of the copy-source PLU is now copied to the copy-destination

PLU (except the PLU Code). Then follow the procedure in Section 6.6.1

Programming or Changing to change data of any required Addresses.

Example) To program PLU 90701 (Drink Small-B) again that was once programmed and then deleted, by copying the programmed data of PLU 90601 (Drink Small-A):

Key Operation Mode Lock: SET, enter 4, depress the [X] key.

90701 (PLU Code of the copy-destination)

[NS]

90601 (PLU Code of the copy-source)

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

[#] (Space)

)5,

'ULQN 6PDOO$

'ULQN 6PDOO%

[ST]

[AT/TL] (to complete this submode)

70

6-22

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.6 PLU Table Programming (Submode 4)

6.6.4 CODING PLUs (supplement to PLU programming operations)

A maximum of 6-digit or 13-digit No. may be assigned to each PLU as PLU Code, depending on the system option selection of the PLU Code digits. Any number within this limit may be assigned to each PLU. The following description is applied to the “Manual PLU Entry System Type”.

DIGIT LENGTH OF PLU CODES

In determining the actual digit length of PLU codes, refer to the following factors:

1) The smaller the digit length, the easier and quicker the PLU sales entries will be.

2) The larger the digit length, the more precise analysis will be possible using various report functions.

3) Some stores may adopt PLU Codes of more than 2 digits (while 1- or 2-digit codes are given to Departments), to prevent confusions or mistakes in key operations.

4) Some stores may use smaller-digit codes for frequently sold PLU items while using larger-digit code for slowsale items.

CODING METHODS

For the purpose of classifying merchandise and for convenience of PLU report applications, any of the following methods may be taken according to each store’s requirement:

1. Coding With Linked Department Code

In this method, the PLU’s linked Department Code should be contained in the PLU Code.

1

12

Its Linking PLU Codes

100, 101, 102, 103 ... 199

1200, 1201, 1202, 1203 ... 1299

If the linked Department Code is contained in the top 2 digits of the PLU code, as in the above examples, the following merits are expected:

1) The store cashiers and other clerks may easily see each PLU’s link Department.

2) In PLU report takings, “Zone PLU Read/Reset” reports are effective, by designating the zone of all the PLUs that link to the same Department.

Example) To read all the PLUs linked to Dept. 12:

Zone-start PLU Code ..... 1200

Zone-end PLU Code ...... 1299

(For more details, refer to the report section in the Owner’s Manual.)

2. Coding With Type ID for Each Digit

This method is to give each digit numeric of the PLU code a certain meaning according to the merchandise, color, grade, size, wholesaler, etc.

Example using 4-digit codes) -- in case of a clothing shop --

2 1 3 0

Merchandise serial No. assigned under the same number of the preceding digits.

Size ID (1 for Small, 2 for Medium, 3 for Large, etc.)

Color ID (0 for White, 1 for Gray, 2 for Black, etc.)

Wholesaler or Maker ID (1 for Company “A”, 2 for Company “B”, etc.)

6-23

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.7 Time Setting or Adjustment (Submode 5)

3. Using Bar codes (source-marking EAN or UPC bar codes)

If most of the sale items in the store are printed with a source-marking UPC bar codes, the code (the humanreadable numerics attached to the bar code print) may be entered as it is. Some items are printed with 13-digit code, and others with 8-digit code. Thus this method is possible only when the option “PLU Code max. 13 digits” is selected.

The merit of this system is that you can simply read and enter the source-marked code rather than generating an original code for each PLU item. If the barcode No. is used, however, it is recommended to adopt the “Scanning

System Type”.

4. Combining Methods 1, 2, and 3

When the option “PLU Code max. 13 digits” is selected, some combinations of the above three methods are possible.

Example 1) Combining Methods 1 and 2: x x x x x x

Type IDs described in Method 2

Linked Department Code described in Method 1

Example 2) Combining Methods 3, and Method 1 or 2:

For source-marked items .…use the bar codes.

For other items .……………generate codes in Method 1 or Method 2, in max. 6 or 7 digits for example.

After all, the methods described above are only suggestions. You may freely make up your own PLU coding method to suit each store’s merchandise controls.

6.7 Time Setting or Adjustment (Submode 5)

CONDITION Anytime outside a sale

[AT/TL]

(00 to 23) (00 to 59)

NOTE: If an hour value of more than 23 or a minute value of more than 59 is entered, the current data will not be changed by setting or adjusting the time.

Example) To set time “1:15 p.m. (13:15)”.

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 5 and depress the [X] key.

[1] [3] [1] [5] [AT/TL]

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

)5,

70

70

6-24

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.8 Date Setting or Adjustment (Submode 6)

6.8 Date Setting or Adjustment (Submode 6)

CONDITION Anytime outside a sale

OPERATION

6 [X]

Mode Lock: SET

|Day-of-Week Code|

0: SUN (Sunday)

1: MON (Monday)

2: TUE (Tuesday)

3: WED (Wednesday)

4: THU (Thursday)

5: FRI (Friday)

6: SAT (Saturday)

|Month| |Day| |Year|

2 digits 2 digits 4 digits

(01 to 12) (01 to 31) (2003, 2004, etc.)

See NOTE 1 below

NOTES:

1. The date entry order may be Day-Month-Year or Year-Month Day instead of Month-Day-Year if so selected in the program option.

2. If you do not want to print the Day-of Week on receipt, please contact your nearest TOSHIBA TEC representative.

Example) To set date “August 25 (MON), 2003”.

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET , Enter 6 and depress the [X] key.

[1] [0] [8] [2] [5] [2] [0] [0] [3] [AT/TL]

[AT/TL]

TEC STORE

1343 PEACH DRIVE

PHONE: 87-6437

Open 8:00am to 7:00pm

Closed: every Wednesday

08-22-2003 FRI #0

P06

1 08-25-2003

0033 13:15TM

6.9 Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys (Submode 8)

This submode sets the high amount limit in finalizing transactions by tendering through each media key and also sets the high and low amount limits in entering amount through departments.

CONDITION

Any time outside a sale

OPERATION Mode Lock: SET

8 [X] | Key Code | [ST]

Max. 2 digits

(See the table below)

NOTE 1

| Amount Limit Set Value | [#]

Max. 8 digits; 0 to reset

Repeat for another key.

[AT/TL]

Key

Code

1

2

3

4

5

6

Item or Key to be applied

[AT/TL] (Cash Tender)

[CHK TEND] (Check Tender)

[Chg] (Charge Tender)

[MISC TEND] (Misc. Tender)

[CREDIT 1] (Credit 1 Tender)

[CREDIT 2] (Credit 2 Tender)

Key

Code

7

8

9

10

11

12

Item or Key to be applied

[DEBIT]

[EBT CASH]

[EBT F/S]

[FSTL/TEND] (Food Stamp Tender)

Common High Limit for all depts.

Common Low Limit for all depts.

NOTES: 1. When continuous key codes are programmed, the key code entry is omissible.

2. If the individual High or Low Amount Limit of department has been set, it prevails over the

Common High or Low Limit for all departments here.

3. The Amount Limit set value of each tender media is the high amount limit and is effective only when the media key is used for tendering but not when used as total key. Different from amount limit setting of departments, an exact value on all the digits can be set for tendering media. For example, if you enter 1234 [#] , an amount up to $12,34 can be tendered.

6-25

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.10 Customer File Code (Check Track No.) and Name Setting (Submode 15)

Example) To set the Amount Limits of the following items:

Key Code Amount Limit Set Values

2 ([CHK TND])

11 (Common High)

12 (Common Low)

$ 99.99

$ 999.99

$ 0.01

9999

100000

1

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 8 and depress the [X] key.

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

11 Item Code for Common High Limit for all depts.

100000 Amount Limit Set Value

12 Item Code for Common Low Limit for all depts.

&+(&.

70

[AT/TL] To complete this submode

6.10 Customer File Code (Check Track No.) and Name Setting

(Submode 15)

This submode creates files for customers whose sales are to be processed using the check track memory.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

Repeat for other codes

* For sequentially programming codes, the code specification can be skipped.)

| Customer File Code | [ST] Character Entries [ST] [AT/TL]

Max. 12 digits

(1 to 999999999999)

Max. 16 characters for the Customer’s Name

When no name is to be programmed for the code

NOTES:

1. The Customer File codes that are programmed in this submode will be accessed by entering the code and depressing the [PICK UP BAL] key for a sale entry in a charge posting operation in the REG or MGR mode.

At this time, the balance of the new customer assigned with the code will show zero which will be printed as the previous balance line. On finalizing the sale, the new balance will be printed at the bottom of the receipt, which will be stored in the same Customer File Code memory area. Thus the operator always use the [PICK

UP BAL] key for both starting a new customer’s account and at recalling the customer’s balance.

2. If all the programmed Customer File Codes are used up and a new customer file code is required to be opened during the business hours, the [CODE OPEN] key may be used. When a new code is entered, followed by [CODE OPEN], the code is printed as the previous balance line item with the balance zero on the receipt, and at the same time, the code is added to the list of the Customer File Codes programmed in the above operation of Submode 15. However, the use of the [CODE OPEN] key can be programmed to require

Manager Intervention, which can control the operator’s opening of a new customer file code outside the list of the Customer File Codes programmed in Submode 15.

3. When the Standard Memory is used, a maximum of 1000 Customer File Codes can be programmed. When the Expansion Memory is used, a maximum of 3,000 Customer File Codes can be programmed. However, the actual maximum number of Customer Files varies depending on the RAM allocation.

6-26

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.10 Customer File Code (Check Track No.) and Name Setting (Submode 15)

Deletion of Individual Customer File Codes

Repeat for other codes to be deleted.

[ITEM CORR]

| Customer File Code | [ST] or

[VOID]

Deletion of All Customer File Codes

[AT/TL]

[ITEM CORR]

[AT/TL]

[VOID]

NOTE: If the balance of the deleted code is not zero, the Transfer memory of the code will automatically be adjusted to zero. At that time, the previous balance to be reset will be printed.

Example) To program the following Customer File Codes with Customer Names:

CODE

1

:

:

NAME

JAMES HAILY

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

105 HELEN

Enter 15 and depress the [X]

1 [ST] (Customer File Code)

(NAME: JAMES HAILY)

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

-$0(6 +$,/<

+(/(1 5(('

70

[AT/TL]

Example) To delete the Customer File Code 104 that has once been programmed.

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 15 and depress the [X].

[ITEM CORR] 104 [ST] (Customer File Code)

[AT/TL]

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

70

6-27

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.11 Salesperson Code and Name Programming (Submode 20)

6.11 Salesperson Code and Name Programming (Submode 20)

By programming Salesperson Codes here, those codes may be used in sales entries. In addition, the name of each salesperson can be programmed in maximum 12 characters.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

Repeat for other Salespersons

* (For sequentially programming codes, the code number specification can be skipped.)

| Salesperson Code | [ST]

Max. 2 digits (1 to 99)

Character Entries [ST] [AT/TL]

See NOTE 1 below

NOTES: 1. A maximum of 12 regular-sized or 6 double-sized characters may be programmed for a name.

A combination of both types is also available.

2. Even if no name is programmed (i.e. skipping the Character Entries before the second [ST] key) for a Salesperson Code, that code can be used in sale entries. Then, auto-preset ID symbol “SP xx” (xx = Salesperson Code) will be printed instead of a name in this case, for his/her ID in receipt print, etc.

Example) To program the following salesperson code and name:

Code Name

1 White

2 Stacy

3 Jansen

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 20 and depress the [X] key.

1 [ST]

507 [#]

(Salesperson Code 1)

(W)

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

[ST]

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

:KLWH

6WDF\

-DQVHQ

[ST] 70

[ST]

6-28

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.12 Link-PLU Table Programming (Submode 25)

Deletion

CONDITION

OPERATION

After Daily Salesperson Reset

[ITEM CORR] | Salesperson Code | [ST]

or

[VOID]

Repeat for other salesperson to be deleted.

[AT/TL]

NOTE: When a Salesperson Code is deleted in the above operation, no entries using that code will be accepted until the code is again opened in the “Programming” operation already described.

Example) To delete Salesperson Code 3 (name: Jansen) that was once programmed:

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 20 and depress the [X] key.

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

[AT/TL]

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

-DQVHQ

70

6.12 Link-PLU Table Programming (Submode 25)

This submode programs Link-PLU Tables and their respective Sub-link PLUs. When a PLU is programmed with a

Link-PLU Table No. (Address 10 of the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING operation), an entry of the PLU will automatically enter the Sub-link PLU that is programmed in the Link-PLU Table No. Refer to the “Link-PLU Table

No.” description in the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING, Submode 4, as to details of PLU-to-PLU Iinkage.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

| Link-PLU Table No. | [ST]

1 to 99

(Enter the Table No. programmed in the

Head-link PLU item in Submode 4)

Repeat for other tables.

| Sub-link PLU Code | [PLU]

6 or 13 digits

(Enter the code of the PLU to be autoentered when the Head-link PLU is entered in a sale.)

* (For sequentially programming tables, the

Table No. specification can be skipped.)

[AT/TL]

6-29

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.13 Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting (Submode 26)

Example) Toset the following Link-PLU Table and its Sub-link PLU:

1 101301

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 25 and depress the [X] key.

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

101301 (Sub-link PLU Code)

[AT/TL] to complete this submode

NOTE: In this example, Link-PLU Table No. has already been set in

PLU 90601 (Drink Small-A) and PLU 90701 (Drink Small-B) as Head-link items in the PLU PROGRAMMING operation,

Submode 4. The Sub-link PLU 101301 here has been programmed as a bottle-deposit PLU (Small-Btl Depo) in the same submode.

Deletion of Link-PLU Tables

021

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

OPERATION

| Link-PLU Table No. | [ST] [AT/TL]

or

[VOID]

Repeatable for other tables to be deleted.

70

6.13 Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting (Submode 26)

In the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING operation (Submode 4), some of Scale-compulsory PLUs may be set with a

Tare Table No. The actual tare weight is set to each Tare Table here. Also, the General Unit Weight is set here so that the Unit Weight may be effective to scale items entered through departments or PLUs without any

Individual Unit Weight designation.

CONDITION

Any time outside a sale

• Tare Table Setting

Repeat for other tables

| Tare Table No. | [ST]

1 digit (1 to 9)

• General Unit Weight Setting

| General Unit Weight Code |

1 to 11 ( NOTE 1 below)

* (For sequentially programming tables, the Table No. specification can be skipped.)

| Tare Weight | [#]

0 to 999

(Unit: 1/00 LB or gram.)

(Example: enter 13 for

0.13 LB or 13 grams.)

[AT/TL]

[AT/TL]

6-30

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.13 Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting (Submode 26)

• Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting

Repeat for other tables

*

| Tare Table No. | [ST] | Tare Weight | [#]

1 digit (1 to 9) 0 to 999

(Unit: 1/00 LB or gram.)

(Example: enter 13 for

0.13 LB or 13 grams.)

NOTES: 1. General Unit Weight Code as follows.

General Unit

Weight Code

LB Unit Kg Unit

* (For sequentially programming tables, the Table No. specification can be skipped.)

| General Unit Weight Code |

1 to 11 ( NOTE 1 below)

1 1LB 1Kg

2 2LB 2Kg

3 3LB 3Kg

4 4LB 4Kg

5 5LB 5Kg

6 6LB 6Kg

7 7LB 7Kg

8 8LB 8Kg

9 9LB 9Kg

10 1/2LB 100g

2. The initial value for the General Unit Weight is set to Code 1 (1LB or 1Kg).

Example) To set the following:

Tare Table No. 1 with Tare Weight 13 grams,

General Weight 100 grams (Code 10).

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 26 and depress the [X] key.

[AT/TL]

10 (General Weight Code)

[AT/TL] to complete this submode

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

OE

óOE

70

6-31

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.14 PLU Preset-Code Key Setting (Submode 27)

6.14 PLU Preset-Code Key Setting (Submode 27)

When there are any keys programmed as PLU Preset-code Keys on the ECR Keyboard (Ordinary or Flat Type), and/or when the PLU Keyboard PK-2 (hardware option) is connected to the ECR, a PLU code may be preset to each of those keys in this operation.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

Repeat for other keys.

| PLU Code | [KEY] [AT/TL]

Enter through Numeric Keys on the ECR Keyboard

(Enter 0 to close the key);

Max. 6 or 13 digits

Depress the required key on the ECR keyboard or on the PK-2 keyboard.

NOTES: 1. If the PLU Code entry is skipped and a [KEY] is simply depressed in the above sequence, the preprogrammed PLU Code of the KEY will be displayed.

2. A non-opened PLU Code (i.e. PLU non-existent in the PLU table file) can be set on a KEY; however, pressing the KEY in sale entries will result in an error unless the code is opened in the

PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING operation, Submode 4.

3. If “0” is entered as PLU Code in the above sequence, the KEY will be closed. Pressing the closed

KEY in sale entry will cause an error.

Example) To set following PLU Codes to KEYs on the ECR keyboard:

Mode Lock to SET

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

50321

50322

[AT/TL]

Location Code (left side); refer to REMARKS 1 and 2 on the next page.

PLU code assigned to the key (right side)

021

70

6-32

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.14 PLU Preset-Code Key Setting (Submode 27)

PK-2 KEYBOARD

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

REMARKS: 1. The Nos 1 through 130 marked on the PK-2 Keyboard are the KEY Nos to be printed on the left side of the program receipt issued in the operation on the preceding page. If each KEY is not set with a PLU Code, the auto-preset PLU Code identical to the initial KEY No. in the above figure will be active as its preset PLU Code ex.) KEY No.1 ................... PLU Code 1

KEY No.130 ............... PLU Code 130

2. When a PLU code is assigned to a PLU Preset-code Key on the ECR Keyboard in the operation on the preceding page, the Hardware Key Code which indicates the absolute location of the key will be printed to the left of the assigned PLU Code. The Hardware Key

Codes of the ECR keyboards of Ordinary Type and Flat Type are shown on the next page.

6-33

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.14 PLU Preset-Code Key Setting (Submode 27)

ECR Ordinary Type Keyboard

1 7 13 19 25 31 37 43 49 55 61 67 73 79 85

2 8 14 20 26 32 38 44 50 56 62 68 74 80 86

3 9 15 21 27 33 39 45 51 57 63 69 75 81 87

4 10 16 22 28 34 40 46 52 58 64 70 76 82 88

5 11 17 23 29 35 41 47 53 59 65 71 77 83 89

6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90

ECR Flat Type Keyboard

6-34

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.15 Display Message Programming (Submode 31)

6.15 Display Message Programming (Submode 31)

The “DISPLAY MESSAGE” here means the message to be displayed in the 16-digit dot windows of the Operator

Display panel while the Mode Lock of the terminal is in the “LOCK” position. This display message may be used as information, commercial message, welcoming greeting, etc.

CONDITION

Any time outside a sale

Repeat for other lines.

* Allowed for sequential Line No. only

| Message Line No. | [ST] Character Entries [ST] [AT/TL]

(1 to 4; max. 4 lines) (Max. 16 characters per line.

Regular-size only.)

NOTES: 1. When the option “Store Message SCROLLING DISPLAY” is selected, four lines (Line Nos. 1 to 4) are available. Even when the option “Store Message 16 CHARACTERS HELD” is selected, four lines (Line Nos. 1 to 4) are available. In this case, refer to the “Store Message Display” operation to display the respective message lines.

2. When the “SCROLLING DISPLAY” option is selected, a maximum of 64 characters can be entered consecutively after designating Line No.1 at first and depressing [ST] for each line end.

3. The character must be regular-sized only.

4. The DISPLAY MESSAGE set here will also appear in the “REG” or “MGR” mode if so designated by system option.

Example) To program the following display message under the “SCROLLING DISPLAY” option:

T H I S C O U N T E R I S Line No. 1

C L O S E D . P L E A S E Line No. 2

G O T O A N O T H E R , T Line No. 3

H A N K Y O U . . . Line No. 4

6-35

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.15 Display Message Programming (Submode 31)

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 31 and depress the [X] key.

(3 [ST]) (Line No. 3)

407 [#] (G)

415 [#] (O)

[#] (Space)

504 [#] (T)

[#] (Space) 415 [#] (O)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[ST] (to complete Line 1)

401 [#] (A)

414 [#] (N)

415 [#] (O)

504 [#] (T)

408 [#] (H)

405 [#] (E)

502 [#] (R)

212 [#] (,)

[#] (Space)

504 [#] (T)

[ST] (to complete Line 3)

(4 [ST]) (Line No. 4)

408 [#] (H)

401 [#] (A)

414 [#] (N)

411 [#] (K)

[#] (Space)

509 [#] (Y)

415 [#] (O)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[#] (Space)

[ST] (to complete Line 2)

505 [#] (U)

214 [#] (.)

214 [#] (.)

214 [#] (.)

[ST] (to complete Line 4)

[AT/TL] to complete this submode

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

7+,6 &2817(5 ,6

&/26(' 3/($6(

*2 72 $127+(5 7

+$1. <28

70

6-36

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.16 Negative Amount Key Limit Amount Setting (Submode 35)

6.16 Negative Amount Key Limit Amount Setting (Submode 35)

This submode sets the limit amount to be entered through each of the negative-amount keys [VND CPN], [STR

CPN], [BTL RTN], and [DOLL DISC].

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

Repeat for other Media Codes.

| Key Code | [ST]

1 to 4

(See the table below)

* (Repeatable from here for sequentially programming Media Codes.)

| Limit Amount | [#] [AT/TL]

Max. 6 digits

(1 to 999999; result:

$0.01 to $9,999.99)

Enter 0 to reset the limit

MEDIA CODE AND KEY TABLE

1 [VND CPN]

2 [STR CPN]

3

4

[BTL RTN]

[DOLL DISC]

NOTES: 1. The [VND CPN] key will not be restricted by the limit amount set here but the amount up to 7 digits will be entered in “MGR” or “ - “ mode.

2. The limit set here cannot be released by the [LC OPEN] (or [OPEN]) key in transaction entries.

Example) To set the following preset amount on the keys below:

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 35 and depress the [X] key.

[AT/TL] to complete this submode

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

9&31

6&31

70

6-37

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.17 PLU Price Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Amount Setting (Submode 40)

6.17 PLU Price Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Amount Setting

(Submode 40)

This submode sets the dollar discount amount or the extra charge amount for PLU price.

CONDITION Anytime outside a sale

Repeat for another code.

Extra Charge

Code

Max. 2 digits (1 to 99)

Example) To set as follows:

[ST]

* (Repeatable from here for sequentially programming Dollar Discount/Extra

Charge Codes.)

([RTN MDSE]) | Amount | [#]

Max. 6 digits

(1 to 999999; result:

$0.01 to $9999.99)

Depress the [RTN MDSE] key to set the Dollar Discount amount.

• Code 2 for Dollar Discount $1.50

• Code 10 for Extra Charge $2.00

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET, Enter 40 and depress the [X] key.

2 [ST] (Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code)

[RTN MDSE] (Dollar Discount declaration)

[AT/TL]

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

[AT/TL] to complete this submode 2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

70

6-38

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.18 Department Preset Price Setting or Changing

6.18 Department Preset Price Setting or Changing

The preset price of each department may be set in the DEPARTMENT TABLE PROGRAMMING (Submode 3) already described. However, in setting or changing the price only but not other programmed data, the following operation will be more convenient.

CONDITION Anytime outside a sale

(1) Using the [DEPT] key:

Repeatable for other departments.

| New Preset Price | [DEPT] [AT/TL]

Max. 6 digits; 0 to 999999

(result: $0.00 to $9999.99)

NOTE

(2) Using the [DP#] key:

Repeatable for other departments.

* Repeatable from here when the Dept Code is sequential.

| Department Code | [DP#]

Max. 2 digits; 1 to 99

| New Preset Price | [#]

Max. 6 digits; 0 to 999999

(result: $0.00 to $9999.99)

NOTE

[AT/TL]

To change a preset-price department into an open department, skip the “New Preset Price” entry and simply depress the [DEPT] key (in the first operation pattern) or simply depress the [#] key (in the second operation pattern). Presetting a zero-price is also possible.

NOTE: With the option “Preset Point for one decimal digit allowed”, 0 to 99999.9 (result: $0.000 to $999.999), using the [.] key.

Example) To set the following preset prices of departments:

Dept.13……….$1.40

Dept.14……….$2.10

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET

By the first operation pattern:

[AT/TL]

By the second operation pattern:

[AT/TL]

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

#

#

70

6-39

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.19 PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing, Whole Package Quantity Changing

6.19 PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing, Whole Package Quantity

Changing

The preset price of each PLU may be set in the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING (Submode 4) already described.

However, in setting or changing the price and/or the whole package quantity only but not other programmed data, the following operation will be more convenient.

CONDITION Anytime outside a sale

| PLU Code | [PLU] | New Whole Package Quantity | [ST] | New Preset Price | [#] [AT/TL]

6 or 13 digits Max. 2digits; 0 to 99 Max. 6 digits; 0 to 999999

(result: $0.00 to $9,999.99)

* Repeatable from here if the PLU code is sequential.

NOTE

Repeatable for other PLUs

NOTES: 1. With the option “Preset Point for one decimal digit allowed”, 0 to 999999 (result: $0.00 to

$9,999.99), using the [.] key.

2. If the operation |New Whole Package Quantity| [ST] is skipped, only a unit price setting is performed.

3. Only for the Split Price PLU, Whole Package Quantity Changing is available.

4. Preset price of Open type PLU can also be changed.

To change a preset-price PLU into an open-price PLU, skip the “New Preset Price” entry and simply depress the

[#] key. Presetting a zero-price is also possible.

Example) To set the following preset prices of PLU:

New Whole Package Q’ty

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET

6

New Preset Price

$1.25

[AT/TL] to complete this submode

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

$SSOH #

70

6-40

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.20 %+ and %- Preset Rate Setting

6.20 %+ and %- Preset Rate Setting

A preset rate may be set on each of the [%+] and [%-] keys, one independent rate for each key. Once a rate is preset, the % key will simply be depressed without a prior rate entry to activate the preset rate. If a rate is entered prior to the depression of the key, the entered rate (manual rate) will be activated instead.

CONDITION Anytime outside a sale

| Preset Rate | [%+] (For Percent Charge Preset Rate)

(0.001 to 99.999(%); use the [.] key if a decimal portion is contained.)

| Preset Rate | [%-] (For Percent Discount Preset Rate)

(0.001 to 99.999(%); use the [.] key if a decimal portion is contained.)

• To reset the rate once set:

Enter 0, depress the required % key.

(Then the % key will always required a manual rate entry in sale entries.)

NOTE: When two [%+] keys or two [%-] keys are installed on the keyboard, two different % rates (one for each) may be preset, in the same manner as described above. The two rates may be the same or different from the other. Or only one key may be preset with a rate and other may remain non-preset.

Example) To program the following rate to each key.

[%+] key……….Rate: 5.00%

[%-] key………..Rate: 10.00%

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET

Enter 5, depress [%+]

Enter 10, depress [%-]

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

70

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

70

6-41

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.21 Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers (SI1 and SI2)

6.21 Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers (SI1 and SI2)

If any of [ST1/TL] (or [SI/TL]) and [SI2/TL] keys are installed on the keyboard, a preset rate may be programmed on each key.

As for the functions and applications of the Selective Itemizers, refer to the description on the next page.

CONDITION Anytime outside a sale

| Preset Rate | [SI/TL] (or [SI1/TL])

(0.001 to 99.999(%); use the [.] key if a decimal portion is contained.)

| Preset Rate | [SI2/TL]

(0.001 to 99.999(%); use the [.] key if a decimal portion is contained.)

NOTES: 1. Whether the calculated amount by the preset SI % rate affects (i.e. add to or subtract from) the sale total is determined by a system option status selection.

2. To reset the rate once set, enter 0 as the rate. (Then the rate is regarded as 100% if the option

“Non-affect” is selected. With the option “SI Affects Sale Total”, some rate other than “0” should be programmed.)

3. Fraction process corresponds to that of the [%+] or [%-] key.

Example) To set 7% as SI1 preset % rate:

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

6, 7/

Selective Itemizer Functions and Applications

70

The “Selective Itemizer” is a temporary total memory for each sale and is activated separately from the Main

Itemizer (i.e. sale total memory). If certain Department or PLU items are programmed with the SI (selective itemizer) “net” status, the Selective Itemizer will function to add up amounts of the SI-net status items in registering the items, while the Main Itemizer will function to add up all the items in the sale. Thus, near the sale finalization, the cashier may read the SI content by depressing the [SI/TL] key.

A preset % rate may be programmed for each of SI1 and SI2 (on the preceding page), and whether the calculated amount will add to, subtract from, or non-affect the sale total is a selective option. Whether the amount resulted by depressing the [Sl/TL] key will print or non-print is another selective option.

6-42

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.21 Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers (SI1 and SI2)

The applications of this function may vary from store to store. Some stores may use it for counting the service stamps to be issued to the customers according to the sale amount of service-stampable items. In this case, the option “SI Total Non-affects Sale Total” should be selected, and a preset % rate, 1% for example, may be set to issue one service stamp for every $1.00. Thus the number of stamps to be issued to the customer is displayed

(and printed if so programmed) as a result of calculation with the preset % rate, but the resulted value (the number of stamps in this case) will not affect the sale total.

Example 1) With option “SI Total Non-affects Sale Total”:

Key Operation in REG Mode Receipt/Journal Print

[SI/TL] (1% is preset)

[AT/TL]

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

'3

'3

'3

6, 7/

&$6+

6

6

70

“S” : SI-net Symbol

Number of stamps to be issued

Dept.1 and Dept. 3 are programmed with SI-net-status. On depressing [SI/TL], “0.03” (which is 1 % of total amount of Dept. 1 “$1.00” + Dept. 3 “$2.00”) is displayed and printed, and 3 stamps are to be issued to the customer in this case.

The sale total “$4.50” is not affected by the SI calculation.

Other stores may use it for calculating the discount amount for certain sales items during a special discount sales period by presetting the discount % rate on the SI and programming SI-net status to certain Departments and

PLUs which are subject to the special discount.

Example 2) With option “SI Special Discount”:

Key Operation in REG Mode Receipt/Journal Print

[SI/TL] (10% is preset)

[AT/TL]

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

'3

'3

'3

6, 7/

&$6+

6

6

Discount Amount resulted by SI %

70

On depressing [SI/TL], “-0.30” (which is 10% discount from the total amount of Dept.1 + Dept. 3 items) is displayed and printed, and that amount is subtracted from the sale total. ($4.50 - $0.30 = $4.20)

6-43

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.22 Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting

6.22 Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting

In this program, the rate of each foreign currencies (corresponding to the [CUR1] to [CUR5] keys) will be set. By setting a rate on each Foreign Currency Key, reading the sale total and tendering in the foreign currency value will be possible for sale finalization.

CONDITION Anytime outside a sale

OPERATION

| Exchange Rate for Foreign Currency 1 |

0.000001 to 9999.999999

(Use the [.] key if decimal portion is contained in the rate.)

[CUR 1]

| Exchange Rate for Foreign Currency 5 | [CUR 5]

As for how to calculate the Exchange Rate, see the description below.

Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Calculation

1. The rate must be calculated in the subsidiary currency unit values for both the domestic and the foreign currencies. (In case of calculating the rate from the domestic to a foreign currency with the same zerosuppress form, such as from U.S. $ to Euro, it will be no problem even if it is calculated in the main currency of $ and Euro. However, in case of exchanging from a domestic currency such as $ or Euro to Japanese yen, or vice versa, this rule must be obeyed; otherwise a wrong rate will result.)

2. Calculate the required foreign currency value equivalent to the domestic currency value “1”. Then the obtained value is the Exchange Rate value to be entered in the setting operation stated above.

3. The result of calculation is rounded up.

Example) To set two foreign currency rates:

(The rates here are merely examples, and may be different from the actual rates currently in effect.)

Conditions given for Domestic Currency and Foreign Currencies

(DOMESTIC)

U.S. Dollar

(CUR 1)

EURO

(CUR 2)

Japanese Yen

$1.00 ¼ ¥117.10

1 cent 1.0914 1.1719 yen

6-44

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.23 TAX Table Setting

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET

Resetting a Foreign Currency Rate Once Set:

&85

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

3+21(

021

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

&85

021

70

70

Enter “0” in place of the Exchange Rate for the Foreign Currency in the setting operation. Then the rate for that foreign currency will be reset. The Foreign Currency Key of the rate thus reset cannot be used in sales entries.

6.23 TAX Table Setting

A maximum of four tax tables can be programmed (Tax 1, Tax 2, Tax 3, Tax 4) in accordance with installation of

[TX1/M], [TX2/M], [TX3/M], [TX4/M] keys.

CONDITION After Financial Daily Reset

TYPE 1: TAX 1 FULL BREAKS (COMBINATION OF NON-CYCLIC AND CYCLIC BREAKS)

| Max. amount non-taxable | [TX1/M]

| Max. amount for 1 ¢ tax levied | [TX1/M]

| Max. amount for 2 ¢ tax levied | [TX1/M]

Repeat up to the “A” Break

| Max. amount for N¢ tax levied | [TX1/M] .. ... “A” Break (Non-cyclic Break Limit)

| Max. amount for N + 1¢ tax levied | [TX1/M] (beginning of Cyclic Breaks)

| Max. amount for N + 2¢ tax levied | [TX1/M]

Repeat up to the “B” Break (“B” Break - “A” Break + Multiple of $1.00; max. $9.00)

NOTE: The break amount entry must be a maximum of 4 digits (1 to 9999 resulting in $0.01 to $99.99)

6-45

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.23 TAX Table Setting

TYPE 2: TAX 1 COMBINATION OF NON-CYCLIC BREAKS AND % RATE

First set all the breaks up to the “A” Break entry and the [ST] key depression as shown in TYPE 1.

| TAX RATE applied when exceeding the “A” Break amount |

(0.0001% to 99.9999%; use the [.] key if a decimal portion is contained. Examples: To set 5%, enter 5. To set 5.26%, enter 5.26. The fraction of the amount resulting from this % rate calculation will be rounded off.)

TYPE 3: TAX 1 % RATE ONLY

(The description for the TAX RATE in TYPE 2 is also applied to this case.)

NOTES: 1. For Tax 2, Tax 3, Tax 4 table programming, follow the same procedure in TYPE 1, 2, or 3 on the preceding page, using [TX2/M] or [TX3/M] or [TX4/M] instead of [TX1/M].

2. If multiple tax tables are programmed, the Tax 1 table must be set first, then Tax 2, Tax 3, and

Tax 4. The Tax 1 table setting will automatically reset all of the old Tax 1, 2, 3. and 4 tables if they have been programmed.

3. No second depression of the [ST] key is allowed within one tax table programming.

4.

5.

A maximum of 99 breaks can be entered for Tax 1 to Tax 4 tables altogether.

For inclusive tax (Tax 3 or Tax 4), tax table programming using a rate only is available. Tax table programming using a tax break is unavailable.

Example 1) TAX 1 FULL BREAKS

Mode

$0.00 to $0.10 0¢ 10 [TX1/M]

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

$0.11 to $0.22

$0.23 to $0.39

22

39

[TX1/M]

[TX1/M]

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

$0.40 to $0.56 3¢ 56 [TX1/M]

$0.57 to $0.73

$0.74 to $0.90

---- “A” Break

73 [TX1/M]

90 [TX1/M]

[ST]

7$;

021

10¢

11¢

12¢

---- “B” Break [AT/TL]

∗∗

70

6-46

6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6.24 Store/Register No. Setting

Example 2) TAX 2 COMBINATION OF NON-CYCLIC BREAKS AND % RATE

5

9 [TX2/M]

29 [TX2/M]

59 [TX2/M]

84 [TX2/M]

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

$0.00 to $0.09

$0.10 to $0.29

$0.30 to $0.59

$0.60 to $0.84

---- “A” Break

5% is applied to any amount exceeding the “A” Break.

[ST]

[AT/TL]

7$;

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

70

Example 3) TAX 10% RATE ONLY

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

10% is applied to any sale amount 0

Lock:

[TX3/M]

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

[ST]

021

10

[AT/TL]

7$;

70

6.24 Store/Register No. Setting

A maximum of 6 digits may be set as ID No. for the store and/or register. And once set, it will be printed on every receipt and every transaction on journal.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

| Store/Register No. |

Max. 6 digits; 0 to 999999

[#]

NOTE: The preceding zeros, if entered, will not be printed. For example, if “001234” is entered in the above operation,

“#1234” will always be printed as the Register No.

Example) To set the Register No. of this terminal: 3001

Key Operation: Mode Lock: SET

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

70

6-47

7. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA EO1-11152

7. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA

7. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA

The programmed data entered in the preceding chapter can be read for verification purposes.

The print format of each program reading is almost the same as on the program receipt, except that “PX” and a

3-digit number are printed instead of printing “P” and a 2-digit number.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

OPERATION X or SET

1. To read out the data of programming operations with a Submode No., first enter “1,” then each Submode No., and finally depress the [AT/TL] key.

For example, to read the programmed data entered in Submode 1 (STORE NAME/MESSAGE,

COMMERCIAL MESSAGE, PROGRAMMING), operate:

1 0 1 [AT/TL]

Submode No. (In case of a 1-digit number, add a “0” on top to be a 2-digit number.

Always attach “1” to the Program Submode No. for reading data.

NOTE: Data of Submodes 5, 6 cannot be read.

2. To read out the data of programming operations without a Submode No., the following operation will read all the data together:

1 0 [AT/TL]

To read the data of the following operations:

• %+ and %- PRESET RATE

• SELECTIVE ITEMIZER RATE

• FOREIGN CURRENCY EXCHANGE RATE

• TAX TABLE (For tax calculation test, refer to the next page.)

3. Zone destination is possible in reading the PLU TABLE:

104 [ST] Zone-start [@/FOR] Zone-end [AT/TL]

NOTE: On depressing the [AT/TL] key, the programmed data will be printed. To abort printing once started, depress the [ITEM CORR] or [VOID] key. The reading operation is immediately stopped halfway.

7- 1

7. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA

7.1 Tax Calculation Test

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

X or SET

Enter any amount.

Displays the entered amount.

Depress [TXBL TL]

Displays the tax amount

(Tax 1 + Tax 2 + Tax 3 +

Tax 4) is displayed, issuing a receipt such as below.

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

021

7$;

7$;

7$;

7$;

Entered Amount

Tax 1 amount calculated

Tax 2 amount calculated

Tax 3 amount calculated

Tax 4 amount calculated

NOTE: The print or non-print status of each calculated tax amount can be programmed.

EO1-11152

7.1 Tax Calculation Test

7- 2

8. BAR CODE SYSTEM FOR EACH MODEL EO1-11152

8. BAR CODE SYSTEM FOR EACH MODEL

8. BAR CODE SYSTEM FOR EACH MODEL

Symbols of Bar Code Components (applicable to any of the following tables)

F ................. Flag Code

M ................ Merchandise Maker Code

I .................. Merchandise Item Code

X................. Other type of Item Code or Price Value

P................. Price Value

C/D ............. Check Digit (on the entire code)

C/DP........... Check Digit on Price

Bar Code Type Table

Read

Code

Type

Symbol

Marking

Method

Version Bar Code Components

1 UPC Source UPC-A F

1

F

2

M

1

M

2

M

3

M

4

M

5

I

1

I

2

I

3

I

4

I

5

C/D

Standard

1

= 0 fixed, F

2

= 0, 1, 3, 6 ~ 9)

2 UPC Source UPC-E F

2

X

1

X

2

X

3

X

4

X

5

X

6

C/D

(F

2

= 0 fixed, X

1

= 0 ~ 9, X

1

= 0: Not applicable to the Read Code Type 11)

The method of converting the shortened type into the standard type is determined by a program option.

Source EAN-13 F

1

F

2

M

1

M

2

M

3

M

4

M

5

I

1

I

2

I

3

I

4

I

5

C/D

JAN JAN-13 (F

Standard

1

F

2

= 30 ~ 97)

Source EAN-8 F

1

F

2

M

1

M

2

M

3

M

4

I

5

C/D

JAN JAN-8 (F

1

F

2

= 30 ~ 97)

Shortened

7

Coupon F

2

X

1

X

2

X

3

X

4

X

5

X

6

X

7

X

8

X

9

X

10

C/D

Standard = 0 fixed, F

2

= 5, X

9

X

10

= Coupon Code.)

Source Coupon F

1

F

2

X

1

X

2

X

3

X

4

X

5

X

6

X

7

X

8

X

9

X

10

C/D

JAN Standard

UPC In-store Non-PLU

1

F

2

= 98, 99) (X

8

X

9

X

10

is the coupon amount.)

Price 4 dig. C/DP. Item Code 5 dig.:

F

1

2 X

1

X

2

X

3

X

4

X

5

C/DP P

1

P

2

P

3

P

4

C/D

Price 5 dig. Item Code 5 dig.:

F

1

2 X

1

X

2

X

3

X

4

X

5

P

1

P

2

P

3

P

4

P

5

C/D

Price 4 dig. Item Code 6 dig.:

F

1

2 X

1

X

2

X

3

X

4

X

5

X

6

P

1

P

2

P

3

P

4

C/D

8 JAN

UPC

(F

1

F

2

= 02 fixed)

The processing type (selection of Bar Code Components) is programmable.

Non-PLU Price 4 dig. C/DP. Item Code 5 dig.:

F

1

F

2

X

1

X

2

X

3

X

4

X

5

C/DP P

1

P

2

P

3

P

4

C/D

9, 10

Non-PLU Price 5 dig. Item Code 5 dig.

F

1

F

2

X

1

X

2

X

3

X

4

X

5

P

1

P

2

P

3

P

4

P

5

C/D

Non-PLU Price 4 dig. Item Code 6 dig.

F

1

F

2

X

1

X

2

X

3

X

4

X

5

X

6

P

1

P

2

P

3

P

4

C/D

PLU F

1

F

2

X

1

X

2

X

3

X

4

X

5

X

6

X

7

X

8

X

9

X

10

C/D

(F

1

F

2

= 04, 10 ~ 29)

The processing type (selection of Bar Code Components) is programmable.

-- reserved --

UPC

2

X

1

X

2

X

3

X

4

X

5

X

6

C/D

(F

2

X

1

= 00 fixed; X

2

X

3

X

4

X

5

= 1000 ~ 7999; X

6

= 5 ~ 9)

8- 1

3. M/S LEVEL

OPERATOR’S GUIDE

EO1-11152

MA-1595-1 SERIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1- 1

3. HARDWARE DESCRIPTION ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3- 1

3.1 Operator Display Indications of Master-Satellite System---------------------------------------- 3- 1

4. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE -------------------- 4- 1

1. INTRODUCTION EO1-11152

1. INTRODUCTION

1. INTRODUCTION

Making the most of the functions of the previously described MA-1595 standalone, the MA-1595 can be developed into a master-satellite system.

For Master-Satellite, a Batch-consolidation or Scanning system of a maximum of 16 terminals can be built. By connecting a PC, the system can also be expanded into a transaction data capture system.

Operational functions on each terminal ECR basically stay the same as on a standalone ECR, except those deleted, changed, or added for this M/S system use which are described later.

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Satellite

Terminal

PC

TCP/IP

Master

Terminal

Remote Slip Printer

Scanner

Scale

EFT

RS-232C

Remote Slip Printer

Scanner

Scale

EFT

RS-232C

Satellite

Terminal

UDP

Backup Master

Terminal

Remote Slip Printer

Scanner

Scale

EFT

RS-232C

Remote Slip Printer

Scanner

Scale

EFT

RS-232C

Satellite

Terminal

Remote Slip Printer

Scanner

Scale

EFT

RS-232C

Batch-consolidation System: Max. 16 terminals

Master Terminal ... 1 unit

Backup Master Terminal

Satellite Terminal or

... 1 unit System including

... Max. 14 units Backup Master Terminal

Master Terminal

Satellite Terminal

... 1 unit System not including

... Max. 14 units Backup Master Terminal

Scanning System:

Remote Slip Printer:

Max. 4 terminals

TM-U295 (EPSON)

Scanner: PSC-6000/2500

Scale: SL-47

1- 1

3. HARDWARE DESCRIPTION EO1-11152

3.1 Operator Display Indications of Master-Satellite System

3. HARDWARE DESCRIPTION

3.1 Operator Display Indications of Master-Satellite System

„ Display Indications during In-line Services

The followings are displayed in the 16-digit dot windows, 10-digit 7-segment window, and IN-LINE Lamp of the Operator Display panel during in-line services.

< Master Terminal >

DPT X

Number of ECRs unserviced

( ( ) )

Blink

In-line Job No.

Mode Indication

ECR No. now serviced at the time of collecting read/reset data

TL ST

• IN-LINE Lamp

Illuminated

1) Illuminated during RTR declaration “ON”

2) Extinguished during RTR declaration “OFF”

3) Blinking during ULL operations

• Mode Indication

P

X

< Satellite Terminals or Backup Master Terminal >

Z

• IN-LINE Lamp

1) Illuminated during “Hold” condition

2) Extinguished after completing in-line services

3) Blinking during in-line services

„ Error

The following table shows the Error Codes and Messages to be displayed on in-line terminals, in addition to those displayed on Standalone ECRs.

IN-LINE ERROR CODE AND MESSAGE TABLE

(to be added to the table for the Standalone Level)

Error Message

(Standard Setting)

FILE BUSY

IRC CONNECT ERR

MASTER IS BUSY

PLEASE BACK UP

TRANS BUFF FULL

A designated file is already occupied by other terminal.

Transmission cannot be executed due to the connection error (Disconnection of the line, or Master Terminal’s power is OFF, etc.)

An inquiry file is being used.

RTR Declaration cannot be canceled due to the Backup Error

Satellite Transaction Buffer is full.

Cause of Error

3- 1

4. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE EO1-11152

4. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE

4. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING

PROCEDURE

The following is the key that can be installed on the Master Terminal of an in-line system, in addition to the standalone specifications, and the registering procedure using the key.

RTR

RTR (Register-to-Register) DECLARATION Key ([RTR])

„

By depressing the [RTR] key on the Master Terminal, various in-line jobs (DLLs, Consolidated Read/Reset

Report takings, etc.) can be performed.

PROCEDURE ON A MASTER TERMINAL FOR RTR DECLARATION

Mode Lock: SET, REG, X, Z, MGR or - /Anytime outside a sale

Depress [RTR]

NOTES: 1. While a PC job is under way ( a command of ULL, DLL, or Read/Reset from the PC), this RTR

Declaration is not possible. Similarly, while this RTR Declaration is on, no PC jobs are possible.

2. While the RTR Declaration is on, no transaction entries in “REG”, “MGR”, or “ - “ mode are possible.

3. While the RTR Declaration is on, no Backup Data Check is performed.

4. While the RTR Declaration is on, the following are jobs to be allowed:

• Programming Operations

• DLL Operations (DLL to Satellite Terminals)

• Consolidated Read/Reset Report takings

• Manual Copying of Backup Data

6. If the option “Auto Data Copying feature” is selected for Copying of Backup Data, the RTR

Declaration is not possible while a backup data update process is under way.

7. If the option “Compulsion of Data Sending to PC” is selected, the RTR Declaration is not possible until sending the reset data (the consolidation data) to PC is completed.

„ By depressing the [RTR] key on the Master Terminal when the RTR Declaration is on, the RTR Declaration

ON status is canceled.

PROCEDURE ON A MASTER TERMINAL FOR RTR DECLARATION CANCEL

Mode Lock: SET, REG, X, Z, MGR or - / RTR Declaration is ON

Depress [RTR]

NOTE: If the Backup Error Flag is ON (the standard error message is “PLEASE BACK UP”), it means that manual copying of Backup Data is required, and therefore the RTR Declaration Cancel is not accepted until copying is completed.

4- 1

4. M/S LEVEL

EO1-11152

MA-1595-1 SERIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

1. DAILY OPERATION FLOW -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1- 1

2. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE ---------------------------------------------------- 2- 1

2.1 Terminal Open Check ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2- 1

2.2 Terminal Designation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2- 2

2.3 Terminal Condition Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2- 3

3.1 Reservation Function ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3- 1

3.2 Report Reservation Print Format---------------------------------------------------------------------- 3- 3

3.3 Operations Relative To Reservation ----------------------------------------------------------------- 3- 4

4. READ AND RESET REPORTS --------------------------------------------------------------------- 4- 1

4.1 Terminal Reports------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4- 1

4.2 In-Line Reports -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4- 2

4.3 Operations After In-Line Report Takings ------------------------------------------------------------ 4- 9

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS ------------------------------------------------------------------- 5- 1

5.1 Programming Operations Common with Standalone ECR Level------------------------------ 5- 1

5.2 Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals ------------------------------------------- 5- 2

5.3 Verification of Programmed Data --------------------------------------------------------------------- 5- 5

6. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS ------------------------------------------------------ 6- 1

7.1 PLU Table Addition/Change/Deletion with DLL---------------------------------------------------- 7- 2

7.2 Department Preset Price Setting or Changing with DLL (Submode 72) --------------------- 7- 3

7.3 PLU Price Changing with DLL (Submode 73)------------------------------------------------------ 7- 4

8.1 PLU Inquiries ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8- 1

8.2 Customer File (Check Track) Inquiries -------------------------------------------------------------- 8- 1

8.3 Credit Card No. Inquiries to the Negative Check File -------------------------------------------- 8- 2

8.4 Cashier Occupy Inquiries ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8- 2

9. BACKUP FUNCTION ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9- 1

10. DATA CAPTURE FUNCTION --------------------------------------------------------------------- 10- 1

11. MASTER AND BACKUP MASTER ALTERNATION---------------------------------------- 11- 1

12. TRANSMISSION ERROR--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12- 1

12.1 Cause of Error ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12- 1

12.2 Error Display --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12- 1

12.3 Error Canceling Process ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 12- 2

13. OTHER OPERATIONS RELATING TO IN-LINE SERVICE ------------------------------- 13- 1

13.1 Time Out -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13- 1

13.4 Incomplete Ending-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13- 2

1. DAILY OPERATION FLOW EO1-11152

1. DAILY OPERATION FLOW

1. DAILY OPERATION FLOW

In a Master-Satellite System, a certain order of jobs on the Master and Satellite terminals are provided. If the necessary jobs are not proceeded in the correct order, sale entries may not be operated or report collections may not be possible. The following chart shows the basic daily operation flow on the Master and Satellite terminals.

MASTER TERMINAL SATELLITE TERMINALS

Turn ON the power of every ECR in the in-line system.

First turn ON the power of the Master terminal, and then the power of each

Satellite terminals.

Operate TERMINAL OPEN CHECK to check all the terminals are correctly connected (Chapter 2):

Mode Lock: X/RTR Declaration: ON

80 [AT/TL]

Operate DATE AND TIME DLL to synchronize the date and time of Satellite terminals to that of the Master terminal

(Chapter 6):

Mode Lock: SET/RTR Declaration: ON

505 [AT/TL]

STORE OPEN

Sign-ON, Sale Entries, Sign-OFF

Refer to the OPERATOR’S GUIDE for the Standalone Level.

Read (X) Report Takings on Individual Terminals

Refer to Section 5 in this manual and MANAGER’S GUIDE for the

Standalone Level.

In-line Read Report Takings on Master

Terminal.

Refer to Section 4.2 in this manual.

(To be continued on the next page.)

1- 1

1. DAILY OPERATION FLOW EO1-11152

1. DAILY OPERATION FLOW

(Continued from the preceding page.)

STORE CLOSE

(MASTER TERMINAL) (SATELLITE TERMINALS)

Sign OFF on all the terminals (including the Master Terminal) when all the sale entries for the day are over.

In-line Reset Report Takings on

Master Terminal. (Refer to Section 4.2.)

The HOLD condition of the terminal cannot be released for some reason, an

ENFORCED CLEAR OF HOLD CONDITION can be operated on individual terminals. (Refer to Section 4.3.)

CONSOLIDATED REPORT DATA READ

If programmed data changes are necessary:

PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS (Chapter 5)

DLL OPERATIONS (Chapter 6)

DEPARTMENT AND PLU MAINTENANCE (Chapter 7)

Turn OFF the power of every terminal to end the business for the day.

1- 2

2. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE EO1-11152

2.1 Terminal Open Check

2. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE

Before entering in-line service operations (In-line Report takings, DLLs, etc.), the following operations are available if necessary.

2.1 Terminal Open Check

This operation sends a dummy text to those terminals set in the TERMINAL CONNECTION TABLE, and prints out the Register Nos. of the disconnected terminals (i.e. terminals not responding).

CONDITION Any time outside a sale (operable on Master Terminal)

Master Terminal Receipt Print

When the check result is normal:

Prints the Report Name only.

When any error status is found:

Prints the Register Nos. of the terminals not connected properly, as well as the Report Name.

7( & 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

127B&211(&7

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

70

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

127B&211(&7

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

70

2- 1

2. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE EO1-11152

2.2 Terminal Designation

2.2 Terminal Designation

This operation can be performed before any in-line service operation. When this operation is skipped, no specific terminals are designated, i.e., the in-line service operations will be performed to all the terminals.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

RTR Declaration ON Status (i.e., the IN-LINE Lamp should be illuminated)

To be operated on the Master Terminal only.

[#] |Store/Register No.| [#] [AT/TL]

Enter the Store/Register No.

(Max. 6 digits) of the Terminal subject to the in-line service operations to follow.

Repeat for other terminals if more are subject to the in-line service operation.

NOTE: The Terminal Designation once declared by the above operation will be canceled by changing the position of the Mode Lock, or by RTR Declaration Cancel, or by turning OFF and ON the power of the terminal. The designation is automatically canceled on completion of the operation to follow or when a new designation is operated. ex.) To designate the following Terminal out of two terminals in the system:

Terminal ID No.3: Store/Register No. 333303 (IP Address: 192.168.0.251)

Mode Lock: SET (if operated before DLLs)

The RTR Declaration must be ON (i.e., the IN-LINE Lamp must be illuminated; if not, depress the [RTR] key to declare RTR status).

[#] 333303 [#] [AT/TL]

(Issues a receipt, printing the Store/Register Nos. of the terminals designated in the above operation.)

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

3

70

2- 2

2. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE EO1-11152

2.3 Terminal Condition Check

2.3 Terminal Condition Check

This operation checks the condition of the designated terminals, and prints out the status responded from the terminals.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale (operable on Master Terminal)

Master Terminal Receipt Print

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

70B&+(&.

2.

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

70

Status Symbol

OK: The terminal condition is normal.

?: No response (power-OFF, etc.)

BUSY: The terminal is busy

(during a sale, etc.).

Blank: Other statuses

2- 3

3. RESERVATION EO1-11152

3.1 Reservation Function

3. RESERVATION

This function is applied only to a system with the CVS spec. selected as the program option.

Performing the following reservations on the Master Terminal forces the Satellite Terminals to copy the relevant report data into the communication buffers. Therefore, the Master Terminal can consolidate report data of the

Satellite Terminals, and issue an in-line report even while the Satellite Terminals sign off, and perform sales entries.

TABLE OF RESERVATION OPERATIONS

RTR Declaration: ON

Report Name

COMBINATION REPORTS

• Combination 1 Read: Daily

Mode

Lock

X 600 [AT/TL]

Key Operation

• Combination 2 Read:

• Combination 3 Read:

• Combination 1 Reset:

Daily

Daily

Daily

X

X

Z

601 [AT/TL]

602 [AT/TL]

600 [AT/TL]

• Combination 2 Reset:

• Combination 3 Reset:

Daily

Daily

Z

Z

601 [AT/TL]

602 [AT/TL]

FINANCIAL REPORTS

• Financial Read:

• Financial Reset:

CASHIER REPORTS

(for the Floating Cashier feature)

• Individual Cashier Read:

• Individual Cashier Reset:

• All store All Cashier Read:

• All store All Cashier Reset:

Daily

Daily

Daily

Daily

Daily

Daily

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

603 [AT/TL]

603 [AT/TL]

604 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]

(2 digit manager-assign code)

604 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]

(2 digit manager-assign code)

604 [AT/TL]

604 [AT/TL]

(to be continued on next page)

3- 1

3. RESERVATION EO1-11152

3.1 Reservation Function

TABLE OF RESERVATION OPERATIONS (continued)

Report Name

SALESPERSON REPORTS (Daily only)

• All-store All Salesperson Read

• All-store All Salesperson Reset

CREDIT CARD COMPANY SALES

REPORTS

• Credit Card Company

Sales Read:

• Credit Card Company

Sales Reset:

Daily

GT

Daily

GT

DEPARTMENT GROUP REPORTS

(Read only)

• Department Group Read: Daily

RTR Declaration: ON

Mode

Lock

X

Z

X

Z

Z

X

X

605 [AT/TL]

605 [AT/TL]

606 [AT/TL]

706 [AT/TL]

606 [AT/TL]

706 [AT/TL]

608 [AT/TL]

Key Operation

MEDIA SALES AND IN-DRAWER READ

(Daily only)

HOURLY RANGE REPORTS

• Hourly Read (Daily only)

• Hourly Reset (Daily only)

DEPARTMENT REPORTS

• All Department Read:

• All Department Reset:

Daily

Daily

X

X

Z

X

Z

609 [AT/TL]

610 [AT/TL]

610 [AT/TL]

611 [AT/TL]

611 [AT/TL]

ALL MEDIA SALES TOTAL AND CASH-IN-

DRAWER READ (Daily only)

PLU REPORTS (For the feature “PLU to be inquired to the Center File.”)

(Daily only)

• All PLU Read

• All PLU Reset

• Zone PLU Read

• Zone PLU Reset

PLU GROUP REPORTS

• PLU Group Read:

• PLU Group Reset:

Daily

Daily

X

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

612 [AT/TL]

613 [AT/TL]

613 [AT/TL]

613 [#]

|Zone-start PLU Code|

[@/FOR]

|Zone-end PLU Code| [AT/TL]

613 [#]

|Zone-start PLU Code|

[@/FOR]

|Zone-end PLU Code| [AT/TL]

624 [AT/TL]

624 [AT/TL]

(to be continued on next page)

3- 2

3. RESERVATION EO1-11152

3.2 Report Reservation Print Format

TABLE OF RESERVATION OPERATIONS (continued)

RTR Declaration: ON

• All Files Read

• All Files Reset

Report Name

CUSTOMER FILE REPORTS

(for Check Track Memory type only)

• Zone Files Read

• Zone Files Reset

Mode

Lock

X

Z

X

Z

Key Operation

615 [AT/TL]

615 [AT/TL]

615 [#]

|Zone-start File Code|

[@/FOR]

|Zone-end File Code| [AT/TL]

615 [#]

|Zone-start File Code|

[@/FOR]

|Zone-end File Code| [AT/TL]

NOTES: 1. Reservation function is unavailable when the Satellite Terminals perform the transactions in “SET”,

X” and “Z” modes.

2. Reservation function is only an operation to copy report data into the communication buffer.

Therefore, actual report cannot be issued by this function. To issue a report, key operation to issue it is further necessary on the Master Terminal. Refer to the next chapter “4. READ AND

RESET REPORTS” regarding key operation to issue a report.

3. When Reservation operation is performed before the data is set in the communication buffer, “DT

R” will be printed. When the reservation reset is performed under the condition that the reset data is in the communication buffer, “DT Z” will be printed.

3.2 Report Reservation Print Format

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

5(6(59('

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

;;;;

;;;;

RTR Symbol

Reservation Symbol

Report Name

RTR Symbol

Register No. and Status

OK: Normal status

;;;;

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

-21(6 70

BUSY: The terminal is busy

Blank: Other statuses

DT_Z: Reset data exists

3- 3

3. RESERVATION EO1-11152

3.3 Operations Relative To Reservation

3.3 Operations Relative To Reservation

The following operations are available only to a system with the CVS spec. selected.

READ OF INFORMATION ALREADY COPIED IN COMMUNICATION BUFFER

This operation issues report names of which sales data have been already copied in the communication buffer.

NOTE: The following contents are printed.

• Distinction of report (Read or Reset)

• Transaction name

ENFORCED CLEAR OF COMMUNICATION BUFFER

This operation forcibly clears the content already copied in the communication buffer.

NOTE: This operation should be performed only when malfunction of PC or Master Terminal occurs.

Therefore, the memory content is not guaranteed if this operation is performed when a system is normal.

3- 4

4. READ AND RESET REPORTS EO1-11152

4.1 Terminal Reports

4. READ AND RESET REPORTS

4.1 Terminal Reports

Since most reports are taken as in-line reports on the Master Terminal, some of the reports which are available on the individual standalone ECR basis cannot be taken on Master or Satellite ECRs of the in-line system. The following are the reports which are listed in the MANAGER’S GUIDE for the standalone level but cannot be taken on any ECRs of the in-line system. Other reports not listed below can be taken even in the in-line system.

(Before taking those reports, however, please read the next section 4.2 IN-LINE REPORTS.)

TERMINAL REPORTS that cannot be taken on any ECRs of the in-line system

Report Name

CASHIER READ AND RESET REPORTS

(when adopting the Floating Cashier Feature)

• Individual Cashier Read

• Individual Cashier Reset

• All Cashier Read

• All Cashier Reset

PLU READ AND RESET REPORTS

(when programming PLU data in the Center File)

• Individual PLU Read

• Zone PLU Read

• Zone PLU Reset

• All PLU Read

• All PLU Reset

• Inactive PLU Read

CUSTOMER FILE READ REPORTS

(for Check Track Memory type only)

• Individual File Read

• Zone Files Read

• All Files Read

• Zero-balance Files Read

• Debit-balance Files Read

• Credit-balance Files Read

Report Name

CASHIER GT READ AND RESET REPORTS

(when adopting the Floating Cashier Feature)

• Individual Cashier GT Read

• Individual Cashier GT Reset

• All Cashier GT Read

• All Cashier GT Reset

PLU GT READ AND RESET REPORTS

(when programming PLU data in the Center File)

• Individual PLU GT Read

• Zone PLU GT Read

• Zone PLU GT Reset

• All PLU GT Read

• All PLU GT Reset

• Inactive PLU GT Read

4- 1

4. READ AND RESET REPORTS EO1-11152

4.2 In-Line Reports

4.2 In-Line Reports

WARNING!

When opening the cash drawer, be careful not to let the drawer hit any person.

4.2.1 In-Line Report Command Executions

Before taking in-line reports, please note the following:

1) In-line Reset Reports (as well as In-line Read Reports) can be taken on the Master Terminal as long as the

Satellite Terminals are in the idle state (“Signed OFF” condition in case of the cashier code entry type). To check status of all the terminals connected to the in-line, TERMINAL CONDITION CHECK can be operated

(refer to Chapter 2).

2) When In-line Reports are taken, the power of each Satellite Terminal must be turned ON but the Mode Lock can be in any positions.

The operation flow for taking In-line Reports is shown on the next page, and the table of In-line Reports is on the following pages.

The key operation for each In-line Report is the same as the corresponding terminal report available on the standalone ECR. However, the key operation can be executed only on the Master Terminal while the [RTR] key is turned on.

Conditions required on terminals for In-line Report takings:

Read/Reset Reports (Daily or GT)

Master Terminal: Any time outside a sale

Satellite Terminals: (NOTE below)

Lock Positions Required:

Master Terminal: Mode Lock: X/RTR Declaration: ON

Satellite Terminals: Any positions

NOTE: Conditions required on the Satellite Terminals for in-line report takings depend on the system features.

• Cashier code entry type with the CVS spec. selected ... Satellite Terminal during a Sign-OFF, Sign-

ON, and sales entries

• Cashier code entry type without the CVS spec. ... Satellite Terminal during a Sign-OFF, and Sign-

ON with no sales entries performed

• Cashier key type with the CVS spec. selected ... Satellite Terminal during idling, and sales entries

• Cashier key type without CVS spec. ... Satellite Terminal during idling

• When the CVS spec. is selected and there is no collected data, “NO-D” will be printed. When the collected data is not agreed, “NO-A” will be printed.

4- 2

4. READ AND RESET REPORTS EO1-11152

4.2 In-Line Reports

OPERATION FLOW OF IN-LINE READ OR RESET REPORTS

To be operated on the Master Terminal only

Designating

All Terminals

|Store/Register No.| of the terminal to be designated (max. 6 digits)

Repeat for all the terminals to be designated.

When the option “Individual Terminal

Data Report Issue” is selected.

(applicable to Financial Reports only)

Each Terminal’s Data

Print (from Master

Terminal)

Incomplete Ending:

Uncollected Terminal’s

Store/Register No.

Print

Also refer to Retry,

Suspending, and

Cancel operations.

Consolidated Data

Report

End

[#]

[#]

Designating Some Terminals

[AT/TL]

Report Taking Operation for Each Report (see the following pages)

Each Terminal’s Report Data Collection Process

In other cases

Refer to

Chapter 2.

Refer to the following pages.

Refer to

Chapter 13.

4- 3

4. READ AND RESET REPORTS

TABLE OF IN-LINE REPORT OPERATIONS

RTR Declaration: ON

Report Name

COMBINATION REPORTS

• Combination 1 Read:

• Combination 2 Read:

• Combination 3 Read:

• Combination 1 Reset:

• Combination 2 Reset:

Daily

Daily

Daily

Daily

• Combination 3 Reset:

FINANCIAL REPORTS

• Financial Read:

• Financial Reset:

CASHIER REPORTS

(for the Floating Cashier feature)

• Individual Cashier Read:

• Individual Cashier Reset:

• All store All Cashier Read:

• All store All Cashier Reset:

Daily

Daily

Daily

Daily

Daily

Daily

Daily

Daily

CASHIER REPORTS

(for the Non-Floating Cashier feature only)

• Indiv. Terminal All Cashier Read: Daily

• Indiv. Terminal All Cashier Reset: Daily

Mode

Lock

X

X

X

Z

Z

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

[AT/TL]

1 [AT/TL]

2 [AT/TL]

[AT/TL]

1 [AT/TL]

2 [AT/TL]

3 [AT/TL]

3 [AT/TL]

4 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]

(2-digit manager-assign code)

4 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]

(2-digit manager-assign code)

4 [AT/TL]

4 [AT/TL]

4 [AT/TL]

4 [AT/TL]

Key Operation

SALESPERSON REPORTS (Daily only)

• All-store All Salesperson Read

• All-store All Salesperson Reset

CREDIT CARD COMPANY SALES

REPORTS

• Credit Card Company Sales Read: Daily

• Credit Card Company Sales Reset: Daily

DEPARTMENT GROUP REPORTS

(Read only)

• Department Group Read: Daily

X

Z

X

Z

X

5 [AT/TL]

5 [AT/TL]

6 [AT/TL]

6 [AT/TL]

8 [AT/TL]

(to be continued on next page)

4- 4

EO1-11152

4.2 In-Line Reports

4. READ AND RESET REPORTS EO1-11152

4.2 In-Line Reports

TABLE OF IN-LINE REPORT OPERATIONS (continued)

RTR Declaration: ON

Report Name

MEDIA SALES AND IN-DRAWER READ

(Daily only)

HOURLY RANGE REPORTS

• Hourly Read (Daily only)

• Hourly Reset (Daily only)

DEPARTMENT REPORTS

• All Department Read: Daily

Mode

Lock

X

X

Z

X

9 [AT/TL]

10 [AT/TL]

10 [AT/TL]

11 [AT/TL]

Key Operation

• All Department Reset:

• Indiv. Department Read:

Daily

Daily

Z

X

11 [AT/TL]

(Process Reports; NOTE on the next page)

11 [#]

[DEPT] (or |Code| [DP#])

([ST])

Repeat for required departments.

[AT/TL] (to end)

ALL MEDIA SALES TOTAL AND CASH-IN-

DRAWER READ (Daily only)

PLU REPORTS (Reports marked with “*” are unavailable for the system with the feature

“PLU to be inquired to the Center File.”)

• All PLU Read: Daily

• All PLU Reset:

• Zone PLU Read:

• Zone PLU Reset:

• Individual PLU Read:

• Inactive PLU Read:

PLU GROUP REPORTS

• PLU Group Read:

• PLU Group Reset:

Daily

Daily

Daily

Daily

Daily

Daily

Daily

Z

X

X

X

Z

X

X

X

Z

12 [AT/TL]

13 [AT/TL]

13 [AT/TL]

13 [#]

|Zone-start PLU Code|

[@/FOR]

|Zone-end PLU Code| [AT/TL]

13 [#]

|Zone-start PLU Code|

[@/FOR]

|Zone-end PLU Code| [AT/TL]

(Process Reports; NOTE on the next page)

13 [#]

|PLU Code| [PLU]

([ST]) [AT/TL]

Repeat for required PLUs.

(Process Reports; NOTE on the next page)

13 [#]

0 [AT/TL]

24 [AT/TL]

24 [AT/TL]

(to be continued on next page)

4- 5

4. READ AND RESET REPORTS EO1-11152

4.2 In-Line Reports

TABLE OF IN-LINE REPORT OPERATIONS (continued)

RTR Declaration: ON

Report Name

Mode

Lock

Reports Collection Required before Process

Report takings

(CONSOLIDATION MEMORY CAPTURE: NOTE 1)

Key Operation

CUSTOMER FILE READ

(for Check Track Memory type only)

• All Files Read

• All Files Reset

• Zone Files Read

• Zone Files Reset

• Individual File Read

• Zero-balance Files Read

• Credit-balance Files Read

• Debit-balance Files Read

X

Z

X

Z

X

X

X

X

15 [AT/TL]

15 [#]

|Zone-start File Code|

[@/FOR] |Zone-end File Code| [AT/TL]

15 [#]

|File Code| [@/FOR]

[AT/TL]

15 [#]

0 [AT/TL]

15 [#]

1 [AT/TL]

15 [#]

2 [AT/TL]

NOTE: When the “Process Report” is marked, the report can only be taken after taking another report which consolidates the corresponding data to be based on. For further details, see the table and descriptions below.

PROCESS REPORTS AND BASE REPORT DATA

The following table shows which process reports are available after which report data collections.

Process Reports available

All Department Read Daily

or

All Department Reset Daily

All Department Read GT

or

All Department Reset GT

Any of the following PLU reports (NOTE 2)

All PLU Read Daily

Zone PLU Read Daily

All PLU Reset Daily

Zone PLU Reset Daily

Any of the following PLU reports (NOTE 2)

All PLU Read GT

Zone PLU Read GT

All PLU Reset GT

Zone PLU Reset GT

Individual Department Read Daily

Individual Department Read GT

Individual PLU Read Daily

Inactive PLU Read Daily

Individual PLU Read GT

Inactive PLU Read GT

NOTES: 1. CONSOLIDATION MEMORY CAPTURE: When an in-line read or reset report is taken on the

Master Terminal, the consolidated data is automatically stored in the Consolidation Memory of the

Master Terminal. The consolidated data stored there is not only used as the data for a Process

Report but also sent to the PC by a command from the PC when a PC is connected.

2. The process reports will be outputted based on the report data previously collected. For example, when an “Inactive PLU Read” report is taken after a “Zone PLU Read”, only the inactive PLUs in the designated zone will be printed on the Inactive Read Report. (Only when the PLU is in a local file, a process report is printed. In this case, collection of data is required beforehand.)

4- 6

4. READ AND RESET REPORTS EO1-11152

4.2 In-Line Reports

3. When individual department reading (daily/GT) is performed, press the [OPEN] key before performing all department reading (daily/GT). Then, only the consolidated data is created to output the process report.

4.2.2 In-Line Report Print Format

IN-LINE REPORT TYPE

An in-line report can be classified into the following five types.

1. Collects data from each terminal to print a consolidation result:

All Salesperson, Credit Card Company Sales, Department Group, Hourly Range, All Department, All/Zone

PLU (Local File), and PLU Group Reports

2. Collects data from each terminal to print a collection result per terminal:

Indiv. Terminal All Cashier Report (Non-floating Cashier)

3. Collects data from each terminal to print a collection result per terminal and then print the consolidation result:

Financial, Media Sales & In-drawer and All Media Sales Total & Cash-in-drawer Reports

4. Creates a process data using consolidated data and prints a report:

Indiv. Department, Indiv. PLU, and Inactive PLU Reports

5. Prints data in the center file possessed by the master terminal:

Indiv./All Cashier (Floating Cashier), All/Zone/Indiv./Inactive PLU (Center File), and All/Indiv./Inactive/

Debit/Credit Customer File Reports

The print format of each report is basically the same as the format of the corresponding standalone terminal report except that some indications are additionally printed as in-line operation job IDs. The following is print format example of the in-line report type 1 described above.

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ RTR Symbol

Report Name (When designating a zone, a zone range is printed.)

=

=

=

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

;;;;

;;;;

-21(6 70

For print items, refer to the similar report described in the Standalone section.

Register No., Reset Count (on Reset Report only)

RTR Symbol

Un finished register No. and status

BUSY: The terminal is busy

Blank: Other statuses

NO_D: No consolidation data exists.

NO_A: Discord of consolidation data

Consecutive No., Current Time

Only for the CVS spec.

4- 7

4. READ AND RESET REPORTS EO1-11152

4.2 In-Line Reports

JOURNAL INDICATIONS ON INDIVIDUAL TERMINALS (when report data is collected)

Read Report Collection Indication

∗ ; 70 ∗

Time of data collection

Report ID No. (X is replaced by Z on reset reports.)

∗ =

=

70 ∗

70

Reset Report Collection Indication

Time of Clear Command receiving

JOURNAL INDICATIONS FOR A SYSTEM WITH THE CVS SPEC. SELECTED

The following journal prints indicate that data in each table has copied into the communication buffer.

(1) Copy of daily read data has completed.

; 70

Time of copy completion

Report ID No.

(2) Copy of daily reset data has completed.

=

=

70

70

Clear of the table has completed

Time of copy completion and clear completion

Report ID No.

(3) Copy of GT read data has completed.

; 70

Time of copy completion

Report ID No.

(4) Copy of GT reset data has completed.

=

=

70

70 Clear of the table has completed

Time of copy completion and clear completion

Report ID No.

4- 8

4. READ AND RESET REPORTS EO1-11152

4.3 Operations After In-Line Report Takings

4.3 Operations After In-Line Report Takings

The following operations are available after taking in-line reports.

CONSOLIDATED REPORT DATA READ (REPRINT)

This operation issues the report data which is remaining in the Consolidation Memory of the Master Terminal.

When no consolidated data are remaining in the memory, this read operation is unavailable.

ENFORCED CLEAR OF HOLD CONDITION (on Individual Terminals)

This can be operated when the HOLD condition on a terminal can by no means be cleared because the terminal cannot receive a Clear Command from the Master Terminal for some reason (the Master Terminal becomes down, etc. before completion of the reset report data collection).

On operating this, the HOLD condition is cleared, and allowing any key-in operations. However, this operation is regarded as an emergent measure to cope with such a trouble as the Master Terminal becomes down, etc. and thus no other solutions can be chosen, because the sales data memory of those reports can no longer be collected by the Master Terminal.

4- 9

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

5.1 Programming Operations Common with Standalone ECR Level

Submode

No.

6

8

15

1

2

4

5

20

25

26

27

31

35

40

No

Submode

The system should be programmed fully by your local TOSHIBA TEC representative at the time of delivery according to the user’s requirements so that daily operations can immediately start. However, some data must be added or changed daily or in a longer period. Since the volume of programming contents for the system is too large, this chapter and the following two chapters are provided as guide lines of the user’s daily programming and maintenance operations. If there are any unclear points or program data other than listed here must be changed or added, please contact your TOSHIBA TEC representative. Please also note that some programming operations introduced in the Standalone Level are modified or not available on in-line terminals.

5.1 Programming Operations Common with Standalone ECR Level

The following is the table of programming operations which are introduced in the Manager’s Guide for the

Standalone Level and can be operated on in-line terminals as well, with the Submode No. and operation sequence unchanged. However, on in-line terminals, these are usually operated on the Master Terminal only and down-line-loaded (DLLed) to all the Satellite Terminals. Therefore, if any program data is changed, a DLL is further necessary to load the new data (after the change) to all the Satellite Terminals (to be described in Chapter

6).

PROGRAMMING JOB LIST

Master

*1

Satellite

: Programming job to be available when the [RTR] key is activated on the Master Terminal

*2

: Programming job to be available on the Backup Master Terminal and the Satellite Terminal when the

[RTR] key is off on the Master Terminal

O: Available

Programming Job

Store Name/Message and Commercial Message Programming

Cashier Code and Name Programming

PLU Table Programming

Time Setting or Adjustment

Date Setting or Adjustment

Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys

Customer File Code (Check Track No.) and Name Programming

Salesperson Code and Name Programming

Link PLU Table Programming

Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting

PLU Preset-code Key Setting

Display Message Programming

Negative Amount Key Limit Amount Setting

PLU Price Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Amount Setting

Department Preset Price Setting or Changing

PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing,

Whole Package Quantity Changing

%+ and %- Preset Rate Setting

Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers

Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting

Tax Table Programming

Store/Register No. Setting

Terminals

Master

*1

Satellite

*2

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

5- 1

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

5.2 Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals

5.2 Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals

5.2.1 Terminal Connection Table Setting (Submode 69)

This submode is required for In-line services. The In-line ID No., Register No. and IP Address of each terminal

(including the Master Terminal) can be programmed here.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

OPERATION

|In-line ID No.| [ST]

2 digits (01 to 16)

( NOTES 1 & 2 below)

*

Max. 6 digits

0 to 999999

( NOTE 2 below)

12 digits

( NOTE 3 below)

Repeat for other terminals to be connected, including the Master Terminal itself. (Max. 16 terminals)

[AT/TL]

* For sequentially programming Inline ID Nos, the Inline ID specification can be skipped.

NOTES: 1. In-line ID No.: Master Terminal ... 01 (fixed)

Backup Master Terminal (if connected) ... 02 (fixed)

Satellite Terminals ... 03 to 16 (max. 14 terminals)

2. The In-line ID No. and Register No. of each terminal to be set here must be the same as those programmed for the terminal in IN-LINE TERMINAL ID SETTING (Submode 77) in this chapter and STORE/REGISTER NO. SETTING (no submode) in Chapter 6 of the Programming Manual for stand-alone level.

3. IP Address: 12 digits (000.. 000 to 255.. 255) ex) To set the IP Address 192.168.0.252……….Enter 192168000252

4. To delete an individual terminal from the Terminal Connection Table, enter 0 in place of the Inline ID No., then enter Register No..

69 |Store/Register No.| [#] [AT/TL]

5. To delete the entire Terminal Connection Table once set, operate:

6. If a deleting operation (individual or entire deletion) is performed, the files occupied by the deleted terminal(s) (such as Floating Cashier File, etc.) is canceled. Therefore, a deleting operation should be performed only when the system is to be re-built or a terminal is to be detached from the system.

Example)

To set Master Terminal and Satellite Terminal in the Connection

Table (total of two terminals in the in-line system):

Master Terminal In-line ID No. 1 Register No. 111101 IP Address 192.168.0.251

Satellite Terminal In-line ID No. 3 Register No. 333303 IP Address 192.168.0.253 enter 69, depress [@/FOR].

192168000251 (Master IP Address)

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

192168000253 (Satellite IP Address)

[AT/TL] (Complete this Submode)

5- 2

681

3

70

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

5.2 Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals

5.2.2 In-line ID and LAN Network Setting (Submode 77)

This submode is available for in-line terminals (including the master and backup master terminals). It must be operated separately on each terminal since the In-line ID should vary from terminal to terminal. The data sent in this submode is used as the in-line address of the terminal for in-line service operations.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale for Master or Satellite

| In-line ID | [#]

Assign No. of 01 to 16

01: Master Terminal

02: Backup Master

03 to 16: Satellite Terminals

[AT/TL]

| Network Status | [#]

Enter a maximum of eight-digit number composed of Bit Nos whose status must be selected to the “SET” status in the Network

Status Table. ( NOTE 1 on the next page)

| IP Address | [#]

12 digits

( NOTE 2 on the next page)

| IP Address of Master Terminal | [#]

12 digits

( NOTE 2 on the next page)

| Subnet Mask | [#]

12 digits

( NOTE 2 on the next page)

| Default Gateway | [#]

12 digits

( NOTE 2 on the next page)

5- 3

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

5.2 Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals

NOTES: 1. Network Status Table

0 No Status

1

2

3

4

5 Default Gateway

6 Subnet Mask auto-setting

7

8

Used

Ineffective

Not used

Effective

In the above table, only Code 5 and Code 6 can be set.

Code 5: This code should be set before performing Default Gateway setting (6 [ST]).

Code 6: When this code is set, the Subnet Mask setting (5 [ST]) will be effective.

When this code is reset, the Subnet Mask auto-setting will be performed as follows.

IP Address first section value Subnet Mask

0 to 127

128 to 191

192 to 223

255. 0. 0.0

255.255. 0.0

255.255.255.0

2. Self IP Address, IP Address of Master terminal, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway are programmed with 12-digit value (000..000 to 255..254), respectively.

Example) To program “192.168.0.250”, enter 192168000250.

Initial setting values of the Self IP Address and the Default Gateway are as shown below.

Self IP Address: 192.168.0.254

3. Never assign the same In-line ID to terminals on the same In-line system.

Example) To assign Terminal ID No. 4 to the Terminal used as the Satellite Terminal of the in-line system:

In-line ID No.: 04

Network Status: No Status

192.168.0.200

IP Address of Master Terminal: 192.168.0.250

Subnet Mask:

Default Gateway:

255.255.255.0 (Default)

192.168.0.1 (Default) enter 77, depress [@/FOR].

1 (In-line ID No.)

7(& 6725(

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

681 4 [ST] 192168000250 [#] (Master IP Address)

[AT/TL] (Complete this Submode)

70

5- 4

5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS EO1-11152

5.3 Verification of Programmed Data

5.3 Verification of Programmed Data

The programmed data can be read for verification purposes.

CONDITION

Any time outside a sale (Sign OFF required under Cashier Signing Method)

(Operable on any type of Terminal (Master, Backup Master, Satellites))

[AT/TL]

Submode No. at programming

69: Terminal Connection Table Setting

77: In-line ID and LAN Network Setting

NOTE: Verifications listed in the stand-alone level are also available on all the terminals of the in-line system.

5- 5

6. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS

6. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS

In an in-line system (Master-Satellite system), most programming data are set on the Master Terminal and downline-loaded (DLL) to Satellite Terminals. The DLL operations introduced in this chapter are pure DLLs, i.e. merely loading the data programmed in the Master Terminal to Satellite Terminals. DLLs automatically performed with programmed data changes are introduced in the next chapter (Chapter 7). If any other DLLs not introduced in this and next chapters are required, ask your TOSHIBA TEC representative. Please also note that TERMINAL

DESIGNATION (see Chapter 2) can be operated prior to a specific DLL operation, to designate Satellite

Terminals that receive the DLL.

DLL JOB LIST

Submode

No.

501

502

504

Store Name/Message and Commercial Message Programming

Cashier Code and Name Programming

PLU Table Programming

DLL Job Remarks

508

520

525

526

527

531

535

540

569

500

Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys

Salesperson Code and Name Programming

Link PLU Table Programming

Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting

PLU Preset-code Key Setting

Display Message Programming

Negative Amount Key Limit Amount Setting

PLU Price Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Amount Setting

Terminal Connection Table Setting

%+ and %- Preset Rate Setting

Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers

Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting

Tax Table Programming

NOTE: DLL is possible only when the non-floating cashier feature is used.

NOTE below

6- 1

6. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS EO1-11152

6. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS

CONDITION

OPERATION

Terminals including the Master: Any time outside a sale (NOTE 1 below)

(Sign-OFF condition is not necessary required for the Code Entry Method)

Satellite Terminals: Any position if the power is ON

Master Terminal: Mode Lock: SET

RTR Declaration: ON

[AT/TL] |5XX|

No.

PRINT FORMAT OF DLL OPERATIONS

Master Terminal Receipt

3($&+ '5,9(

3+21(

2SHQ DP WR SP

&ORVHG HYHU\ :HGQHVGD\

Satellite Terminals Journal

∗ 3;; 70 ∗

Time of receiving the DLL

681 5xx = Submode No. of the specific DLL operation

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

3;;

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

;;;;

;;;;

Un finished register No. and status

BUSY: The terminal is busy

Blank: Other statuses

;;;;

70

NOTES: 1. As for a system with the CVS spec. selected, DLL is unavailable when the Satellite Terminals perform sales data copy into the communication buffers.

2. For the Satellite Terminals being received the DLL data, the item entry is prohibited. (HOLD status)

6- 2

7. DEPARTMENT AND PLU MAINTENANCE EO1-11152

7. DEPARTMENT AND PLU MAINTENANCE

7. DEPARTMENT AND PLU MAINTENANCE

In this chapter, adding, changing, or deleting operations related to Department Table and PLU Table program data are described. These are operated on the Master Terminal only.

• For a system with the feature “PLU not to be inquired” selected

All of these operations are immediately loaded into Satellite Terminals.

• For a system with the feature “PLU to be inquired” selected

PLU program data are immediately programmed in the center file of the Master Terminal, and Department

Table data are immediately loaded into Satellite Terminals.

TABLE OF DEPARTMENT AND PLU MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS

Mode Submode page

PLU TABLE ADDITION/CHANGE/DELETION WITH DLL............................... SET/RTR ....... 63 ........... 7-2

DEPARTMENT PRESET PRICE SETTING OR CHANGING WITH DLL........ SET/RTR ....... 72 ........... 7-3

PLU PRICE CHANGE WITH DLL .................................................................... SET/RTR ....... 73 ........... 7-4

7- 1

7. DEPARTMENT AND PLU MAINTENANCE EO1-11152

7.1 PLU Table Addition/Change/Deletion with DLL

7.1 PLU Table Addition/Change/Deletion with DLL

• For a system with the feature “PLU not to be inquired” selected:

The data entered on the Master Terminal is immediately loaded into the Satellite Terminals, item by item.

• For a system with the feature “PLU to be inquired” selected:

The data entered on the Master Terminal is immediately programmed in the center file owned by the Master Terminal itself.

CONDITION

All the terminals: After PLU daily and GT Resets (when the feature “PLU not be inquired” is selected)

Master Terminal: Any time outside a sale (when the feature “PLU to be inquired” is selected)

[@/FOR] |Address

Barcode Scanning

|PLU Code| for sequential-coded item only

Address 1: Link Department

(1 to 99)

Address 2: PLU Name

Max. 16 characters

Address 3: Preset Price

3

Repeat for

(Max. 6 digits) other PLUs.

Address 4: Status Code 1

[PLU]

[ST]

Address 5: Status Code 2

Address 6: Tax Status

(Max. 4 digits)

Repeat for any address within the same PLU by re-entry for correction.

Address 7: Unit Price of Individual Split Package

Address 8: Whole Package Quantity

(Max. 6 digits)

(Max. 2 digits)

Address 9: PLU Group No.

(1 to 99; 0 to reset)

Address 10: Link-PLU Table No.

(1 to 99; 0 to reset)

Address 11: Tare Table No.

(1 to 9; 0 to reset)

Address 12: Unit Weight Code

(1 to 11; 0 to reset)

Address 13: Mix & Match Group No.

(1 to 255; 0 to reset)

Address 14: Tare 2 Rate

(0.01 to 99.99%; 0 to reset)

Address 15: Dollar Discount/Extra Charge Code

(1 to 99; 0 to reset)

[AT/TL] (To complete this submode.)

Operation procedure surrounded by this line is the same as the operation in Submode 4.

7- 2

7. DEPARTMENT AND PLU MAINTENANCE EO1-11152

7.2 Department Preset Price Setting or Changing with DLL (Submode 72)

Deletion

CONDITION

The sales data of the required PLUs are zero and all terminals are outside a sale, programming, or report taking operations. (when the feature “PLU not to be inquired” is selected.)

The sale data of the required PLUs are zero and any time outside a sale for Master.

(when the feature “PLU to be inquired” is selected)

[ITEM CORR] | PLU code | [PLU] [ST] [AT/TL]

Repeatable for other PLUs to be deleted.

NOTES: 1. Up to 100 PLUs can be added/changed/deleted once.

2. The DLL is possible while a sales transaction is being performed in the Satellite Terminal.

7.2 Department Preset Price Setting or Changing with DLL (Submode 72)

This submode is used to newly set or change a preset price to required departments, and loads the price data into Satellite Terminals.

CONDITION Any time outside a sale

| New Preset Price | [DEPT]

Max. 6 digits; 0 to 999999 (Department Preset Code Key)

(result: $0.00 to $9999.99)

[AT/TL]

| Dept. Code | [DP#]

Max. 2 digits; 1 to 99

Repeatable for other departments

*

| New Preset Price | [#]

Max. 6 digits; 0 to 999999

(result: $0.00 to $9999.99)

* For sequentially programming the department,

the Dept Code specification can be skipped. designated terminals, makes the terminals HOLD condition, and executes DLL. After DLL is completed, it sends a DLL-end command to each terminal and releases the HOLD condition.

2. When zero is entered as the New Preset Price value, the department is set with a zero price.

When the new Preset Price entry is skipped and the [DEPT] or [#] is simply depressed, it will be an open-price department.

7- 3

7. DEPARTMENT AND PLU MAINTENANCE EO1-11152

7.3 PLU Price Changing with DLL (Submode 73)

7.3 PLU Price Changing with DLL (Submode 73)

This submode is used to change prices of PLUs existent in the PLU Table files, and into immediately load the data into Satellite Terminals.

CONDITION

Any time outside a sale for Master or Satellite.

(only when the feature “PLU not to be inquired” is selected)

73 [@/FOR]

Barcode Scanning

| PLU code | [PLU]

Repeatable from here for sequentially programming

PLU codes.

Can be skipped (for non-split Pricing type or when Whole Package Quantity is 1.)

| New Whole Package Quantity | [ST]

Max. 2 digits; 0 to 99

| New Preset Price |

Max. 6 digits; 0 to 999999

(result: $0.00 to $9999.99) to make open-price PLU

Repeat for other PLUs

[#] [AT/TL] designated terminals.

2. A maximum of 100 PLUs’ prices can be changed in one operation sequence of this submode.

3. When zero is entered as the New Preset Price value, the PLU is set with a zero price. When the

New Preset Price entry is skipped and the [#] is simply depressed, it will be an open-price PLU.

7- 4

8. INQUIRIES EO1-11152

8.1 PLU Inquiries

8. INQUIRIES

This chapter describes various inquiries made from each terminal to the Master Terminal and affect data (sales data updating).

8.1 PLU Inquiries

When the feature “PLUs to be inquired” is selected and a PLU is entered in a sale (entered manually or through a barcode) on each terminal, the terminal inquires the PLU to the Master Terminal. The inquired Master Terminal searches the PLU code in the PLU Main Table and the PLU Additional Table.

When the PLU exists, the Master Terminal responds the price, name, and other required data to the inquiring terminal.

When the applicable PLU code does not exist in the Master Terminal, the message “CODE ERROR” (standard program; programmable) is displayed on the inquiring terminal.

PLU URGENT MAINTENANCE

When the inquired PLU code does not exist in the Master Terminal, the PLU can be programmed into the Master

Terminal (and the Backup Master Terminal) along with its sale entry on the terminal by entering the linked

Department and the price. The PLU thus entered is temporarily programmed in the PLU Additional Table.

AFFECT

When a PLU entry is determined on a terminal, the terminal sends an AFFECT text to the Master Terminal (and

Backup Master Terminal), and updates the sales data of the Master Terminal (and Backup Master Terminal).

NOTE: When the PLU Urgent Maintenance is not possible resulting from the PLU Additional File is full, the error message “PROGRAM ERROR” (standard program; programmable) is displayed on the inquiring terminal.

8.2 Customer File (Check Track) Inquiries

When the feature “Customer File (Check Track)” (instead of PB Manual Entry) is selected and a PICK UP

BALANCE (by [PICK UP BAL]) is entered on a terminal, the terminal inquires the entered Customer File Code to the Master Terminal. The inquired Master Terminal searches the Customer File Code in the Customer File

Table. When the Customer File Code exists, the Master Terminal responds the name and the previous balance of the Customer File to the inquiring terminal.

NEW CUSTOMER FILE INQUIRIES

When a NEW CUSTOMER FILE (by [CODE OPEN] key) is entered on a terminal, the terminal inquires the new

Customer File code entered to the Master Terminal. The Master Terminal confirms that the inquired Customer

File code does not exist, then adds it to the Customer File table, and responds to the inquiring terminal that the code has been additionally set. (If a Backup Master is connected, the code inquiry to and additional setting in the

Backup Master Terminal occur at the same time.)

AFFECT

When a Customer File entry is determined on a terminal, the terminal sends an AFFECT text to the Master

Terminal (and Backup Master Terminal), and updates the sales data of the Master Terminal (and Backup Master

Terminal).

NOTES:

1. When the applicable file code does not exist on a Customer File Code inquiry (by [PICK UP BAL]) or when the applicable file code exists on a New Customer File Code inquiry (by [CODE OPEN]), the message “CODE

ERROR” (standard program; programmable) is displayed on the inquiring terminal.

2. When the addition of new customer file code is not possible resulting from the Customer File is full, the error message “PROGRAM ERROR” (standard program; programmable) is displayed on the inquiring terminal.

8- 1

8. INQUIRIES EO1-11152

8.3 Credit Card No. Inquiries to the Negative Check File

8.3 Credit Card No. Inquiries to the Negative Check File

When the “Negative Card Check” feature is selected by program option, each terminal inquires to the Master

Terminal whether the entered Credit Card No. is acceptable or not. The Master Terminal, thus inquired, searches the Card No. in the Negative Card File.

When the applicable Card No. exists in the Negative Card File, the Master Terminal responds to the inquiring terminal the response message “CALL MANAGER” (standard program; programmable) displayed in the Dotdisplay Windows with the Error Status Code (programmable) in the 7-segment Windows on the inquiring terminal to indicate that the Card No. is not acceptable.

8.4 Cashier Occupy Inquiries

When the “Floating Cashier” feature is selected and a Cashier Code is entered on a terminal, the terminal inquires the cashier code corresponding to cashier code entered to the Master Terminal. The Master Terminal searches the Cashier Table of the Cashier No. in the Cashier File.

When the the Cashier No. exists and its table is not occupied by any other terminal, the Master Terminal makes the cashier in the occupied status and sends the cashier table to the inquiring terminal.

When the Cashier No. does not exist in the Master Terminal’s Cashier File, the Master Terminal responds the message “CODE ERROR” (standard program; programmable) to the inquiring terminal. When the Cashier Table is occupied by another terminal, the message “OCCUPY” (standard program; programmable) is responded instead.

AFFECT

When a sale entry is determined (i.e. finalized) on a terminal, the terminal sends AFFECT text to the Master

Terminal (and Backup Master Terminal) and updates the sales data (in the Cashier Table) of the Master Terminal

(and Backup Master Terminal).

CASHIER CANCEL INQUIRES (OCCUPY CANCEL)

When a Sign-OFF is operated on a terminal, the terminal inquires a CASHIER CANCEL to the Master Terminal.

The Master Terminal cancels the occupied status of the applicable cashier.

8- 2

9. BACKUP FUNCTION EO1-11152

9. BACKUP FUNCTION

9. BACKUP FUNCTION

(ONLY WHEN THE BACKUP MASTER IS CONNECTED)

(1) Function

• By connecting the Backup Master Terminal, the various files stored in the Master Terminal can be backed up.

• The terminal assigned to ID No. 2 will function as a Backup Master Terminal. By programming ID No. 2 in the terminal connection table and downloading this data to each terminal, the system will function as a system in which the Backup Master Terminal is connected.

• By changing terminal ID from 2 to 1, the Backup Master Terminal will function as the Master Terminal.

< Files to be Backed Up >

PLU Main Table

(When the PLU inquiry function is used)

PLU Additional Table

(When the PLU inquiry function is used)

Link PLU Table

(When the PLU inquiry function is used)

Cashier Table

(When the floating cashier system is used)

Customer File (Check Track) Table

Negative Card Table

Program data

Sales data

Program data

Sales data

Program data

Program data

Sales data

Program data

Sales data

Program data

NOTES: 1. Data capture (DC) transaction files are not backed up.

2. The tables (center files) managed by the Master Terminal and used by each terminal via inquiries and PC transmission information tables are backed up.

• Sales data is backed up on a real-time basis.

When sales data of the Master Terminal is updated, sales data of the Backup Master Terminal is updated at the same time.

• Backup data check function:

Correspondence between the center files and backup data is checked every certain period of time.

• Backup data update process:

When an error occurs in backup data, the following processing methods can be selected according to the program option setting.

(1) Automatic data copy

When the version of the center file stored in the Master Terminal is different from that stored in the

Backup Master Terminal, registration jobs are automatically prohibited, the backup data is properly exchanged. While updating the backup data, each inquiry from the terminals may result in a

“MASTER IS BUSY” error.

(2) Manual data copy

When the version of the center file stored in the Master Terminal is different from that of data stored in the Backup Master Terminal, the Master Terminal gives a short beep at the timing of issuing the long receipt to warn that the data is not backed up properly. The operator should update the backup data manually.

9- 1

9. BACKUP FUNCTION EO1-11152

9. BACKUP FUNCTION

(2) Procedure

1) Changing Program Data (DLL from the PC)

DLL Data

PC

Response

M

Backup Data

Response

BM

• When various center files from the PC are received via DLL, the Master Terminal backs up program data and sales data of the Backup Master Terminal automatically and sends the result to the PC.

2) Changing Program Data (Operated on the Master Terminal)

Programming

Operation

M

• When various center files are being programmed on the Master Terminal, the backup error flag of the relevant file is turned on. (At this time, backup data is not updated.)

* For details about the backup error flag, refer to 5) Backup Error Flag.

* For an explanation of the backup data update process, refer to 6) Backup Data Update Process.

3) Updating Sales Data

• For details about updating sales data, refer to the explanation of each of the control functions described in

Chapter 7.

4) Checking Backup Data

M

Version Request

Version Data

BM

• The Master Terminal sends the version request command to the Backup Master Terminal every certain period of time and receives version information about the backup data.

• The Master Terminal checks correspondence between the version information received from the Backup

Master Terminal and the center files (stored in the Master). If an abnormality is found, the backup error flag is turned on.

• When a master job is being performed on the Master Terminal ([RTR] key turned on), or a PC job is being performed backup data is not checked.

5) Backup Error Flag

• When there is any difference between the data stored in the Master Terminal and the backup data stored in the Backup Master Terminal, the Master Terminal turns on the backup error flag of the file in which a difference was found.

• There are following five cases when the backup error flag is turned on.

1. The Master Terminal changes the programming of the center files.

2. A version error is found at the backup data check.

3. The backup job fails after the center file has been downloaded from the PC.

4. Updating of the backup data fails after the center files have been reset.

5. Mergence of backup data is not correctly performed by PLU merge operation

(when the feature “PLU to be inquired” is selected).

9- 2

9. BACKUP FUNCTION EO1-11152

9. BACKUP FUNCTION

• While the backup error flag is on, the following operation is performed.

1. The Master Terminal gives a short beep at the timing when the long receipt is printed to warn that a backup error has occurred.

2. The RTR declaration cancel operation results in compulsory manual data copy error. (The error indication “PLEASE BACK UP” is displayed.)

In this case, the RTR declaration is not canceled until the manual data copy operation is performed.

• There are two timings cases the backup error flag is turned off.

1. The backup data is properly backed up according to the backup data update process.

2. The Backup Master Terminal (ID No. 2) is deleted from the terminal connection table.

6) Backup Data Update Process

(This is a process required when the backup data stored in the Backup Master Terminal is not updated properly due to an error.)

Backup Data

M BM

Response

• The method processing backup error is selected according to the program option setting. Even if the automatic data copy operation is selected, data copy can be performed manually.

1. Automatic data copy (program option)

When the backup error flag is on (or turned on), the Master Terminal automatically sends to the Backup

Master Terminal the file in which the error has occurred, and updates the backup data.

2. Manual data copy (program option)

The backup data is updated by the manual operations of the operator.

* When the backup data is being updated, inquiries from terminals may result in a “MASTER IS BUSY” error.

* When a “MASTER IS BUSY” error occurs, clear the error using the [C] key. Then, update the backup data again after the master job (backup process) is complete.

* Only the files with the backup error flag turned on are sent to the Backup Master Terminal to update the backup data.

* When the master job is being done on the Master Terminal ([RTR] key is turned on), backup data is not checked or updated.

* If the backup error flag is on when the master job is complete on the Master Terminal ([RTR] key is turned off; the INLINE lamp is off), manual data copy becomes compulsory.

7) Manual Copy of Backup Data

9- 3

10. DATA CAPTURE FUNCTION EO1-11152

10. DATA CAPTURE FUNCTION

10. DATA CAPTURE FUNCTION

(1) Function

To make it possible to transfer data to the PC, the details of registration jobs performed on each terminal are pooled in the Master Terminal as transaction data.

(2) Buffering Transaction Data

When a terminal performs the finalize operation, transaction data entered in registrations is sent to the Master

Terminal. The Master Terminal receives the transaction data and pools it in the transaction buffer.

The transaction data is controlled usually in two buffers. One is for buffering transaction data and the other is for collecting data from the PC. (When one buffer becomes full, or when the collection request is issued from the PC, the buffer in use is released for the PC, and the other buffer is used for subsequent buffering.)

(3) Collecting Transaction Data

The transaction data stored in the Master Terminal is sent to the PC according to the request from the PC.

If the buffer becomes full when the Master Terminal receives the transaction data request command from the

PC, the transaction data of the full buffer is sent to the PC. If the buffer is not full, the transaction data in the buffer (the buffer used for buffering) is sent to the PC.

(4) Processing when the Transaction Buffer is Full

When transaction data is received from the terminal (Backup Master, Satellite Terminal), the Master Terminal checks the vacant area of the transaction buffer. If the received transaction data cannot be stored in the buffer, the Master Terminal sends to the terminal a response indicating that the buffer is full. The terminal receiving this response, performs journal printing indicating that the transaction data is missing.

(5) Supplementary

• Only when the transaction data capture function is selected by program option, transaction data can be sent/received and buffered.

• There is no warning reporting the remaining capacity of the transaction buffer.

• Once the transaction data collection command is issued, data in one buffer is collected. (When data in two buffers is required, this command should be issued twice.)

10- 1

11. MASTER AND BACKUP MASTER ALTERNATION EO1-11152

11. MASTER AND BACKUP MASTER ALTERNATION

11. MASTER AND BACKUP MASTER ALTERNATION

The Backup Master Terminal can be changed to be used as the Master Terminal for an accident that the Master

Terminal becomes down, etc. And the Master Terminal can be changed to be used as the Backup Master when it comes back from repair, etc.

To switch from the Backup Master Terminal function to the Master Terminal function:

1. Disconnect the Master Terminal from the line.

2. When other terminals are in registration operation, finalize and cashier Sign-OFF, or Cashier Key to OFF operations should be performed.

Since a transmission error occurs at this time, an inquiry job should be completed.

3. Perform the operation below for all the terminals excepting the Backup Master Terminal to be switched.

By this key operation, the new Master Terminal will perform processing below.

• Backup Master Terminal is deleted from the Terminal Connection Table.

• In-line ID No. is changed from 02 to 01 (i.e. from Backup Master to Master).

• Store/Register No. of the old Master Terminal is assigned.

• IP Address of the old Master Terminal is assigned.

4. Assign the [RTR] key to desired key of the new Master Terminal.

5. Download the Terminal Connection Table.

The following files are guaranteed when the recovery process is performed. If a file is used in another terminal when the Master Terminal goes down, however, data stored in the terminal is not guaranteed.

• Files controlled in the Master Terminal (PLU file, cashier file, etc.)

• PC transmission information

The following files and data are lost when the Master Terminal goes down.

• Transaction file for data capture

• Files controlled locally on the Master Terminal

• Data in the files which are used by other terminals when the Master Terminal goes down.

11- 1

12. TRANSMISSION ERROR EO1-11152

12.1 Cause of Error

12. TRANSMISSION ERROR

When a terminal makes an inquiry but a communication error occurs for some reason and the inquiry to the other station is not possible, the message “IRC CONNECT ERR” (standard program; programmable) is displayed on that terminal and operation is stopped.

When the Master Terminal cannot access the inquiring file because the Master Terminal is receiving DLL data, the backup data is being updated between the Master and the Backup Master terminals, etc., the message

“MASTER IS BUSY” (standard program; programmable) is displayed and operation is stopped.

12.1 Cause of Error

12.1.1 “IRC CONNECT ERR”

a) Communication with the other station is not possible due to a connection error (cable cut, Master Terminal’s

Power-OFF, etc.). b) Communication was made, but due to a text error, the other station cannot recognize it correctly.

12.1.2 “MASTER IS BUSY”

Cannot access the inquiring file due to the following causes: a) The Master Terminal is receiving DLL data from the PC. b) Programming operations are under way on the Master Terminal. c) Backup data updating process is under way. d) Read/Reset Report taking operation is under way on the Master Terminal.

(inapplicable to a system with the CVS spec. selected) e) ULL operations are under way on the Master Terminal. f) In a system with the CVS spec. selected, copy of the relevant table into the communication buffer area is under way on the Master Terminal.

12.2 Error Display

IRC CONNECT ERR

< 16-digit Dot Windows >

I R C C O N N E C T E R 0 1

MASTER IS BUSY

Terminal ID of the other station

< 16-digit Dot Windows >

M A S T E R I S B U S Y

NOTE: The display contents in the 7-segment portion remains the same as before the error occurrence. The error status will be canceled by the [C] key.

12- 1

12. TRANSMISSION ERROR EO1-11152

12.3 Error Canceling Process

12.3 Error Canceling Process

There are two error-canceling processes in accordance with the inquiring job contents.

Applicable Jobs:

• PLU Inquiry

• PLU Urgent Maintenance

• Customer File (Check Track) Inquiry

• Credit Card No. Inquiry to the Negative Check File

• Cashier Occupy Inquiry

RETRY or CANCEL.

Applicable Jobs:

• PLU Affect

• Customer File Affect

• Cashier Affect

• Cashier Cancel Inquiry

• Transaction Data Send

< 16-digit Dot Windows >

R E T R Y ?

For Retry ................. [AT/TL] (Performs re-sending to the other station.)

For Cancel .............. [@/FOR]

[ST] (Stops the inquiry, printing on journal “ ** X

ST ** “)

NOTE: The “Cancel” in Type 2 above is for only the case the other station is in trouble which cannot be recovered by a Retry operation.

12- 2

13. OTHER OPERATIONS RELATING TO IN-LINE SERVICE EO1-11152

13.1 Time Out

13. OTHER OPERATIONS RELATING TO IN-LINE SERVICE

The followings are other operations relating to in-line service operations.

13.1 Time Out

A Time-Out condition arises when the Master Terminal is making an in-line service operation, such as X/Z report collection, DLL, etc. to the Satellite Terminals. The service timer is provided for servicing each of the Satellite

Terminals, thus on exceeding the time limit, a Time-Out condition will occur. In this case, a “RETRY”,

“SUSPENDING”, “INCOMPLETE ENDING”, or “CANCEL” operation will be accepted.

ex. 1) In a system with a Master Terminal and 3 Satellite Terminals:

Master

Terminal

Busy S1 Busy S2 S3

When a report collection is executed on the Master Terminal, a series of data collections from each terminal (S1 to S3) will be performed, but services for S1 and S2 will be skipped due to their “busy” conditions. Thereafter, services will again be attempted to S1 and S2. As a limit of 30 seconds is provided for servicing each terminal, the total service time in this case will be 30 sec. x 2 units = 60 sec. If data collection is successfully done from S1 within this time limit, servicing S2 follows for the rest of the time, and on reaching the time limit, the Time-Out condition arises, displaying on the Master Terminal the number of not-yet collected terminal(s) and the

Store/Register No. of the last serviced terminal. On this stage, the operator may only go on to “SUSPENDING”

(to wait for a while until S2 clears the “busy” condition), or to “RETRY” (to execute collection service to S2 again, expecting that S2 has already cleared the “busy” condition), or to “INCOMPLETE ENDING” (to abandon the service to S2 and end with collection of the data of so-far collected terminals only), or to “CANCEL” operation. If

“RETRY” is operated, the service time now is 30 seconds because only one terminal remains uncollected. ex. 2)

Master

Terminal

Busy S1 No response

(Power OFF)

S2 S3

In this case, S2 is in a “No response” condition and S1 is in a “busy” condition. As only one terminal is responding with some kind of status, a time out limit of 30 seconds is given (the “No response” status is not subject to the service timer). However, if S2 turns into a “Power ON” condition, it will also be subject to the service timer.

13- 1

13. OTHER OPERATIONS RELATING TO IN-LINE SERVICE EO1-11152

13.2 Suspending

13.2 Suspending

This is to be operated for the purpose of suspending an in-line service being executed, when any terminals remain unserviced, and of going on to a “RETRY”, “INCOMPLETE ENDING”, or “CANCEL” operation as the next step.

OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed)

Depress [ITEM CORR] until the key-in tone is generated.

DESCRIPTION:

The SUSPENDING operation is allowed any time during an in-line service procedure.

If suspending by the [ITEM CORR] key is accepted, the Master Terminal’s display indicates the number of unserviced terminals. (SUSPENDING of a service execution of one terminal is not possible). Now a

“RETRY” or “INCOMPLETE ENDING” operation can be selected as the next step. (When no key-in operations are made in about 10 seconds after a SUSPENDING operation, a RETRY process will automatically be executed.)

13.3 Retry

This is to be operated for the purpose of re-attempting the in-line service that has been stopped due to “TIME

OUT” or that has just been suspended by “SUSPENDING” operation.

OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed)

Depress [AT/TL].

DESCRIPTION:

The in-line service will again be attempted to the unserviced terminals. This operation is possible any number of times after a “TIME OUT” condition or a “SUSPENDING” operation as long as any terminals remain unserviced. (When no key-in operations are made in about 10 seconds after a SUSPENDING operation, a RETRY process will automatically be executed.)

13.4 Incomplete Ending

This is to be operated to abandon services to unserviced terminals, and ends the in-line service with the services to service-completed terminals only.

OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed)

Depress [NS].

DESCRIPTION:

If an in-line service being executed does not seem to end normally due perhaps to some abnormal status of any Satellite Terminals after “TIME OUT”, “SUSPENDING”, and/or “RETRY” operations, the [NS] key can be depressed to end the in-line service with only the service-completed terminals serviced and the unserviced terminals remaining unserviced. In case of In-line X or Z Report Collection sequences, reports of only the service-completed terminals will be issued.

As part of the print out, the Store/Register No. of the terminal and its status will be printed.

13- 2

13. OTHER OPERATIONS RELATING TO IN-LINE SERVICE EO1-11152

13.5 Cancel

Status Print Format

1R QQQQQQ "

Store/Register No. Status Symbol

?: No response (power off, etc.)

BUSY: The terminal is busy (during a sale, etc.)

Blank: Other statuses

13.5 Cancel

This can be operated when a SUSPENDING condition arises due to a TIME OUT or a SUSPENDING operation.

The entire in-line service being performed is cancelled. This operation is effective to in-line read report operations but not to any in-line reset report operations.

OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: (Mode Lock: X)

Depress [@/FOR].

DESCRIPTION:

The CANCEL symbol is printed as in the following.

CANCEL Print Format

13- 3

E PRINTED IN MALAYSIA

EO1-11152D

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement